TABLE OF CONTENTS

Oracle Smart View for Office - User's Guide
Documentation Accessibility

Documentation Feedback

Copyright Page

Welcome to Smart View

Introduction to Smart View

- Overview

- Smart View Components

- Ribbons

- Smart View Panel

- Installing Smart View

- About this Guide

Managing Data Source Connections

- Connections

- Shared Connections and Private Connections

- Connecting to Data Sources

- Disconnecting from Data Sources

- Creating Shared Connections

- Creating Private Connections

- Using the Private Connection Wizard

- Using the Quick Connection Method

- Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

- Private Connection URL Syntax

- Modifying Connections

- Modifying Private Connections

- Modifying Connections within an Office Document

Dimensions and Members

- About Dimensions and Members

- Dimension and Member Naming Limitation

- Selecting Members from the Member Selector

- Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar

- Displaying the POV Toolbar

- Selecting Members Using the Cell-Based POV

- Entering Members in Free-Form Mode

- Filtering by Attribute

- Filtering by Subsets

- Selecting Period-to-Date Members

- Defining Member Name Display in the Member Selector

- Duplicate Member Names

- Member Perspective

- Aliases and Alias Tables

- Selecting an Alias Table for the Current Worksheet

- Selecting an Alias Table for the Connection

- Aliases from Different Alias Tables

- Displaying Member Names and Their Aliases in the Grid

- Displaying Aliases in the Member Selector

- Member Information

- The POV Manager

- Selecting Members for the Default or Background POV

- Copying and Pasting a POV

- Deleting a POV

Data and Data Cells

- Refreshing Data

- Refreshing from a Ribbon

- Refreshing Individual Reports from Document Contents

- Using the Submit Data Options

- About the Submit Data Options

- Submitting Data

- Submitting Data Without Refreshing

- Submitting Data Ranges

- Calculating Data

- Calculating Data in Financial Management and Hyperion Enterprise

- Calculating Data in Essbase

- Consolidating Data

- Working with Currencies

- Translating Currencies in Financial Management and Hyperion Enterprise

- Changing Currency in Planning

- Adjusting Values in Data Cells

- Data Perspective

- Drill-Through Reports

- Linked Reporting Objects

- Attaching a Linked Reporting Object to a Data Cell

- Launching a Linked Reporting Object from a Data Cell

- Linked Partitions

- Cell Comments

- Cell Comments in Planning

- Cell Comments in Financial Management

- Cell Comments in Essbase

- Enabling Essbase Cell Comments

- Viewing Essbase Cell Comments in the Sheet

- Editing Essbase Cell Comments

- Deleting Essbase Cell Comments

- Attachments

- Cell History

Ad Hoc Analysis

- About Ad Hoc Analysis

- Starting Ad Hoc Analysis

- Inserting Essbase Attribute Dimensions on the Sheet

- Preserving Excel Formulas in Ad Hoc Grids

- Formatting Ad Hoc Grids

- Using Smart View Formatting

- Using Excel Formatting

- Zooming In and Out

- Zooming In

- Zooming Out

- Setting a Default Zoom Level

- Selecting Members to Display when Zooming

- Enabling Double-Click Zooming

- Zooming and Formatting

- Zooming Operations in Cells that Contain Formulas

- Pivoting

- Pivoting Dimensions Between Rows and Columns

- Pivoting Dimensions Between the Grid and the POV Toolbar

- Removing Selected Members From the Grid

- Inserting Rows and Columns

- Displaying and Suppressing Repeated Members

- Using the Suppress Repeating Members Option with 11.1.2.2.102 and Earlier Workbooks

- Multiple Grids on a Worksheet

- Creating Multiple-Grid Worksheets

- Converting Ad Hoc Worksheets to Multiple-Grid Worksheets

- Changing Connections in Multiple-Grid Worksheets

- POV on Essbase Multiple-Grid Worksheets

- Multiple-Grid Example: Butterfly Report

- Cascading Reports and Ad Hoc Grids

- Substitution Variables

Data Forms

- Working with Forms in Excel

- Opening Forms in Excel

- Excel Formulas in Forms

- Working with User Variables

- Planning Forms

- Planning Form Behavior in Smart View

- Saving Ad Hoc Grids as Forms

- Performing Ad Hoc Analysis in Planning Forms

- Financial Management Data Forms

- About Financial Management Members

- Adding Financial Management Members

- Using Financial Management Linked Forms

General Operations

- Using Undo and Redo

- Undo Support By Provider

- Undo Support in Essbase

- Undo Support in Financial Management

- Undo Support in Planning

- Undo Support in Enterprise Performance Reporting

- Specifying the Number of Undo and Redo Actions

- Copying and Pasting

- Importing Metadata into Copied Worksheets

- Importing Metadata into Copied Slides or Presentations

- Copying, Pasting, and Refreshing Content

- Copying Data Between Excel, Word, and PowerPoint

- Enabling Automatic Column Width Adjustment

- Sheet Information

- Sheet Information Support By Provider

- Sheet Information Support in Essbase

- Sheet Information Support in Financial Management

- Sheet Information Support in Planning

- Document Contents

- Shared Workbooks

- Opening Large Workbooks in Smart View

- Printing POV Members in the Header and Footer

- Enabling and Disabling Smart View

- Enabling and Disabling Smart View Within Smart View

- Enabling Smart View from Microsoft Office

Smart Query

- About Smart Query

- Creating a Smart Query

- Defining Sets

- Defining Set Filters

- Building the Smart Query

- Completing the Smart Query

- Opening a Smart Query

- Copying and Pasting

- Copying Smart Query Definitions in Excel

- Copying Smart Query Sets and Filters

- Copying Smart Query Reports to Word and PowerPoint

- Sharing Smart Query Definitions

Smart Slices

- About Smart Slices

- Creating Reports with Smart Slices

- Deleting Reports or Report Objects

- Sliders

- Creating a Slider from One Query

- Creating a Slider from Joined Queries

- Smart Slices, Ad Hoc Analysis, and Forms

- Creating Smart Slices

- Setting Smart Slice Data Boundaries

- Setting Smart Slice Preferences

Smart Forms

- About Smart Forms

- Creating Smart Forms

- Smart Form Example Scenario

- Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms

- Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms in Alphabetic Order

- Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms by Category

The Query Designer and MDX Queries

- The Query Designer

- Creating Queries

- Editing Queries and Rerunning Reports

- Filtering Data

- Analyzing Time-Related Data in Query Designer

- MDX Queries

Task Lists

- Task Lists

- Working with Tasks from the Smart View Panel

- Opening a Task List

- Viewing the Task List

- Executing a Task

- Completing a Task

- Creating Task List Reports

- Integrating Task Lists with Microsoft Outlook

Oracle Journals for Financial Management

- About Oracle Journals for Financial Management

- Installing the Oracle Journals Extension

- Installing from the Smart View Installation Folder

- Journal Roles

- Processing Journals in Smart View

- Creating Journals

- Editing Journal Properties

- Guidelines for Creating Journals from Ad Hoc Grids or Data Forms

- Opening Journals

- Scanning Journals

- Viewing Journal Status

- Modifying List Display in Manage Journals Window

- Editing Journals

- Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail

- Copying and Pasting Journal Cells

- Submitting Journals

- Unsubmitting Journals

- Approving Journals

- Rejecting Journals

- Posting Journals

- Unposting Journals

- Journal Validation

- Analyzing Journals

- Deleting Journals

- Entity Detail Reports

- Starting the Entity Detail Report

- Report Point of View

- Selecting Rows for the Report

- Displaying Base Details

- Displaying Line Item Detail

- Linking to Journal Detail

- Displaying Source and Destination Transactions

- Exporting the Entity Details Report to Excel

Smart View and Planning

- Planning Approvals

- Changing Planning Unit Status

- Finding Planning Units

- Planning Unit Promotional Path

- Planning Unit Annotations

- Out of Office Assistant

- Monitoring Planning Job Status

- Searching for a Page in Planning

- Copying Versions

- Composite Forms

- Working with Planning Business Rules

- Launching Business Rules in Excel

- Entering Runtime Prompts

- Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

- Spreading Data

- Spreading Data for Time Periods

- Spreading Data with Cell Locking

- Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

- Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

- Member Formula

- Supporting Detail

- Adding Supporting Detail

- Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

- Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

- Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

- Setting Planning Preferences

- Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning

- Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

- Viewing Formatting in Smart View

- Clearing Formatting

- Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

- Supported Native Excel Formatting

- Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

- Working Offline

- Taking Forms Offline

- Working Offline with Forms

- Synchronizing Data to the Planning Server

- Refreshing the Offline Form Definition and Data

Smart View and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

- Planning Approvals

- Changing Planning Unit Status

- Finding Planning Units

- Planning Unit Promotional Path

- Planning Unit Annotations

- Out of Office Assistant

- Monitoring Planning Job Status

- Searching for a Page in Planning

- Copying Versions

- Composite Forms

- Working with Planning Business Rules

- Launching Business Rules in Excel

- Entering Runtime Prompts

- Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

- Spreading Data

- Spreading Data for Time Periods

- Spreading Data with Cell Locking

- Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

- Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

- Member Formula

- Supporting Detail

- Adding Supporting Detail

- Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

- Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

- Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

- Setting Planning Preferences

- Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning

- Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

- Viewing Formatting in Smart View

- Clearing Formatting

- Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

- Supported Native Excel Formatting

- Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Smart View and Reporting and Analysis

- Importing Reporting and Analysis Documents

- Editing and Refreshing Documents

- Refreshing Reporting and Analysis Documents

- Financial Reporting and Web Analysis Import Formats

- Importing Interactive Reporting Documents

- Importing Interactive Reporting Documents into Excel

- Importing Interactive Reporting Documents into Word and PowerPoint

- Editing Interactive Reporting Documents

- Importing Financial Reporting Documents

- Importing Financial Reporting Documents into Excel

- Importing Financial Reporting Documents into Word and PowerPoint

- Editing Financial Reporting Documents

- Creating Templates in PowerPoint Documents

- Refreshing PowerPoint Templates

- Importing Production Reporting Documents

- Importing Production Reporting Jobs into Excel

- Importing Production Reporting Jobs into Word and PowerPoint

- Importing Production Reporting Job Outputs into Word, and PowerPoint

- Editing Production Reporting Jobs

- Importing Web Analysis Documents

- Importing a Web Analysis Document or Document Objects

- Editing Web Analysis Documents

Smart View and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

- About Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

- Setting Up Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Smart View

- Downloading and Running the Smart View Installer

- Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting

- Installing the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Extension

- Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View

- Using Performance Reporting Home

- Authoring Doclets

- About the Author Phase Process

- About Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Authoring Doclets in Smart View

- Checking Out Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Undoing Checkouts

- Working with Doclets and Supplemental Doclets Locally

- Uploading and Working with Page Attributes and Slide Masters

- Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Submitting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Approving or Rejecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Approving Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Rejecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Inspecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Performing Reviews

- About the Review Phase Process

- Collaborative Review Process

- Iterative Review Process

- Working with Review Instances in Smart View

- Selecting a Review Instance

- Posting Comments

- Filtering and Sorting Comments

- Editing and Deleting Comments

- Attaching Supporting Files and Customizing Comment Text

- Addressing and Closing Review Comments

- Marking Reviews Complete

- Performing Sign Offs

- About the Sign Off Phase

- Signing Off On or Rejecting a Report

- Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Data in Smart View

- Example: Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Data in Smart View

- Performing Ad Hoc Analysis with Enterprise Performance Reporting Data

- Copying and Pasting Enterprise Performance Reporting Data into Doclets

Smart View and Oracle BI EE

- About Oracle BI EE and Smart View

- Features and Components of Oracle BI EE in Smart View

- Installing the Oracle BI EE Extension

- For Smart View End Users

- For Smart View Administrators

- Working with Windows System Locales in Oracle BI EE

- Connecting to Multiple Oracle BI EE Data Sources

- Oracle BI EE Catalog

- Working with Oracle BI EE Analyses, Views, and Dashboards

- Supported Oracle BI EE View and Object Types

- Inserting Tables and Pivot Tables

- Inserting Graphs

- Supported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types

- Unsupported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types

- Inserting Compound Views

- Inserting Dashboards

- Working with Prompts

- Working with Page Prompts

- Specifying Preferences for Refreshing Views

- Refreshing Views

- Masking Data in Views

- Viewing Properties of an Oracle BI EE Object

- Copying and Pasting Oracle BI EE Objects Between Office Applications

- Editing an Analysis in BI Answers

- Copying and Pasting Views From Oracle BI to Office

- Editing Views Created in BI Answers

- What Can and Cannot Be Edited

- Editing Pivot Tables Inserted into PowerPoint

- Other Guidelines

- Working with Views Using the View Designer

- Launching the View Designer

- Defining the View Type and Display Style

- Defining the View Layout

- Defining the Filter Expression for Views in View Designer

- Filter Operators

- Publishing Views

- Editing Views Created in View Designer

- About Editing Views Created in View Designer

- Guidelines for Editing Views Created in View Designer

- Accessing the View to Edit

- Determining Where a View was Created

- Editing Views that were Created in View Designer

- Refreshing Data in a View Created in View Designer

Smart View Options

- Global Options and Sheet Level Options

- Global Options

- Sheet Options

- Member Options

- Member Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Member Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Member Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

- Member Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

- Data Options

- Data Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Data Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Data Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

- Data Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

- Advanced Options

- Formatting Options

- Formatting Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Formatting Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Formatting Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

- Formatting Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

- Cell Styles

- Cell Style Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Cell Style Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Cell Style Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

- Extensions

- Supported Extensions

- Enabling and Disabling Extensions

- Initially Checking for Available Extensions

- Installing Extensions

- Updating Extensions

- Enabling Logging for Extension Installations

- Overriding the Default URL for the Extension Download

- Uninstalling Extensions

Functions

- Using Functions

- Creating Functions

- Creating Functions in the Function Builder

- Creating Functions Manually

- Running Functions

- Fixing Links in Functions

- Copying and Pasting HsGetValue Functions

- Function Descriptions

- HsGetValue

- HsSetValue

- HsGetSheetInfo

- HsCurrency

- HsDescription

- HsLabel

- HsGetText

- HsSetText

- HsGetVariable

- Common Function Error Codes

Free-Form Mode

- About Free-Form Mode

- Free-Form Guidelines

- Free-Form Grid Examples

- Simple Grids

- Column Dimensions

- Stacked Dimensions

- Comments in Free-Form Grids

- Comments in Blank Rows and Columns

- Grid with Complex Comments

- Invalid Placement of Comments

- Comments Inside and Outside of Grid Boundaries

- Formulas in Free-Form Grids

- Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Grids

- Creating Free-Form Reports

- Retrieving Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Mode

- Creating Asymmetric Reports

- Actions That May Cause Unexpected Behavior

Smart View Diagnostics

- About Smart View Diagnostics

- Displaying the Diagnostics Group in the Smart View Ribbon

- Customizing Diagnostics Features

- Using the Smart View Diagnostics Tools

- Cleaning Up the Diagnostics Folder

Using Other Applications with Smart View

- Crystal Ball EPM

- Working with Crystal Ball EPM Workbooks

- Toolbar Operations

- Repository Options

- Smart View and Spreadsheet Add-in

- Migrating Functions

- Converting Workbooks

- Converting One Workbook

- Converting Multiple Workbooks

- Migrating Connections for Functions

Finding Information

- Smart View Accessibility

- Smart View VBA Functions

- Data Sources and Other Products

- Using Oracle User Productivity Kit

Documentation Accessibility

For information about Oracles commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc .

Access to Oracle Support

Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.

Documentation Feedback

Send feedback on this documentation to: epmdoc_ww@oracle.com

Follow EPM Information Development on these social media sites:

LinkedIn - http://www.linkedin.com/groups?gid=3127051&goback=.gmp_3127051

Twitter - http://twitter.com/hyperionepminfo

Facebook - http://www.facebook.com/pages/Hyperion-EPM-Info/102682103112642

Google+ - https://plus.google.com/106915048672979407731/#106915048672979407731/posts

YouTube - https://www.youtube.com/user/EvolvingBI

Oracle® Smart View for Office

Release 11.1.2.5.520

Users Guide

Copyright © 2004, 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Updated: August 2016

Authors: EPM Information Development Team

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS:

Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.

This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Microsoft, Windows, PowerPoint, Word, Excel, Access, Office, Outlook, Visual Studio, Visual Basic, Internet Explorer, Active Directory, and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.

Welcome to Smart View

The help explains features and options including the concepts, processes, and examples that you need to use Oracle Smart View for Office. To find information, click Contents or Search in the left frame.

Introduction to Smart View

In This Section:

Overview

Smart View Components

Ribbons

Smart View Panel

Installing Smart View

About this Guide

Overview

Smart View works with Oracle Enterprise Performance Management on-premises and cloud data source providers.

Using Smart View, you can view, import, manipulate, distribute, and share data from various data sources using Microsoft Excel, Word, Outlook, and PowerPoint.

Smart View with On-Premises Providers

Smart View provides a common Microsoft Office interface for these Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System data sources:

- Oracle Essbase

- Oracle Hyperion Financial Management

- Oracle Hyperion Planning

- Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Workspace

- Oracle Hyperion Reporting and Analysis

- Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management

- Oracle Hyperion Enterprise®

Additionally, Smart View supports several on-premises and cloud extensions. See Extensions for more information.

Smart View with Cloud Services Providers

Smart View provides a common Office interface for these Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Cloud providers and extensions:

- Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

- Oracle Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

Smart View works with these extensions:

- Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud extension

- Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting extension

- Predictive Planning extension

- Planning Admin extension

The Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud and Financial Reporting extensions are discussed in this guide. The other extensions listed above are discussed in their respective guides (see the Oracle Help Center for more information).

See Extensions for more information on installing, updating, and removing extensions.

Additionally, in this guide, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

Related Topics:

Smart View Components

Smart View Components

The basic components of Smart View, from which you connect to your data source and access Smart View functionality, are ribbons and the Smart View Panel.

The components displayed depend on the Microsoft Office application that you have open.

Related Topics:

Ribbons

Smart View Panel

Ribbons

Note:

Smart View is designed to work optimally with the ribbon structure of Microsoft Office 2007 or later.

You access Smart View functionality in Office applications through ribbon commands. The Smart View ribbon, which contains commands for common Smart View operations and for Reporting and Analysis operations, is always present. When you connect to a data source (other than Reporting and Analysis or Financial Close Management), the corresponding data source ribbon is also displayed. Each ribbon displays only the commands supported for that data source and mode. For Planning, Financial Management, and Hyperion Enterprise, when you enter ad hoc analysis (see Ad Hoc Analysis ), the data source ribbon is replaced by its ad hoc version. The ribbons are:

- Smart View

- Essbase

- Planning

- Planning Ad Hoc

- Performance Reporting

- HFM (Financial Management )

- HFM Ad Hoc

- Enterprise (Hyperion Enterprise)

- Enterprise Ad Hoc

- Oracle BI EE

- Others —If the administrator has installed and configured your Smart View system with extensions, there may be other ribbons; for example, Performance Reporting , Disclosure Management or Strategic Finance .

Smart View Panel

From the Smart View Panel, you can manage data source connections, access data and task lists, and create reports.

You can also open Oracle Crystal Ball Enterprise Performance Management workbooks if you are licensed for Crystal Ball EPM or related products.

The Smart View Panel, opened from the Smart View ribbon, is displayed by default on the right side of the Microsoft Office application. You can move, resize, or close the Smart View Panel from the down arrow in the title bar.

The Smart View Panel contains the following panes:

- Home —A panel that displays links to Shared Connections and Private Connections as well as a list of recently used items—ad hoc grids, forms, and tasks—that you can click to establish a connection.

- Shared Connections —A drop-down menu of available connections from Oracle Hyperion Shared Services and a tree view of the contents of the currently selected connection.

- Private Connections —A drop-down menu of available connections saved on the local computer and a tree view of the contents of the currently selected connection. You can also enter a URL to connect directly to a data source here.

- Task Lists —A tree list of tasks from which you can manage your tasks. This pane opens only when you select a task list from Shared Connections or Private Connections.

- Action Panel —A list of operations available based on the selection in the shared connection. private connection, or task list tree list.

- Document Contents —A task pane in the Smart View Panel that provides a view of the connections and content existing in the current Office document.

- Other —If the administrator has installed and configured your Smart View system with extensions, there may be other panels; for example, Smart Query or Crystal Ball EPM workbooks.

Installing Smart View

Instructions for installing Smart View are in the Oracle Smart View for Office Installation and Configuration Guide .

Refer to the installation scenario you require in " Installing Smart View. "

Also, take note of the following information on locale settings when installing Smart View.

Windows, Office, and Smart View Locale Settings

On your Smart View client machine, the following locale settings should match:

- Smart View xml:lang uage option

- Microsoft Office xml:lang uage

- Windows Regional Settings

- Windows operating system

Running Smart View in a xml:lang uage other than the xml:lang uage of the machines Windows operating system, system locale, or Office xml:lang uage, may result in incorrect data being returned. For example, if the Windows operating system, system locale, and Office xml:lang uage are English, and you run Smart View in Russian, reports or chart data may display incorrectly.

Ensure that on your Smart View client machine, the locale settings noted above match.

About this Guide

This guide contains information applicable to both EPM System On-Premises providers and Cloud providers.

Throughout this guide, unless otherwise noted:

- References to Planning apply to both on-premises Planning and Planning for Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, with the following exception:

At the beginning of topics where supported data sources are listed, on-premises Planning is referred to as Planning; and Planning for Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud is referred to as Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

- References to Financial Reporting apply to both on-premises Financial Reporting and Financial Reporting for Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

Managing Data Source Connections

In This Section:

Connections

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Connecting to Data Sources

Disconnecting from Data Sources

Creating Shared Connections

Creating Private Connections

Modifying Connections

Connections

You connect to data sources, manage your connections, and open grids, forms, and task lists all from the Smart View Panel.

Depending on how the administrator configured Smart View, you may or may not be required to enter your user name and password as you change data providers and Office applications.

Related Topics:

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Connecting to Data Sources

Disconnecting from Data Sources

Creating Private Connections

Modifying Connections

Shared Connections and Private Connections

You connect to data sources through shared or private connections.

- Shared Connections

Shared connections are either:

- Accessed from a central server location and available to multiple users through the Smart View Panel.

- Stored either on each Smart View client machine or on a web server in an XML file created by a system administrator. The connections in the XML file are then available to the user through shared connections in the Smart View Panel.

See " Accessing Shared Connections from an XML File " in the Oracle Smart View for Office Installation and Configuration Guide for information on preparing and distributing this XML file.

You cannot add, edit, or rename shared connections, but you can save them as private connections, which you can edit and rename.

- Private Connections

Private connections are those that you create by saving a shared connection to your local computer or by entering a URL to a provider that is not configured for shared connections. When you create a private connection, it becomes the active connection.

Related Topics:

Connections

Connecting to Data Sources

Disconnecting from Data Sources

Creating Private Connections

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Modifying Connections

Connecting to Data Sources

You can connect to only one data source per worksheet.

You can connect to only one data source per worksheet with these exceptions:

- Essbase—You can connect to multiple Essbase databases on a single worksheet, as described in Multiple Grids on a Worksheet and Changing Connections in Multiple-Grid Worksheets

- Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition—You can connect to multiple Oracle Business Intelligence catalogs on a single sheet, as described in Connecting to Multiple Oracle BI EE Data Sources

To connect to a data source:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Panel .

2. From Smart View Home or from the menu displayed when you click the arrow next to , do one of the following:

- Select Shared Connections to open the Shared Connections panel, where you select a data source from the drop-down menu. Connections available for the selected data source are displayed in a tree list.

Note:

If you are accessing Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud or Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, the login screen is displayed. Enter your Oracle Cloud Identity Service Domain credentials and identity domain, and then select a data source from the drop-down menu. Proceed to step 4 .

For examples of the URL syntax to use, see Creating Shared Connections .

- Click Private Connections to open the Private Connections panel, where you select a connection from the drop-down menu.

- Click Private Connections . Enter a URL in the field and press Enter. For examples of the URL syntax to use, see Creating Private Connections .

- Click a connection name under Recently Used . You can click to pin items to this list.

3. In Connect to Data Source , enter your user name and password for the data source.

4. In the Smart View Panel tree list, double-click the item—form, ad hoc grid, Smart Slice, task list, or catalog—that you want to open.

After the item is opened on the grid, you can easily locate it in the tree view. Click the arrow next to and select Locate Worksheet Connection .

Notes

The following items apply to Essbase only:

- If external authentication is disabled, for security reasons, you must provide your user name and password each time you connect to a different application on the same server.

- Once connected to an Essbase database, users can view database notes associated with the database. To display database notes, from the Smart View Panel, right-click the name of the Essbase database, and then select Database Note . You cannot edit these database notes from Smart View. Database notes can be implemented in VBA by using the VBA function, HypGetDatabaseNote (see the Oracle Smart View for Office Developers Guide ).

Related Topics:

Connections

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Disconnecting from Data Sources

Creating Shared Connections

Creating Private Connections

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Modifying Connections

Disconnecting from Data Sources

You can disconnect from the current connection or from all connections.

To disconnect only from the current connection:

1. From the Smart View Panel, select the connection that is currently open in the tree list.

2. Optional: To find this connection quickly, click the arrow next to and select Locate Worksheet Connection.

3. Right-click and select Disconnect .

Disconnecting from the current connection does not invalidate single-sign on (SSO).

To disconnect from all connected shared connections and private connections:

1. From the Smart View Panel, click .

2. Select Disconnect All.

This selection invalidates SSO, and you must log in again the next time you connect.

Related Topics:

Connections

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Connecting to Data Sources

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Creating Private Connections

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Modifying Connections

Creating Shared Connections

You create a shared connection using a connection URL provided to you by your Smart View administrator.

When you have the connection URL information, you can complete the procedure in this topic.

To create a shared connection in Smart View:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Options .

2. In the Options dialog box, select the Advanced tab.

3. In the Shared Connections URL text box, enter the connection URL provided to you by your Smart View administrator.

The URL syntax for on-premise providers is:

http://<server>:<port>/workspace/SmartViewProviders

The URL syntax for cloud providers is:

https://<service_name>.oraclecloud.com/workspace/index.jsp

Note:

Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud requires a private connection. See Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting .

4. Click OK to close the Options dialog box.

5. Connect by following the procedure in Connecting to Data Sources .

Note:

If you would like to create a private connection, see Private Connection URL Syntax for a complete list of the required URL syntax for each data source.

Creating Private Connections

You can create private connections in the following ways:

Using the Private Connection Wizard

Using the Quick Connection Method

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Related Topics:

Connections

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Connecting to Data Sources

Disconnecting from Data Sources

Modifying Connections

Using the Private Connection Wizard

To create a private connection using the wizard:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Panel .

2. From the Smart View Panel, click the arrow next to , and then select Private Connections .

3. In the Action Panel, click Create new connection to display the Add Connection wizard.

Alternatively, click the arrow next to and select Create new connection .

4. In Add Connection - URL , enter the URL for the private connection, then click Next .

Follow the syntax guidelines in Private Connection URL Syntax .

5. In Add Connection - Application/Cube , navigate to the application and database to work with, select it, and then click Next .

6. In Add Connection -Name/Description , enter a friendly name for the connection and an optional description.

7. Click Finish .

8. Optional: To select a private connection, click the drop-down arrow in the connection text box in the Smart View Panel.

Private connections are listed by provider type.

Related Topics:

Using the Quick Connection Method

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Private Connection URL Syntax

Using the Quick Connection Method

You can create a private connection using the quick connection method if you know the URL. URLs are generally provided to you by your Smart View administrator.

To create a private connection using the quick connection method:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Panel .

2. From the Smart View Panel, click the arrow next to , and then select Private Connections .

3. In the text box, enter the URL or the local storage directory for the data source to which you want to connect.

Figure 1. Text Box for Entering URL when Creating a Quick Connection

The URL syntax for the various data sources is listed in Private Connection URL Syntax . Contact your system administrator for the URL to use.

4. Click .

5. Expand the tree in the Smart View Panel and navigate to the application and database that you want to work with.

If you are prompted to log in, enter your login credentials.

Deleting the List of Quick Connections

To delete the entire list of quick connections, click the arrow next to , and then select Clear Quick Connect URL Entries .

Related Topics:

Using the Private Connection Wizard

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Private Connection URL Syntax

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Although you cannot create shared connections without administrative privileges, you can save them as private connections if they are enabled for private connections.

To create a private connection from a shared connection:

1. From the Shared Connections tree list, select an item to save as a private connection.

2. From the Action Panel, select Add to private connections .

This option is available only if the selected item is enabled for saving as a private connection.

3. Optional: From Save as Private Connection , edit the name and description of the connection.

4. Click OK .

The connection name is displayed in the following:

- The Shared Connections tree list, indicated as private by a small arrow

- The Private Connections drop-down menu

5. To ensure that the current worksheet is connected to the newly-created private connection, in the Smart View ribbon, click Connections , then Active Connections , and then select the check box next to the new connection name.

Alternatively, once you perform a Smart View action (for example, select Ad hoc analysis from the Action Panel), the connection is automatically made.

Related Topics:

Using the Private Connection Wizard

Using the Quick Connection Method

Private Connection URL Syntax

Private Connection URL Syntax

This topic lists the syntax required for creating private connections.

On-Premises:

- Financial Management:

- Financial Management 11.1.2.4.x and later:

http(s)://
servername
:
port
/hfmadf/../hfmadf/officeprovider

- Financial Management 11.1.2.3.x and earlier:

http(s)://
servername
:
port
/hfmofficeprovider/hfmofficeprovider.aspx

- Hyperion Enterprise:

http://
servername
:
port
/heofficeprovider/heofficeprovider.aspx

- Planning:

http(s)://
servername
:
port
/HyperionPlanning/SmartView

- Essbase:

http(s)://
servername
:
port
/aps/SmartView

- Reporting and Analysis:

http(s)://
servername
:
port
/raframework/browse/listXML

- Financial Close Management:

http://
servername
:
port
/fcc/servlets/smartview/fcmsvservlet

- Oracle Hyperion Strategic Finance:

http://
servername
:
port
/StrategicPlanning/SmartView

- Oracle BI EE:

- Using the Add Connection wizard:

http://
servername
:
port
/analytics/jbips

- Using the Quick Connection method:

OBI:http://
servername
:
port
/analytics/jbips

Cloud

- Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

http(s)://
serviceURL
/HyperionPlanning/SmartView

- Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

http(s)://
serviceURL
/epm/SmartView

Related Topics:

Using the Private Connection Wizard

Using the Quick Connection Method

Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections

Modifying Connections

You can modify connections in two different ways: Modify a private connection or modify the connection information for individual entities within an Office document.

- Modify a private connection. You can modify a private connection to change the server, application, or database information for all data providers associated with the connection.

The connection information can be changed whether you are connected or not.

For example, you may be working in a test environment using a private connection. When you are ready to move to a production environment, you change the server information for that private connection to access the new environment.

This procedure is described in Modifying Private Connections .

- Modify the connection information for individual entities within a document. You can modify the connection information for individual entities within a document using the Document Contents panel. You can change connections per sheet. Or, in a sheet containing multiple entities, you can change the server connection for one or more of the individual entities.

For example, while connected to Oracle BI EE, you may have inserted a compound view containing 10 graphs. Now you would like to pull data from a different Oracle BI EE server for three of the graphs. Using the Document Contents panel, you can modify the connection information s for the each of the three graphs to point to the newOracle BI EE server.

This procedure is described in Modifying Connections within an Office Document .

Note:

When you modify connection information, the new data source that you point to must contain all the dimensions and members of the previous data source. Any missing dimensions or members in the new data source will cause errors upon refresh.

Related Topics:

Connections

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Connecting to Data Sources

Disconnecting from Data Sources

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Shared Connections and Private Connections

Creating Private Connections

Modifying Private Connections

Use the Edit Connection wizard to modify a private connection.

To modify a private connection:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Panel .

2. From the Smart View Panel, click the arrow next to , and then select Private Connections .

3. Click the arrow in the text box to select a private connection to modify, and then click .

Note:

You may modify the private connection even if you are already connected to it.

4. In the Smart View Panel, expand the tree to the connection name, and then select it.

Figure 2. Tree Expanded with Connection Name Selected in Smart View Panel

5. In the Action Panel, select Modify connection .

Alternatively, right-click the private connection name and select Modify connection .

6. In the Edit Connection - URL page, edit the URL as required, and then click Next .

Optionally, select the Set as default connection check box, and then click Next .

7. In the Edit Connection - Application/Cube page, and navigate the tree to the new application and cube, select it, and then click Next .

Alternatively, select the Advanced Setup check box and manually enter the new connection information in the Server , Application , and Cube/Database text boxes, and then click Next .

8. In the Edit Connection - Name/Description page, change the connection name and description as required, and then click Finish .

Modifying Connections within an Office Document

From the Document Contents pane, you can change connections for Smart View objects within an Officedocument. This is useful when sharing an Office document between departments that point to different servers or when moving from a test to a production environment.

You can change the connection properties for all entities in a document that share the same connection information (for example, all worksheets or grids that point to the same application and database on a particular server). Or you can change the connection information sheet by sheet.

To modify connections from the Document Contents pane:

1. In the Document Contents pane, from the drop-down list box, perform an action:

- Select a sheet from a selected document

- Select a particular connection

- Select All Connections

2. Select the Modify Connection link at the bottom of the pane.

Alternatively, right-click a connection name or sheet name and select Modify Connection . You can also modify connections as follows:

- To modify a connection for all sheets in the workbook, select the top-level tree node connection name in Document Contents

- To modify a connection for a specific sheet, select the connection name under the specific sheet-level tree node

The Edit Connection - URL page of the wizard is displayed.

3. In the URL drop-down list, select an existing connection or enter a new connection URL.

4. Click Next and in Edit Connection - Application/Cube , expand Servers , and navigate to the application and database to which you want to connect, depending upon the provider requirements.

Alternatively, select the Advanced Setup check box and manually enter the information for Server , Application , and Cube/Database , as the provider requires.

For example, Figure 3, Edit Connection - Application/Cube Advanced Setup shows the entries for connecting to an Essbase application and database.

Figure 3. Edit Connection - Application/Cube Advanced Setup

5. Click Finish .

The modified connection information is saved when you save the workbook.

Dimensions and Members

In This Section:

About Dimensions and Members

Dimension and Member Naming Limitation

Selecting Members from the Member Selector

Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar

Displaying the POV Toolbar

Selecting Members Using the Cell-Based POV

Entering Members in Free-Form Mode

Filtering by Attribute

Filtering by Subsets

Selecting Period-to-Date Members

Defining Member Name Display in the Member Selector

Duplicate Member Names

Member Perspective

Aliases and Alias Tables

Member Information

The POV Manager

About Dimensions and Members

Dimensions are data categories used to organize business data for retrieval and preservation of values. Dimensions usually contain hierarchies of related members grouped within them. For example, a Year dimension often includes members for each time period, such as quarters and months.

You can select members for the grid from the Member Selection dialog box available from the data source ribbon, from the POV toolbar, or by entering the member name using free-form mode.

Related Topics:

Dimension and Member Naming Limitation

Selecting Members from the Member Selector

Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar

Entering Members in Free-Form Mode

Dimension and Member Naming Limitation

If you use Smart View cell functions (described in Functions ), then do not use the hash mark ( # ) or the semicolon ( ; ) in member names, dimension names, or variable names. These characters are reserved for delimiters in Smart View cell functions.

Selecting Members from the Member Selector

You select members for a variety of purposes within Smart View: ad hoc grids, functions, the POV Manager, and for taking Planning forms offline. The Member Selection dialog boxes in these locations may vary slightly, and not all options are always available. You can select members for one dimension at a time.

Note:

Essbase only: To quickly add attribute dimensions onto an ad hoc or free-form grid, follow the instructions in Inserting Essbase Attribute Dimensions on the Sheet . You can then use the instructions in this chapter to select and work with members from the attribute dimensions.

Figure 4, The Member Selection Dialog Box shows the Member Selection dialog box with the Year dimension and its members as examples.

Figure 4. The Member Selection Dialog Box

To select members:

1. To display the Member Selection dialog box, which contains a tree list of available members for the dimension selected, do one of the following:

- Select a dimension or member on the grid, and then from an Ad Hoc or data source ribbon, click Member Selection .

- From an open dialog box enabled for member selection, click Member Selection .

- On a blank worksheet, from the Smart View Panel, right-click a cube name and select Member Selection . Use this method to select members for functions and references (see Functions ).

- Click on a user variable in a Planning or Financial Management form.

- Click on a selectable dimension, row, or column in a Financial Management form.

2. From Member Selection , to change the dimension, click the Dimension Selector button (for example, ) and select a dimension.

3. Optional: To find a specific member in the tree list, enter a member name in the search field and click .

Essbase accepts asterisks (*) or question marks (?) as wild cards.

Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud accepts asterisks (*) as wild cards.

4. Optional: Click the arrow in and select an option to change the criteria for displaying members in both the right pane of the Member Selection dialog box and on the grid or form:

- Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud:

- Hierarchy —Display members in standard hierarchy format.

- Substitution Variables —Display members based on selections made in the User Variables tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Note:

The Substitution Variables option displays when you access Member Selection from a user variable in a Planning form.

- Financial Management:

- Hierarchy —Display members in standard hierarchy format.

- Member lists —Display members either by system-generated or user-generated member lists. Note that system-generated member lists are designated with brackets; for example, [ member list name ].

- Essbase:

- Hierarchy —Displays members in standard hierarchy format.

- Attribute —Display members by attributes. See Filtering by Attribute .

- Subset —Display a subset of members based on a set of conditions. Filtering by Subsets .

- Dynamic Time Series —Display members by the latest period on which to base the to-date calculation. See Selecting Period-to-Date Members

- Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud:

- Hierarchy —Display members in standard hierarchy format.

- Dynamic Time Series —Display members by the latest period on which to base the to-date calculation. See Selecting Period-to-Date Members

5. Optional: To find a specific member or group of members in the tree list, click and select one of these filters (filter options may vary by data source type):

- Children to select only the children of the selected member

- Children Inclusive to include the selected member and only the children of the selected member

- Descendants to select all descendents of the selected member

- Descendants Inclusive to include the selected member and all descendents of the selected member

- Siblings to select all siblings of the selected member

- Siblings Inclusive to include the selected member and all siblings of the selected member

- Parent to select only the parent of the selected member

- Parent Inclusive to include the selected member and only the parent of the selected member

- Ancestors to select all the ancestors of the selected member

- Ancestors Inclusive to include the selected member and all ancestors of the selected member

- Base to select only the bottom-level hierarchy members of a hierarchy

- Level to display Level , where you select one level in the hierarchy of members

- Level 0 Descendant to display all descendants of the selected member that have no children

- Generation to display Generation , where you select one generation in the hierarchy of members

- UDA to display UDA , where you select a user-defined attribute (available only if defined by the administrator)

Note:

Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud does not support filters.

6. Optional: To choose display and selection options for members in the Member Selection dialog box, click and perform an action:

- To place a check in the check box next to the applicable members, choose from Check Children , Check Descendants , or Check Base Members .

- To clear all check marks, select Clear Checks .

- To view expanded or collapsed dimensions, select Expand All or Collapse All .

- Essbase, and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud only: To view information about a member, select the member, then select Member Information .

- To apply an alias table to the members in the Member Selection dialog box, select Alias Table , and then select an alias table.

Note that alias table selections made in the Member Selection dialog box apply only to the dialog box and not to the grid in the Office document.

7. Under Members , select the members that you want to use.

8. Click .

The members are transferred from the member tree list to the selection tree list in the pane on the right.

9. Optional: If this is the first member selection that you make in a blank worksheet, select one of these buttons:

- to display the selected members vertically, in a column

- to display the selected members horizontally, in a row

10. Click OK .

The members selected are displayed in the grid.

11. From the ribbon, click Refresh to update the data to correspond to the selected members.

Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar

The POV is the default starting point for dimensions in a data source connection. From the POV toolbar, you can select members and filters for the dimensions that you want to include in the grid and move members to and from the grid.

Each connection is associated with only one POV. However, the same connection to different worksheets within a workbook may have different POVs.

POVs can be managed as described in The POV Manager .

Note:

Financial Management displays the User Point of View by default. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial Management Users Guide for information.

For Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud connections, see Displaying the POV Toolbar .

Placing Members and Dimensions from the POV Toolbar onto the Grid

To select dimensions and members from the POV toolbar:

1. Do one of the following:

- Enter the name of a member over its corresponding dimension on the POV toolbar, and then click Refresh on the POV toolbar.

- Click the down arrow next to a dimension on the POV toolbar, then click the ellipsis (...), and then select members as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

Note:

In the Member Selection dialog box, it is possible to select more than 5000 members for the POV. However, be aware that the POV toolbar can only display the first 5000 selected members.

2. From the POV toolbar, right-click the down arrow next to the member and drag it to the grid.

To move a member or dimension back to the POV toolbar for editing, right-click its cell and drag it to the POV toolbar.

3. Repeat as necessary to place all dimension and members that you want to include on the grid.

4. To save these POV selections in the worksheet, you must refresh before you save the worksheet.

Hiding the POV Toolbar

When you finish working with the POV toolbar, you can hide it until you need to display it again. To hide the POV toolbar, click POV on the data source ribbon. The POV button toggles to hide or display the POV toolbar.

Example

Figure 5, The POV shows, from left to right, a POV in the following conditions:

- Product , Market , and Scenario are the starting dimensions in the POV.

- Colas is selected as the Product member (more than one member at a time can be selected from a dimension).

- Colas has been moved to the grid (it can be moved back to edit the dimension).

Figure 5. The POV

Displaying the POV Toolbar

Data source types: Essbase, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

Note:

For on-premise Essbase, the information in this section applies only to Essbase 11.1.2.1.102 and later connections. If you are using earlier Essbase releases, the POV button functions as described in Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar .

You can choose whether to display all members on the grid and hide the POV toolbar or to display the POV toolbar containing the POV members.

By default, all members are displayed on the grid, and the POV toolbar is hidden. The members in the first row of the grid are called " page " dimensions. In this mode, you can format POV member cells the same as you do other member and data cells, and select members using the Member Selection button in the ribbon.

When you display the POV toolbar, the page dimensions move to the POV toolbar. When you hide the POV toolbar, the page dimensions move back to the first row of the grid.

If you choose to display the POV toolbar containing the POV members, you can use the POV toolbar to select members and move them to and from the grid as described in Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar .

To display the POV toolbar:

1. Select the Essbase or Performance Reporting ribbon.

2. Click the POV button.

Figure 6, POV Toolbar Displayed shows the POV toolbar on the grid. Measures and Year are displayed on the grid; POV members Product , Market , and Scenario are displayed on the POV toolbar.

Figure 6. POV Toolbar Displayed

To hide the POV toolbar and display all members on the grid:

1. Select the Essbase or Performance Reporting ribbon.

2. Click the POV button to toggle it off.

Note:

Essbase: On worksheets that contain multiple grids, the POV button is disabled. In mutiple-grid worksheets, the POV toolbar is hidden, and all members are displayed the grid.

In Figure 7, All Members Displayed on Grid , the POV button is toggled off, the POV toolbar is hidden, and all members are on the grid.

Figure 7. All Members Displayed on Grid

Selecting Members Using the Cell-Based POV

Data source types: Essbase, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

You can select members directly from cells in the page dimension row of a grid rather than by using the POV toolbar. The cell-based POV is available by clicking a page POV dimension cell, then selecting the down arrow, , that appears to the right of the cell; it works the same as the POV toolbar.

Figure 8. Selecting a Dimension Cell and Clicking the Down Arrow

Click the ellipsis button, , that appears in the cell-based POV and select members in the Member Selection dialog box, and then click OK . Now, look at the dimension cell again. The first member you selected appears in the dimension cell, and the other members are available by clicking the down-arrow in the cell-based POV and selecting them. After each selection, click Refresh to view the updated data.

Using the Essbase Sample Basic application and database as an example, for the Product dimension, if you select Root Beer, Cream Soda, and Fruit Soda in the Member Selection dialog box, then " Root Beer " appears in the dimension cell, as shown in Figure 9, Using Cell-Based POV to Change the Product Dimension POV to Root Beer . Click Refresh to view the data for Root Beer.

Figure 9. Using Cell-Based POV to Change the Product Dimension POV to Root Beer

Now click the arrow next to the cell, , and make another selection from the cell-based POV; for example, Cream Soda ( Figure 10, Changing the POV to Cream Soda Using the Cell-Based POV ).

Figure 10. Changing the POV to Cream Soda Using the Cell-Based POV

Click Refresh to update the data. Notice that the data has changed ( Figure 11, Refreshed Data for Cream Soda ).

Figure 11. Refreshed Data for Cream Soda

You can also directly type a member name in the search field of the cell-based POV drop-down. In this case, you can select only one member at a time. Click Refresh to view updated data. Type another member name in the search field each time you want to change the POV.

You can still use the POV toolbar as before by toggling the POV button on the provider ribbon. The cell-based POV and the POV toolbar selections are automatically synchronized, regardless of where the selections are made. If you change to a different alias table, the cell-based POV is populated with the proper alias names.

Note:

This feature is available only for installations with Essbase and Oracle Hyperion Provider Services 11.1.2.1.102 and later.

Entering Members in Free-Form Mode

If you are familiar with the dimensions and members of your database, you can enter their names directly into cells using free-form mode . You can use aliases from the alias table associated with the current grid in free-form mode. If you enter an alias from a different alias table, it will revert to the alias from the current alias table.

After connecting to a data source, you can enter member names as follows:

- By entering a member name in a blank cell

- By replacing a member name in a cell with a different member from the same dimension

You can still use the POV, member selection, and other ad hoc operations in free-form grids. See Free-Form Mode.

Filtering by Attribute

Data source types: Essbase

You can filter by attributes in dimensions that contain attribute members.

To filter by attribute:

1. Select an attribute dimension on the grid, and then open Member Selection as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

2. Click and select Attribute .

3. From Attribute , click .

4. From Subset , in Dimension , select a dimension; for example, Ounces.

5. In Member , select an attribute member, for example, Ounces_16.

6. Click to display the attribute.

7. Optional: to change the displayed attribute, change the selections in Dimension and Attribute and click Set .

8. Click OK .

Your selections are displayed in the tree list in Member Selection , where you can select from among them for inclusion in the grid.

Filtering by Subsets

Data source types: Essbase

For dimensions that contain attribute members, you can select attributes and set conditions for them to display only those members that meet these conditions.

To filter by condition:

1. Select an attribute member on the grid, and then open Member Selection as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

2. Click and select Subset .

3. From Subset , in Dimension , select an attribute dimension; for example, Ounces.

4. In Member , select an attribute member; for example, True.

5. Click .

6. In Dimension , select another attribute dimension; for example, Pkg Type.

7. In Member , select another attribute member; for example, Bottle.

8. Click .

An AND condition statement is created; for example, [True] AND [Bottle].

9. Optional: To change the condition statement, highlight the AND condition statement and select Operator , and then AND or OR .

10. Optional: Nest conditions by selecting more attributes, then Add , and then Root .

11. Click OK .

Your selections are displayed in the tree list in Member Selection , where you can select from among them for inclusion in the grid.

Selecting Period-to-Date Members

Data source types: Essbase, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

In time dimensions, you can set up period-to-date members, called Dynamic Time Series members, if defined. For example, to see year-to-date data at the end of August, you can set up a Dynamic Time Series member that includes data for January through August.

To select a Dynamic Time Series member:

1. Select a time dimension on the grid, and then open Member Selection as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

2. Click and select Dynamic Time Series to display available Time Series Members in the member tree list.

3. Select a time series member from the member tree list and click .

4. From Select DTS Member , select the latest period on which to base the to-date calculation; for example, Aug .

5. Click OK .

6. Optional: Repeat step 3 through step 5 as necessary to add other Dynamic Time Series members.

7. click OK .

The Time Series Member is displayed on the grid as, in this example, Y-T-D(Aug) . After you refresh, the year-to-date data through August is displayed.

Defining Member Name Display in the Member Selector

Data sources: Financial Management, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise

You can change how member names are displayed in the Member Selection dialog box by choosing a Member Name Display option.

Using this option allows you to display members in the Member Selection dialog box differently from how they are displayed on the sheet.

The selection you make in the Member Selection dialog box does not affect how members are displayed in the worksheet. Members in the sheet are displayed according to the setting you choose in the Member Name Display field of the Options dialog box, Member Options tab.

For example, if the provider you are connecting to permits the use of descriptions, you can choose to display member names with their descriptions in the worksheet using the Member Name Display field in the Options dialog box. Then, you can choose to display member names without their descriptions in the Member Selection dialog box.

Note:

For Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud providers, use alias tables to change the member name display. See Displaying Aliases in the Member Selector .

To define how member names are displayed:

1. Display the Member Selection dialog box, as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

2. To change the dimension, click the Dimension Selector button in the top left of the dialog box and select a dimension.

3. Click the Options button, then select Member Name Display , and then select an option:

- Member Name Only to display qualified names

- Member Name and Description to display qualified names and descriptions (aliases) in the same cell.

- Description Only to display aliases only. (Financial Management, Planning, and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud data sources only)

Note:

If you select Description Only in free-form mode, qualified names are displayed initially. After you manually add, remove, or edit any comments and refresh, aliases are displayed.

The member names displayed in the Member Selector are changed according to your selection.

Duplicate Member Names

Data source types: Essbase, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

Different database members and alias table members may have identical names. For example, a database may have two members named " New York, " one for New York City and one for New York State. Both members can appear as " New York " in the grid, but if you want to distinguish between them, you can display their qualified names instead. Qualified names include the member name and the names of its ancestors to the level that uniquely defines the member; for example, [Market].[New York] .

When you first perform an ad hoc query on a database that supports duplicate member names, the default for the Member Name Display display option for members in the both grid and the POV is Member Name Only

Perform the procedure in this topic to display qualified member names in the grid and POV.

To display the qualified names of duplicate members:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then select Member Options in the left panel.

2. From the Member Name Display drop-down menu, select Distinct Member Name .

3. Click OK .

4. Refresh the grid.

Duplicate members in the grid are displayed as qualified names. In this example, New York City is displayed as [East].[New York] . New York State is displayed as a sibling of East, West, and South: [Market].[New York] :

Member Perspective

Data source types: Essbase

You can specify member perspective for varying attribute when you are selecting members by using the Varying Attribute filter.

Note:

Member perspective may not be enabled in your Smart View system. Your options for member perspective are enabled and configured by the Administrator.

To specify member perspective:

1. From Member Selection , under Filter , select Varying Attribute .

2. In Filter Arguments , click .

3. Specify an attribute to set the perspective, and then click OK .

4. In Varying Attribute Args under Varying Attribute , click the ellipsis button.

5. In Subset , in Dimension , enter an attribute dimension.

6. In Member , enter an attribute member, and then click Set .

7. Click OK .

8. In Varying Attribute Args , under Perspective , click the ellipsis button.

9. From Perspective , select one of the following:

- Snapshot. One set of independent dimension members to identify the members of base dimension associated with the varying attribute. Here the start and end tuple are same.

- Range. A finite range of independent dimension members. A range can be specified only for continuous independent dimensions ("Year" is an example). For discrete independent dimensions, you can make only one selection.

10. Click OK .

Aliases and Alias Tables

Subtopics

- Selecting an Alias Table for the Current Worksheet

- Selecting an Alias Table for the Connection

- Aliases from Different Alias Tables

- Displaying Member Names and Their Aliases in the Grid

- Displaying Aliases in the Member Selector

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

Note:

In Financial Management, aliases are called " descriptions. "

Aliases are alternate names for database member names. Database member names are often stock numbers or product codes; their aliases can be more descriptive. For example, in the Sample Basic database, the alias name for the database member 100 is Colas. Aliases are stored in alias tables as part of a database. Dimensions can be associated with multiple alias tables.

If more than one alias table has been created in the database, you can select an alias table for the current worksheet or for a private connection.

You can select an alias table for the current worksheet or for a connection:

Selecting an Alias Table for the Current Worksheet

The alias table selected here applies only to the current worksheet and not to future connections.

To select an alias table for the current worksheet:

1. From a worksheet, connect to a data source.

2. From the Essbase or ad hoc ribbon, select Change Alias to display a list of available alias tables.

3. Select an alias table for the worksheet.

The new alias table is applied automatically.

Selecting an Alias Table for the Connection

You can select an alias table for private connections only. If you want to select an alias table for a shared connection, first save the shared connection as a private connection. See Saving Shared Connections as Private Connections .

An alias table selected for a private connection is permanent until changed and will be used each time you use this connection.

To select an alias table for the connection:

1. From a worksheet, connect to a data source.

2. In the Smart View Panel private connections, right-click a connection name and select Set Alias Table .

3. Select an alias table for the connection.

The new alias table is applied the next time you open the connection.

Aliases from Different Alias Tables

Data source types: Essbase, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

If you enter a name from an alias table that is not associated with the current grid, its corresponding alias from the alias table that is associated with the current grid is displayed after you refresh. For example, if you enter Qtr1 into a grid that is associated with the Long Names alias, then after you refresh, Quarter1 is displayed.

Displaying Member Names and Their Aliases in the Grid

Data source types: Essbase

If you are connected to an Essbase data source, you can display member names and their aliases from the currently selected alias table together in the same row.

Note:

This feature applies only to row members and not to column members.

To display both member names and aliases:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Member Options in the left panel.

2. Under General , for Member Name Display , select Member Name and Alias .

For row members, both member names and their corresponding aliases are displayed. In this example, Product database member names are shown in column A, and their aliases in column B.

Displaying Aliases in the Member Selector

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

You can display aliases for member names in the Member Selection dialog box.

To select alias tables for displaying member names in Member Selection :

1. Display the Member Selection dialog box, as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

2. To change the dimension, click the Dimension Selector button in the top left of the dialog box, and then select a dimension.

3. Click the Options button, then select Alias Table , and then select an alias table from the list.

The member names displayed in the Member Selector are changed according to your selection.

Member Information

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

You can view detailed information about any member on the grid.

To view member information:

1. Select a member in the grid.

2. From the data source ad hoc ribbon, select Member Information .

Information is displayed on the following tabs. Only the tabs that are applicable to the member and connection are displayed.

- Information : A list of general information about the member such as dimension, level, generation, and so forth

- Aliases : A list of alias tables and corresponding aliases associated with the member

- Attributes : A table of the dimensions, members, and types of attributes associated with the member

- Formula : The formula associated with the member

- Comments : A list of comments associated with the member

- User Defined Attributes : A list of user defined attributes (attributes of the member defined by the administrator

3. Optional: To save the information in an Excel file, select Save .

4. Click Close .

The POV Manager

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

The POV (Point of View) is the starting point for forms, ad hoc grids, and functions. Using the POV Manager in Smart View, you can change the default POV for forms and ad hoc grids (Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud), and the background POV for functions (all data sources).

Using the POV Manager, you can perform the following operations:

- Select members for the default POV and edit the default POV (not applicable to Financial Management)

- Select members for the background POV for functions

- Save a POV to a workbook

- Copy a POV and paste it to a different worksheet or workbook

- Edit a POV

- Delete a POV (not applicable to Financial Management)

Note:

For Financial Management, the last refreshed POV (either in the Financial Management web interface or in Smart View) becomes the default POV and is used by Smart View when accessing a form or ad hoc grid.

Additionally, for Financial Management, the POV Manager can only be used to set the background POV for functions.

Selecting Members for the Default or Background POV

Copying and Pasting a POV

Deleting a POV

Selecting Members for the Default or Background POV

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

In the POV Manager, you can select members as follows:

- To use as a default POV for the ad hoc grids of a given connection

- For the background POV for dimensions when you use functions

Oracle recommends a maximum of 1,000 members for the ad hoc POV.

Select members for or edit the POV before starting work on an ad hoc grid.

To select members for the default POV:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Function , and then Manage POV .

2. Expand the POVs list.

3. From the Active POV list, select the active connection for which you are changing the POV.

4. Click Member Selector , and then select the members that you want to use for the POV. See Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

From the POV Manager, you can select only one member per dimension. If you use aliases, the POV Manager loses the selected members.

5. Click Close .

6. To refresh the worksheet, select Refresh .

7. To save the POV to the workbook, save the workbook.

Note:

After you start working on the ad hoc grid, select or change members as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

Copying and Pasting a POV

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

You can use the POV Manager to copy and paste a POV from one workbook to another if the data source is exactly the same for both workbooks. You must paste the copied POV to an unconnected worksheet; otherwise the POV has no effect.

To copy and paste a POV:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Function , and then Manage POV .

2. In the left window of POV Manager, expand Active, and then select the application connection that you want to copy.

3. From the POV Manager toolbar, click Member Selector , and then select members for the POV.

4. Save the workbook.

5. From the POV Manager toolbar, click Copy .

6. In the left window of the POV Manager, expand Saved to select the workbook and worksheet (which must be blank and unconnected) that you want to paste the POV into.

7. Click Paste.

8. Refresh the worksheet containing the copied POV.

Deleting a POV

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

To delete a POV that is saved in a workbook:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Function, and then Manage POV .

2. Expand the POV list.

3. From the POV drop-down list, select the worksheet that contains the POV that you want to delete.

4. Select the POV that you want to delete.

5. Click Delete .

6. Click Close.

7. To refresh the worksheet, select Refresh.

Data and Data Cells

In This Section:

Refreshing Data

Using the Submit Data Options

Calculating Data

Consolidating Data

Working with Currencies

Adjusting Values in Data Cells

Data Perspective

Drill-Through Reports

Linked Reporting Objects

Linked Partitions

Cell Comments

Attachments

Cell History

Refreshing Data

Subtopics

- Refreshing from a Ribbon

- Refreshing Individual Reports from Document Contents

Data source types: All

Refreshing from a Ribbon

Data source types: All

In Excel, you can retrieve and refresh data for the current worksheet or for all worksheets in the workbook using the Refresh icon on the Smart View ribbon, shown in Figure 12, Refresh Icon .

This type of refresh action applies to entire sheets, documents and slides and includes data in all ad hoc grids and reporting objects, such as function grids, tables, or charts.

Figure 12. Refresh Icon

Depending on the data provider to which you are connected, the Refresh icon can either be a split button with Refresh options or a simple, one-function Refresh button.

Note:

To refresh individual reporting objects, such as function grids, tables, or charts, see Refreshing Individual Reports from Document Contents .

To use Refresh , choose an option:

- To refresh the entire current worksheet, from any ribbon, click Refresh .

In Word or PowerPoint, when you click Refresh , all data points copied into the document or presentation are refreshed.

Note:

In Essbase worksheets that contain multiple grids, you can also refresh only a selected range of cells (see Multiple Grids on a Worksheet ).

- Oracle BI EE only: To clear the contents of the entire current worksheet and replace it with the latest members and data, click the down arrow in Refresh , and then select Replace and Refresh .

- To refresh all worksheets in the current workbook, click the down arrow in Refresh , and then select Refresh All Worksheets .

Refreshing Individual Reports from Document Contents

Data source types: All

You can refresh data in individual reports by using the Refresh link in the Document Contents pane.

In Smart View, reports consist of report queries and their associated reporting objects. These are listed in the Document Contents pane. From Document Contents , you can individually refresh report queries and their associated reporting objects, such as:

- Function grids

- Tables

- Charts

- Dynamic data points

Note:

The procedures and examples in this topic discuss refreshing individual reports and reporting objects from the Document Contents pane. To refresh all reporting objects in worksheets or workbooks, documents, and slides or presentations, you can use the Refresh icon on the Smart View ribbon or a provider ribbon, as described in Refreshing from a Ribbon .

To refresh individual reports in the Document Contents pane:

1. Navigate to the individual report query that contains the associated reporting objects to refresh.

The Refresh link, , appears in Document Contents only after a reporting object has been inserted for an individual report query.

For example, in Figure 13, Report Query for Function Grid Selected for Refresh , a function grid is to be refreshed. Note that the " Demo " report query for the function grid is selected, not the function grid itself.

Figure 13. Report Query for Function Grid Selected for Refresh

2. In the Document Contents pane, click .

You can also right-click on the report query and select from the context menu, as shown in Figure 14, Refresh Using Right-Click Menu .

Figure 14. Refresh Using Right-Click Menu

The reporting objects for the selected report query are refreshed; the rest of the report queries and associated reporting objects remain unrefreshed.

See Other Refresh Examples .

Notes About Refreshing Individual Reporting Objects in Excel

- You can refresh report queries individually in Excel with the exception of report queries containing function grids.

For example, if two report queries contain function grids, then refreshing one query will revert the other querys function grid to the #NEED REFRESH (unrefreshed) state. This only occurs with function grids. The other reporting objects, such as tables or charts, will refresh normally.

For example, on Sheet 1 in Figure 15, Selecting a Report Query to Refresh in Excel Where Two Report Queries Contain Function Grids , refreshing Report Query 1 will refresh the associated grid and function grid; however, the function grid associated with Report Query 2 will convert to the unrefreshed state while the chart refreshes normally. The report query and associated reporting objects on Sheet2 are unaffected.

Figure 15. Selecting a Report Query to Refresh in Excel Where Two Report Queries Contain Function Grids

To refresh all items on the sheet, including multiple function grids, select Sheet1 in the Document Contents , as shown in Figure 16, Selecting Sheet1 to Refresh All Reporting Objects on a Sheet from Document Contents , and then click .

Figure 16. Selecting Sheet1 to Refresh All Reporting Objects on a Sheet from Document Contents

- In Excel, if a reporting object from a single report query is inserted on multiple sheets, then selecting the report query and clicking will refresh the reporting object on each sheet where it appears.

Other Refresh Examples

The examples in this section use a Word document to describe the refresh options available depending on the selection made in the Document Contents pane.

Figure 17, Word Document Selected for Refresh shows a Word document selected in the Document Contents pane. Clicking will refresh all report queries and their associated reporting objects in the document.

Figure 17. Word Document Selected for Refresh

Figure 18, Report Query with Two Reporting Objects Selected for Refresh shows a report query selected in the Document Contents pane. The report query contains two reporting objects, a grid and an Office table. Clicking will refresh only the selected report query and its two associated reporting objects; other report queries and their reporting objects in the document remain unrefreshed.

Figure 18. Report Query with Two Reporting Objects Selected for Refresh

Note:

Refreshing an individual sheet or slide will refresh the report queries and reporting objects associated with the selected sheet or slide. For example, if you select a sheet that contains multiple report queries, all reporting objects associated with the multiple report queries on the selected sheet will be refreshed.

Refreshing an entire document will refresh all the report queries in the document and their associated reporting objects.

In Figure 19, One of Two Reporting Objects Selected - Refresh Not Available , two reporting objects are associated with a report query, one reporting object is selected. Notice that is not available.

Figure 19. One of Two Reporting Objects Selected - Refresh Not Available

Figure 20, Report Query with Single Reporting Object Selected for Refresh shows a report query selected in the Document Contents pane. The report query contains a single reporting object, a function grid. Clicking will refresh only the selected report query and its associated reporting object; other report queries and their reporting objects in the document remain unrefreshed.

Figure 20. Report Query with Single Reporting Object Selected for Refresh

In Figure 21, Individual Reporting Object Selected - Refresh Not Available , a single reporting object associated with a report query is selected. Notice that is not available.

Figure 21. Individual Reporting Object Selected - Refresh Not Available

Using the Submit Data Options

Subtopics

- About the Submit Data Options

- Submitting Data

- Submitting Data Without Refreshing

- Submitting Data Ranges

About the Submit Data Options

Data sources: Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise

You can update any type of data in the data source by submitting changed data from forms and ad hoc grids. If you make changes while disconnected, you can submit the changes after you reconnect.

Smart View offers the following options for submitting data:

- Submit Data

- Submit Data Without Refresh

- Submit Data Range

Guidelines for the Submit Data Options

- When using the Submit Data option:

- When connected to Essbase releases 11.1.2.1.102 and later, you can submit data without first refreshing in free-form mode.

- When connected to Planning ad hoc, Financial Management ad hoc, or Essbase releases earlier than 11.1.2.1.102, you must refresh the grid before modifying the data when you are in free-form mode.

- You can use the Submit Data Without Refresh and Submit Data Range options to submit cell data from cells that were modified by a user who does not have Smart View installed.

- In worksheets that support multiple grids, you can perform the Submit Data commands for only one grid at a time.

If you try to submit data for more than one grid at a time—that is, if you have selected cell ranges in more than one grid—the first range returned by Excel will be used to determine the selected grid and the submit will be performed only on that grid.

- If you are submitting data from forms:

- In Planning, Financial Management, or Hyperion Enterprise forms, you can lock any cell or range of cells to protect the data until the data is refreshed or submitted. In Financial Management, locking the cell does not lock the actual data cube but only the cell in the form. When the data is refreshed or submitted, the cell is no longer locked.

- Some cells may no longer exist in the form definition. This behavior may happen if form definition or access privileges have changed, or if rows or columns are suppressed. In these cases, only writable cells that exist in the new form definition are saved. This behavior applies to both cells and supporting detail changes, and also applies when working with forms while connected to or disconnected from the data provider.

- When you are working in a form and you click Submit Data , you are actually writing data back to the latest POV selected in the POV toolbar. Oracle recommends performing a Refresh whenever you make changes to the POV. The refresh updates the data on the sheet to reflect the latest POV change.

Submitting Data

Data sources: Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise

To submit data:

1. Connect to the data source.

2. Optional: To help you identify modified cells, set a cell style for dirty cells, as described in Cell Styles .

3. Essbase only: If you are working in free-form mode with an Essbase release earlier than 11.1.2.1.102, from the Essbase provider ribbon, select Refresh.

4. Modify data as needed.

5. From any ribbon, select Submit Data .

All dirty cells on the worksheet are submitted.

Note:

If you are working with multiple grids on a worksheet, see Guidelines for the Submit Data Options .

Submitting Data Without Refreshing

Data source types: Essbase, Planning Ad Hoc, Financial Management Ad Hoc

To submit data without first refreshing:

1. Connect to the data source.

2. Optional: To help you identify modified cells, set a cell style for dirty cells, as described in Cell Styles .

3. Modify data as needed.

4. From the provider ribbon, select Submit Data , then Submit Data Without Refresh .

Data for all cells on the sheet is submitted, whether or not the cells are dirty.

Note:

If you are working with multiple grids on a worksheet, see Guidelines for the Submit Data Options .

Submitting Data Ranges

Data source types: Essbase, Planning Ad Hoc, Financial Management Ad Hoc

You can submit contiguous and non-contiguous single cells or cell ranges.

To submit data:

1. Connect to the data source.

2. Modify data as needed.

Alternatively, you may have opened a workbook that you received from a user who does not have Smart View and modified the worksheet. Smart View cannot detect those cells as dirty, so you will need to be informed by that user which cells were modified or added.

3. Optional: To help you identify modified cells, set a cell style for dirty cells, as described in Cell Styles .

4. Select the data ranges you want to submit.

You can select contiguous and non-contiguous single cells or cell ranges.

5. From the provider context ribbon (for example, the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon), select Submit , then Submit Data Range .

Only cell data from selected cells is submitted. If there are dirty cells on the sheet outside the range of selected cells, the modified value is not submitted and those cells will revert back to the value that was last stored with the provider.

Note:

If you are working with multiple grids on a worksheet, see Guidelines for the Submit Data Options .

Calculating Data

After you submit new or changed data, you need to calculate the data in the database to reflect your changes. Your options for calculating data depend on your data source. To calculate data, you must have security access rights to the data.

Calculating Data in Financial Management and Hyperion Enterprise

Calculating Data in Essbase

For information on calculating business rules on Planning forms, see Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules .

Calculating Data in Financial Management and Hyperion Enterprise

Data source types: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

To calculate data:

1. Select a cell or range of cells for which you want to calculate data.

2. From the data source or data source ad hoc ribbon, select Calculate then select one of these options:

- To calculate the selected cells, select Calculate.

- Force calculation to run for all selected cells regardless of cell status, select Calculate then Force Calculate.

Calculating Data in Essbase

Data Sources : Essbase

In Smart View, you can use a calculation script to calculate an Essbase database.

To select and launch a calculation script:

1. From the Essbase ribbon, select Calculate.

The Calculation Scripts dialog box is displayed.

2. Under Cube , select a database from the list of databases that belong to this application.

3. Under Calculation Script , select a script.

4. Click Launch .

A status message tells you whether the calculation was successful or not. If the calculation was not successful, contact your Essbase administrator.

Consolidating Data

Data source types: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

Consolidation is the process of gathering data from dependent entities and aggregating the data to parent entities. To consolidate data, you must have security access rights to the data and you must be assigned the Consolidate security role. To Consolidate all data, you must be assigned the Consolidate All security role.

To consolidate data:

1. Select a cell or range of cells for which you want to run consolidation.

2. From the data source ad hoc ribbon, select Consolidate , then select one of the following options:

- Consolidate to consolidate data for the selected entities.

- Consolidate All to consolidate data for all entities, whether or not they contain data

- Consolidate All With Data to consolidate the selected entities only if they contain data.

- Calculate Contribution to calculate contribution values of all dependent entities.

- Force Calculate Contribution to force calculation to run for all selected contribution values.

Working with Currencies

Related Topics:

Translating Currencies in Financial Management and Hyperion Enterprise

Changing Currency in Planning

Translating Currencies in Financial Management and Hyperion Enterprise

Data source types: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

Converting currencies is called " translating data " in Financial Management. You can translate data from the entitys input currency to any other currency defined in the application. Currencies are not associated with a parent-child entity pair, so you can translate data on demand, separately from the consolidation process.

In ad hoc grids, if you have security access rights to the data, you can convert, or translate, values from one currency to another. To translate data:

1. Select a cell or range of cells.

2. From the data source ad hoc ribbon, select Calculation , then select one of the following:

- To translate the selected cells, select Translate.

- To force translation to run for all selected cells, select Force Translate.

Changing Currency in Planning

In forms enabled for currency conversion, you can enter data in a currency other than the base currency of a cell. Currencies in the drop-down list can be designated as the local currency.

Note:

To override the base currency for an entity, the cell must be displayed in the local currency, and its version must be bottom-up. The application must be a multi-currency application and the form should support multi-currency.

To enter cell data in a local currency other than the base currency for the cell:

1. In a form, select a local currency member for the cell.

2. Optional : To look up the currencys code, select View , then Currency .

Available Currencies shows the applications currencies. Note the Currency Code for the currency you want to work with, and close the window.

3. In the right column, HSP_InputCurrency, type the new Currency Code in the data cell.

Typing the currency code in the data cell overrides the base currency for the entity.

4. Click Submit to submit the new currency code to the Planning server.

5. Enter the currency value in the left column, HSP_InputValue, of the data cell.

6. Click Rules on Form and select the Calculate Currencies rule to calculate and save the new currency value.

If the Calculate Currencies calc script is set to run when the form is saved, and the form is enabled for multiple currencies, the data value is displayed in the currency you selected.

Adjusting Values in Data Cells

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise

You can adjust the value of one or more data cells by a specified number or percentage if the cells contain numerical data. If you adjust the value of a cell that contains an Excel formula, the adjusted value overwrites the formula.

To adjust data values:

1. Click the data cell that contains the value to adjust.

2. From the data source ribbon, select Adjust .

3. From Adjust Data , select an option then enter the number or percentage by which you want to adjust the value of the cell.

4. Click Adjust Data .

Data Perspective

Data source types: Essbase

Note:

Data perspective may not be enabled in your Smart View system. Your options for data perspective are enabled and configured by the administrator in Oracle Essbase Administration Services.

Data perspective enables you to specify the perspective to use for viewing data of varying attributes, which are dimension attributes that vary with respect to independent continuous and discrete dimensions. For example, suppose a cola product is sold in both cans and bottles in several different geographical markets over the course of a year. If the packaging (cans or bottles) varies depending on the market or changes from one type to the other during the year, the packaging type is a varying attribute. The data associated with the cola would be different depending on the time of year and the market.

To specify data perspective:

1. From the Essbase ribbon, select Data Perspective .

2. From Perspective , under Selection , select an option (see Data Perspective Illustration for examples of options).

- Reality to display the data with no perspective.

- Last to display the data for the last level 0 member of each continuous independent dimension. For example, if Year is the continuous dimension and December is the last member of Year, then the data for December is displayed.

- Start to display the data for the first level 0 member of each continuous independent dimension. For example, if Year is the continuous dimension and January is the first member of Year, then the data for January is displayed.

- Custom if you want to specify both continuous and discrete members. For this option, select a Varying Attribute from the drop-down list. Then, for the dimensions listed under Independent Dimension , select members under Members . If you select Set Dimensions Only , all independent dimensions across all varying attribute are displayed, enabling you to apply a common perspective to all.

3. Click OK , then refresh the grid.

Data Perspective Illustration

In our example of cola sold in cans and bottles, suppose the Administrator has specified the following attributes for the cola packaging types to reflect how the cola was sold in Texas and California markets during the year:

- Can: California, January—December year

- Can: Texas, July—December

- Bottle: Texas, January—June

Figure 22, Data Perspective: Reality illustrates the Reality perspective. The data shown for California and Texas is data for the entire year. Since bottles were not sold in California, no data is returned (indicated here by #Meaningless ).

Figure 22. Data Perspective: Reality

Figure 23, Data Perspective: Last illustrates the Last perspective and displays data for cans for California and Texas, but none for bottles, because bottles were sold only January through June in Texas.

Figure 23. Data Perspective: Last

Figure 24, Data Perspective: Start illustrates the Start perspective and displays data for January. Bottles but not cans were sold in Texas in January, so only data for bottles is displayed. Cans but not bottles were sold in California in January, so only data for bottles is displayed.

Figure 24. Data Perspective: Start

Drill-Through Reports

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

You can drill through to the detailed data in a database as follows:

- If you are connected to Planning or Financial Management via Smart View, you can use the drill-through capabilities of Smart View to drill through your Planning or Financial Management application to detailed data in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Enterprise Edition or Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management data sources.

- For applications created in Oracle Essbase Administration Services, you can drill through to Oracle General Ledger.

- For applications created in Oracle Essbase Studio, you can drill through to relational databases. You can require a user name and password to access the drill-through report. You can also drill through to administrator-configured URLs.

Predefined by administrators, drill-through reports are available to users from specified individual member cells and data cells. A cell can be associated with multiple drill-through reports. Cells that contain drill-through reports can be indicated on the grid by a cell style.

See Cell Styles .

The data displayed in a drill-through report is dynamic.

Note:

You cannot use alias tables for drill-through; you must use member names.

To access a drill-through report:

1. Select a member or data cell associated with a drill-through report.

If you want to display a list of available drill-through reports whenever you mouse over a cell, select Display Drill-Through Report ToolTips on the Advanced page of the Options dialog box.

2. From the data source ribbon, select Drill-through to display the list of reports associated with the cell.

3. Select a report from the list.

4. Essbase only: If required, enter a user name and password.

Note:

The user name and password fields are displayed only if required to access the drill-through report. If a user name and password are not required, then these fields are not displayed.

5. Click Launch .

Linked Reporting Objects

Data source types: Essbase

A linked reporting object is a cell note, external file, or URL that is linked to a data cell in an Essbase database, and which can be retrieved by Smart View users in Excel.

You can set a cell style (see Cell Styles ) to identify cells that are associated with linked reporting objects.

See also Linked Partitions .

- Attaching a Linked Reporting Object to a Data Cell

- Launching a Linked Reporting Object from a Data Cell

Attaching a Linked Reporting Object to a Data Cell

You can attach one or more linked reporting objects to a data cell.

To attach a linked reporting object to a data cell:

1. Select a data cell.

2. From the Essbase ribbon, select Linked Objects .

3. From Linked Reporting Objects , click and select one of the following:

- Cell Note to attach an annotation to the data cell

- File to attach an external file to the data cell

- URL to attach a URL to the data cell

The dialog box appropriate to your selection is displayed.

4. Enter information as follows:

- Cell Note : Enter text for the note. Then click Close . The first few words of the note are displayed in the Description column of the Linked Reporting Objects list.

- File : Use the Browse button to navigate to the file that you want to attach to the data cell. You can add a brief description for the file. Then click Close .

- URL : In URL, enter a URL for a web site, a network or local directory, or a document in a network or local directory. You can add a brief description for the URL. Then click Close .

5. Repeat the procedure to attach other linked reporting objects as needed.

The objects that you created are displayed in the Linked Reporting Objects list as shown here:

6. Refresh the grid to apply the cell style (if specified) to the cell.

To edit or delete a linked reporting object, use the Edit button or Delete button . Deleting an object removes it from the database.

Related topics:

- Linked Reporting Objects

- Launching a Linked Reporting Object from a Data Cell

Launching a Linked Reporting Object from a Data Cell

To launch a reporting object from a data cell:

1. Select the data cell that is associated with the linked object that you want to launch.

2. From the Essbase ribbon, select Linked Objects to display Linked Reporting Objects .

3. From Linked Reporting Objects , select the linked object to launch.

4. Click . The linked reporting object launches as follows:

- Cell notes are displayed in the Cell Note dialog box.

- Files are opened.

- URL objects are opened in the default web browser.

- Linked partitions—see Linked Partitions

Related topics:

- Linked Reporting Objects

- Attaching a Linked Reporting Object to a Data Cell

Linked Partitions

Data source types: Essbase

A linked partition connects two databases by means of a data cell. Using a data cell associated with a linked partition, you can navigate from the database connected to the current grid to a second database. Because the two databases may have different dimensions, you can see the data in different contexts. When you launch a linked partition, a new spreadsheet that displays the dimensions from the linked database opens. From there, you can drill down into the dimensions of the linked database.

To launch a linked partition:

1. Select a data cell associated with a linked partition.

2. From the Essbase ribbon, select Linked Objects .

3. From Linked Reporting Objects , select the linked partition (displayed as Linked in the list).

4. Click .

The linked partition is launched in a new spreadsheet. From this spreadsheet, you can drill down to data in the linked database.

Cell Comments

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

Comments can be added to data cells in Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

Cell Comments in Planning

Cell Comments in Financial Management

Cell Comments in Planning

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

You can add one or more comments per data cell; each data cell can contain comments from multiple users. Depending on the permission level assigned to you by the administrator, you may be able to do any of the following in a data cell:

- Add comments.

- View the comments that you and other users have added.

- Delete comments that you have entered. You cannot delete comments added by other users.

Cells that contain comments can be associated with a cell style (See Cell Styles ).

To add comments to a data cell:

1. Select one data cell or a range of data cells in an ad hoc grid.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Cell Actions and then Comments .

3. From Comments , click .

4. If you selected a range of cells in step 1 , you can either enter comments for one cell at a time or apply a comment to all selected cells.

- To enter a comment for one cell, select the cell from the drop-down menu.

- To enter a comment for all selected cells, select Apply to all selected cells .

5. In the field at the right, enter a comment. If you want to format the comment, use HTML tags.

6. Click to save the comment.

The comment is displayed in the list of comments to the left of the comment field. This list contains comments entered by all users.

7. Click OK.

8. Optional: To delete a comment, click . You can delete only the comments that you have entered.

Cell Comments in Financial Management

Cells in ad hoc grids, forms, Smart Slices, and the Query Designer can contain multiple comments. Comments within a cell are differentiated by their labels, which are defined in Financial Management. You cannot create labels in Smart View.

You select from these defined labels to add and view in Smart View. You cannot edit or delete labels, but you can edit and delete comments.

Viewing and Adding Cell Comments

To view or add cell comments in Financial Management:

1. Select a cell in the grid.

2. From the ribbon, select Cell Comments .

Any comments currently associated with the cell are displayed in the Cell Comments list.

3. To add a comment, from Cell Comments , select a label from the drop-down menu.

4. Click .

The selected cell text label is added to the list of labels.

5. Click in the field under Cell Text and add a comment.

6. Repeat as needed to add other labels.

7. Click OK .

The labels in the list are now associated with the cell.

Editing and Deleting Cell Comments

To edit or delete cell comments in Financial Management:

1. Select a cell in the grid.

2. From the HFM ribbon, select Cell Comments .

3. From Cell Comments , select a comment in the list and then do one of the following:

- To edit the comment, select . After editing, click .

- To delete the comment from the cell, select the Delete button. The comment is removed from the list. Deleting a comment removes it only from the selected cell; it remains available for selection from the drop-down menu.

4. Click OK .

Note:

In Financial Management, you can use functions HsSetText and HsGetText to submit and retrieve cell text to and from the data source. See Functions.

Cell Comments in Essbase

Subtopics

- Enabling Essbase Cell Comments

- Viewing Essbase Cell Comments in the Sheet

- Editing Essbase Cell Comments

- Deleting Essbase Cell Comments

When you are connected to an Essbase provider, cell comments are a way for you to detect invalid members on a grid. Cell comments also show you text typed outside the grid; for example, your own notes on a sheet. By enabling cell comments in Essbase, you can quickly and easily spot invalid members in the grid or locate pertinent notes you may have made on a sheet.

For example, in an Essbase database on the server, a member named " Oregon Coast " member is renamed " Oregon ". Smart View tracks this change and shows it to you if you define a cell style to call out cell comments. Then, you can quickly note the change and correct it in the grid.

To work with Essbase cell comments, in Smart View Options , you enable Enhanced Comment Handling , enable Use Cell Styles , and, optionally, define a distinctive cell style for comments. You can then easily identify commented cells on the sheet, and further select and work with them in the Comment Edit dialog box.

Enabling Essbase Cell Comments

To enable cell comments in Essbase:

1. In the Options dialog box, perform these tasks:

a. In Member Options , select Enable Enhanced Comment Handling .

Note:

The Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot) option must be selected to enable the Enable Enhanced Comment Handling option.

b. In Formatting , select Use Cell Styles .

c. In Cell Styles , expand Common , and then select the check box next to Comment Cells . Next, right-click Comment Cells and define a Font , Background , or Border for cells containing cell comments.

2. Click OK .

Optionally, click the arrow in the OK button and choose either Save as Default Options or Apply to All Sheets . These options are described in " Sheet Options " in Smart View Options .

You are now ready for the steps in Viewing Essbase Cell Comments in the Sheet

Viewing Essbase Cell Comments in the Sheet

To view Essbase cell comments in the sheet:

1. Be sure to complete the steps in Enabling Essbase Cell Comments

2. Open a workbook containing a grid, connect to an Essbase provider, and click Refresh .

3. On the sheet, note the cells containing Essbase comments.

In the example in Figure 25, Grid Showing Cells Marked with Cell Comments , cell C5 is marked as a comment, probably because the member name was changed in the underlying Essbase database. The comment style indicates to us that this member needs attention.

Additionally, a second comment in the sheet notes that the Oregon Coast member name needs to be changed to Oregon. This comment confirms to us that the member name has been changed on the server and the member needs to be manually updated in the grid.

Figure 25. Grid Showing Cells Marked with Cell Comments

4. Continue with Editing Essbase Cell Comments or Deleting Essbase Cell Comments .

Editing Essbase Cell Comments

Be sure to complete the steps in Enabling Essbase Cell Comments .

Note:

The procedure in this topic shows you how to edit Essbase cell comments using the View Comments command and the Comment Edit dialog box in Smart View. You can also edit cell comments directly in the grid, without using the Smart View interface elements in this topic.

To edit Essbase cell comments:

1. If you have not already done so, open a workbook containing a grid, connect to an Essbase provider, and click Refresh .

2. Click View Comments in the Essbase ribbon.

Figure 26. View Comments Command in Essbase Ribbon

Tip:

The View Comments command is enabled only when there are comments in the sheet.

The Comment Edit dialog box is launched. The example in Figure 27, Comment Edit Dialog Box shows two comments in the sheet which can be edited.

Figure 27. Comment Edit Dialog Box

3. To edit the text in a row, first click in the row to highlight the editable text; for example, click in the " Oregon Coast " row to highlight it, as shown in Figure 28, Row Highlighted, Ready for Editing in Comment Edit Dialog Box

Figure 28. Row Highlighted, Ready for Editing in Comment Edit Dialog Box

4. Edit the text as required; in this example, change " Oregon Coast " to " Oregon ".

Figure 29. Changed Text in Comment Edit Dialog Box

5. Click Apply Changes and note the change in the grid.

In Figure 30, Grid After Clicking Apply Changes; Cell C5 Still Commented , cell C5 still shows as a commented cell, and will until the sheet is refreshed.

Figure 30. Grid After Clicking Apply Changes; Cell C5 Still Commented

6. Click Refresh; the comment style is cleared.

Figure 31. Grid After Refresh, Cell Style in Cell C5 Is Cleared; Member is In Sync with Server

Deleting Essbase Cell Comments

Be sure to complete the steps in Enabling Essbase Cell Comments .

Note:

The procedure in this topic shows you how to delete Essbase cell comments using the View Comments command and the Comment Edit dialog box in Smart View. You can also delete cell comments directly in the grid, without using the Smart View interface elements in this topic.

To delete Essbase cell comments:

1. If you have not already done so, open a workbook containing a grid, connect to an Essbase provider, and click Refresh .

2. Click View Comments in the Essbase ribbon (see Figure 26, View Comments Command in Essbase Ribbon ).

The Comment Edit dialog box is launched. The example in Figure 32, Comment Edit Dialog Box shows one comment left on the sheet, which can be removed.

Figure 32. Comment Edit Dialog Box

3. To delete the entire comment, first click in the row to highlight the editable text; for example, click in the " Oregon Coast " row to highlight it, as shown in Figure 33, Cell Comment Highlighted and Ready to be Deleted , then press the Delete key.

Figure 33. Cell Comment Highlighted and Ready to be Deleted

After deletion, the text in the Comments column is removed, but the Cell ID is still displayed (see Figure 34, Cell Comment Deleted, Cell ID Remaining ).

Figure 34. Cell Comment Deleted, Cell ID Remaining

4. Click Apply Changes and view the changes in the sheet.

In Figure 35, Sheet After Clicking Apply Changes; Cell F5 Still Commented , cell F5 still shows as a commented cell, and will until the sheet is refreshed.

Figure 35. Sheet After Clicking Apply Changes; Cell F5 Still Commented

5. Click Refresh; the comment style is cleared.

Figure 36. Grid After Refresh, Cell Style in Cell F5 Is Cleared

Attachments

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Documents can be attached to individual data cells by way of URLs. Each data cell can contain multiple documents attached by one or more users. Depending on the permission level assigned to you by the administrator, you may be able to do any of the following in a data cell:

- Attach documents.

- View the documents that you and other users have attached.

- Edit and delete documents that you have attached. You cannot edit or delete documents attached by other users.

Cells that contain attachments can be associated with a cell style.

See Cell Styles .

To attach documents to a data cell:

1. Select one data cell or a range of data cells in a Planning ad hoc grid.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Cell Actions and then Attachment to display the Attachments dialog box.

3. If you selected a range of cells in step 1 , you can either attach documents to one cell at a time or attach the same document to all selected cells.

- To attach a document to one cell, select the cell from the drop-down menu.

- To attach one document to all selected cells, select Apply to all selected cells .

4. Select .

5. Click in the cell under Description to add a brief description.

6. Click in the cell under Reference to enter the URL to the document that you want to attach.

7. Repeat as necessary to add attachments.

8. To save your attachment selections, click .

9. Optional: To edit a Reference entry, click , edit the reference, and then click .

10. Optional: To delete an attachment, select the attachment in the list and click .

11. Click Close .

Launching Attachments

To launch an attached document in a new browser:

1. Select the cell that contains the attachment.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Cell Actions and then Attachment .

3. Click .

Cell History

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

You can view the history of changes made to a data cell or range of data cells. For each change listed, the user who made the change, date, old value, and new value are displayed.

Note:

Cell history is available only if data auditing is enabled by the Planning administrator (as described in the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrators Guide ).

To display cell history:

1. Select one data cell or a range of cells in a Planning ad hoc grid.

2. From the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Cell Actions and then Cell History to display the Change History screen.

3. If you selected multiple cells in step 1 , select one cell at a time from the drop-down menu in Change History to view its history.

Ad Hoc Analysis

In This Section:

About Ad Hoc Analysis

Starting Ad Hoc Analysis

Inserting Essbase Attribute Dimensions on the Sheet

Preserving Excel Formulas in Ad Hoc Grids

Formatting Ad Hoc Grids

Zooming In and Out

Pivoting

Removing Selected Members From the Grid

Inserting Rows and Columns

Displaying and Suppressing Repeated Members

Multiple Grids on a Worksheet

Cascading Reports and Ad Hoc Grids

Substitution Variables

About Ad Hoc Analysis

In ad hoc analysis, you use Smart View functionality with Excel spreadsheets to retrieve and analyze data by selecting members, using functions, and performing a variety of operations, including formatting, to design your reports.

You can perform ad hoc analysis in Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise, and Financial Management.

Starting Ad Hoc Analysis

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise, and Financial Management

When you connect to a provider and select the Ad hoc analysis option, the Ad Hoc ribbon for that provider is displayed and ad hoc functionality is then available from that ribbon.

Note:

For Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, all ad hoc functionality is available from the Essbase or Performance Reporting ribbon respectively.

Also, note that when you start ad hoc analysis with Essbase or Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, the alias table named "Default" is selected by default.

To start ad hoc analysis:

1. From Recently Used , Shared Connections , or Private Connections on the Smart View Panel, select one of the following:

- Smart Slice

- Form

- Plan type

- Cube or model

2. From the Action Panel, select Ad hoc analysis .

Alternatively, right-click the object in the Smart View Panel and select Ad hoc analysis .

The data provider ribbon is displayed.

Tip:

If an error appears similar to " Ad hoc grid cannot be opened as there are no valid rows of data, " then you should clear the suppress options in the Data Options tab of the Options dialog box. Ensure that all Suppress Rows and Suppress Columns options are cleared, and that the Suppress missing blocks option is cleared.

3. Use the ribbon buttons to perform ad hoc analysis on the current worksheet.

If you are familiar with the dimensions and members of your database, you can use free-form mode by entering dimension and member names directly into cell to design and create an ad hoc grid. See Free-Form Mode.

Inserting Essbase Attribute Dimensions on the Sheet

Data source types: Essbase

When performing ad hoc analysis, you can quickly insert Essbase attribute dimensions on the worksheet.

To insert Essbase attribute dimensions on a worksheet:

1. Connect to an Essbase database and either perform an ad hoc analysis or type members in free-form format on the worksheet.

2. In the Essbase ribbon, click the Insert Attributes button, .

For example, using Sample Basic, from the Action Panel, select Ad hoc analysis to place dimensions, including page dimensions, on the worksheet, as shown in Figure 37, Initial Ad Hoc Grid .

Figure 37. Initial Ad Hoc Grid

Now click Insert Attributes , .

In Figure 37, Initial Ad Hoc Grid , you can see that the attributes Caffeinated, Ounces, Pkg Type, Population, and Intro Date have been added to the worksheet as page dimensions.

Figure 38. Ad Hoc Grid After Clicking Insert Attributes

You can now work with the attribute dimensions in the same way you would if you had used the Member Selection dialog box or free-form to place the attributes on the sheet. Along with the other page dimensions, you can pivot the attribute dimensions between rows and columns on the grid, and pivot them between the POV and the grid.

Notes about inserting attributes:

- If an attribute is already present on the grid, then it will not be duplicated when you click Insert Attributes .

- The grid must be in refreshed state. If the grid is in free-form state prior to refresh, then Smart View prompts you to manually refresh.

- Once attributes are inserted on the grid, the grid is auto-refreshed.

- If there is no POV or title row present in the sheet, then a row will be added at the top of the sheet for inserting the attribute dimensions.

- Only the default member of the attribute will be inserted; you cannot insert specific members from an attribute dimension, although after insertion, you can use Member Selection to select them.

- The Insert Attributes operation is not supported for Query Designer or Smart Slice design sheets.

- Insert Attributes is supported only for Essbase; it is not supported for non-Essbase providers.

- Insert Attributes is not supported for multiple grid sheets.

Preserving Excel Formulas in Ad Hoc Grids

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, and Financial Management

You can associate Excel formulas with member and data cells in ad hoc grids and set cell styles to identify such cells.

See Cell Styles .

By default, formulas are preserved when you perform ad hoc operations, except for Pivot . To achieve faster execution of queries, you can disable the preservation of formulas and comments. However, if you select this option, formulas are overwritten when you perform ad hoc operations.

To specify preservation of formulas in ad hoc grids:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Options , and then Member Options in the left panel.

2. Do one of the following:

- To preserve formulas in ad hoc grids, select Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot) .

- To disable preservation of formulas, clear Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot) . Do this only if you do not need to preserve formulas and you want faster execution of queries.

Note:

Although the Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot) option appears in Member Options , the selection you make applies to formulas in both member and data cells.

3. Click OK .

Formatting Ad Hoc Grids

Subtopics

- Using Smart View Formatting

- Using Excel Formatting

You can let either Smart View or Excel control grid formatting.

Using Smart View Formatting

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, and Financial Management

Smart View formatting consists of formatting selections made in the Cell Styles and Formatting tabs of the Options dialog box.

To set Smart View formatting options:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Options .

2. From Options , to set cell styles, select Cell Styles in the left pane.

Cell styles indicate certain types of member and data cells.

See Cell Styles for more information.

3. To set other Smart View formatting options, select Formatting from the left pane ( Use Excel Formatting on this page is not a Smart View formatting option).

See Smart View Options for descriptions of options.

4. Click OK.

To apply Smart View formatting selections to data cells created by zooming:

1. From the grid, select a formatted data cell.

2. From the Essbase ribbon, Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, or Hyperion Enterprise ribbon, select Preserve Format .

Using Excel Formatting

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

If you use Excel formatting, your formatting selections, including conditional formatting, are applied and retained on the grid when you refresh or perform ad hoc operations.

When you use Excel formatting, Smart View does not reformat cells based on your grid operations, and it does not mark cells as dirty when you change data values. Smart View does preserve the formatting on the worksheet between operations.

Using Excel formatting is generally preferable for highly formatted reports, and you must use Excel formatting for data sources whose application-specific colors are not supported by the Excel color palate.

To use Excel formatting on ad hoc grids:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options .

2. From Options , select Formatting from the left pane.

3. Select Use Excel Formatting.

4. Optional: To copy parent cell formatting to zoomed-in cells, select Move Formatting on Operations. With this option selected, formatting also stays with members when you pivot.

5. Click OK.

Excel Formatting and Merged Cells

To preserve the merged cell formatting during ad hoc operations (except Pivot), you must select both Use Excel Formatting and Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations options.

To replicate merged cell formatting during ad hoc operations (except Pivot), you must select all of Use Excel Formatting, Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations and Format Fill options.

Zooming In and Out

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

You can zoom in on members in the grid to display data for their children and descendents.

In Essbase connections, you can also zoom to display data for the following:

- Members of the same level, same generation, or sibling level as the selected member

- Members that are defined by the formula of the selected member

Note:

Zoom In and Zoom Out operations are not supported on views inserted from Oracle BI EE data sources.

Related Topics:

Zooming In

Zooming Out

Setting a Default Zoom Level

Selecting Members to Display when Zooming

Zooming and Formatting

Enabling Double-Click Zooming

Zooming Operations in Cells that Contain Formulas

Zooming In

You can zoom in on one cell at a time. In Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, you can also zoom in on a range of cells.

Zooming in to the Default Level

To zoom in to the default zoom level, which is specified as described in Setting a Default Zoom Level , do one of the following:

- Select a member, and then click Zoom In on the data source ribbon. In Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, you can select a range of members.

- Double-click a member (double-click zooming must be enabled; see Enabling Double-Click Zooming ).

Zooming in to a Selected Level

To zoom in to a selected level:

1. Select a member.

In Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, you can select a range of members.

2. From the data source ribbon, click the down arrow next to Zoom In , and then select one of the following options.

- Next Level to retrieve data for the children of the selected members

- All Levels to retrieve data for all descendants of the selected members

- Bottom Level to retrieve data for the lowest level of members in a dimension

- Same Level to retrieve data for all members at the same level as the selected member (Essbase only)

- Sibling Level to retrieve data for the siblings of the selected members (Essbase only)

- Same Generation to retrieve data for all members of the same generation as the selected members (Essbase only)

- Formulas to retrieve data for all members that are defined by the formula of the selected member. The formula can be a member equation or a consolidation to the parent (Essbase only)

Note:

When you zoom in on a page dimension, the page dimension is pivoted to a row dimension.

Related Topics:

- Zooming Out

- Setting a Default Zoom Level

- Enabling Double-Click Zooming

- Zooming Operations in Cells that Contain Formulas

Zooming Out

Zooming out collapses the view according to the Zoom In Level option specified as described in Setting a Default Zoom Level .

To zoom out:

1. Select a member.

In Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, you can select a range of members.

2. From the data source ribbon, click Zoom Out .

Related Topics:

- Zooming In

- Setting a Default Zoom Level

- Enabling Double-Click Zooming

- Zooming Operations in Cells that Contain Formulas

Setting a Default Zoom Level

You can specify a default level for zooming operations. This setting applies to the Zoom In button and to double-click zooming if it is enabled (see Enabling Double-Click Zooming ).

To set a Zoom In default level:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then select Member Options in the left panel.

2. From the Zoom In Level drop-down menu, select one of the following levels:

- Next Level to retrieve data for the children of the selected members

- All Levels to retrieve data for all descendants of the selected members

- Bottom Level to retrieve data for the lowest level of members in a dimension

- Same Level to retrieve data for all members at the same level as the selected member (Essbase only)

- Sibling Level to retrieve data for the siblings of the selected members (Essbase only)

- Same Generation to retrieve data for all members of the same generation as the selected members (Essbase only)

- Formulas to retrieve data for all members that are defined by the formula of the selected member. The formula can be a member equation or a consolidation to the parent (Essbase only)

3. Click OK .

Related Topics:

- Zooming In

- Zooming Out

- Enabling Double-Click Zooming

- Zooming Operations in Cells that Contain Formulas

Selecting Members to Display when Zooming

You can set options to specify which members are retained and displayed as you zoom in and out.

To set member display options for zooming:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then select Member Options in the left panel.

2. Under Member Retention , select:

- Include Selection to display both the selected member and the members retrieved as a result of zooming. For example, zooming in on the selected member Qtr1 retrieves data for Jan , Feb , Mar , and Qtr1 . If not selected, only the members retrieved as a result of the zoom are displayed: Jan , Feb , and Mar .

- Within Selected Group to zoom in only on the selected group of cells, leaving the unselected cells as is. This setting is meaningful only when there are two or more dimensions down the grid as rows or across the grid as columns. (This setting also applies to Keep Only and Remove Only .)

- Remove Unselected Groups to remove all dimensions and members except the selected member and the members retrieved as a result of zooming.

3. Click OK .

Enabling Double-Click Zooming

If double-clicking for ad hoc operations is enabled, you can zoom in to the default zoom level and zoom out by double-clicking in a member cell.

To enable double-clicking for zooming:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then select Advanced in the left panel.

2. Under Mode , select Double-click for Operations .

If you do not select Double-click for Operations , then double-clicking retains Excel functionality and puts the cell into edit mode.

3. Click OK .

Note:

In blank worksheets, double-clicking the first time retrieves the default grid and thereafter zooms in or out.

Related Topics:

- Zooming In

- Zooming Out

- Setting a Default Zoom Level

- Zooming Operations in Cells that Contain Formulas

Zooming and Formatting

You can apply the formatting of the cell that you zoom in on to the cells that are created by zooming. For Smart View formatting, this ability applies to data cells. For Excel formatting, this ability applies to member cells.

Excel Formatting

To apply Excel formatting selections to member cells created by zooming, from the Smart View ribbon, select Options . Then select all these options:

- From the Formatting page, select Use Excel Formatting

- From the Member Options page, select Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except Pivot)

- Essbase only: From the Member Options page, select Formula Fill

Zooming Operations in Cells that Contain Formulas

Data Sources : Essbase

If member or data cells are associated with formulas, you can propagate these formulas to the cells retrieved as a result of zooming in. For example, if member Qtr1 is associated with a formula, then the formula can be propagated to Jan , Feb , and Mar when you zoom in on Qtr1 .

To propagate formulas:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Options , and then select Member Options in the left panel.

2. Under Comments and Formulas , ensure that Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot) is selected.

3. Select Formula Fill .

Note:

Although these options— Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot) and Formula Fill —appear in Member Options , they apply to formulas in both member and data cells.

4. Click OK .

Related Topics:

- Zooming In

- Zooming Out

- Setting a Default Zoom Level

- Enabling Double-Click Zooming

Pivoting

Subtopics

- Pivoting Dimensions Between Rows and Columns

- Pivoting Dimensions Between the Grid and the POV Toolbar

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise

Pivoting changes the orientation of the data on the worksheet. You can move dimensions between rows and columns and between the grid and the POV.

Additionally:

- Single members or multiple members from the same dimension can be pivoted from the grid to the POV toolbar.

- Single members or multiple members from the same dimension can be pivoted from the POV toolbar to the grid.

- A single dimension, and even zero dimensions, can remain on the POV toolbar.

Note:

You can select only one dimension or one member at a time to pivot. In cases where multiple members from the same dimension are on the grid or POV, then all members in the dimension will be pivoted.

Essbase only: Multiple member pivot is supported from Smart View release 11.1.2.5.400 and later, and requires Essbase and Provider Services 11.1.2.4 or later.

Pivoting Dimensions Between Rows and Columns

You can pivot a dimension or members between rows and columns. There must be two or more dimensions, or members from two or more dimensions, in the row or column that contains the dimension that you want to pivot. That is, you cannot pivot the last row dimension or the last column dimension on a grid.

When you pivot a member, the other members in its dimension are also pivoted.

When you pivot between rows and columns, Smart View moves the selected dimension to the outermost row or column on the opposite axis. For example, when you select to pivot a dimension to a row, the system moves the dimension to the top of the grid.

Note:

When the Use Excel Formatting option is selected (as described in Using Excel Formatting ), member and numeric formats may unexpectedly change after pivot operations. For example, member names may be centered and numeric values may be left justified. You can reset the grid to the proper format using the Excel formatting options.

To pivot a dimension or member:

1. Select a dimension or member.

2. From the data source ribbon, click Pivot .

Alternatively, you can drag a dimension from the row or column and drop it on the target row or column.

Row dimensions are pivoted to the topmost column dimension.

Column dimensions are pivoted to the left-most row dimension.

Note:

You pivot members by selecting them from the POV, as described in Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar .

Pivoting Dimensions Between the Grid and the POV Toolbar

You can select to pivot a dimension out of the ad hoc grid to the Point of View (POV), or out of the POV to the grid. You can also pivot a member; if you do so, the other members in its dimension are also pivoted.

To pivot a dimension or members between the POV toolbar and the grid, perform one of the following tasks:

- To pivot a dimension to the POV, select the dimension in the grid. In the provider ribbon, click the arrow in the Pivot button, , and then select Pivot to POV .

Alternatively, right-click a dimension and drag it from the grid and drop it on the POV toolbar.

You can also pivot a member. Select one member only; you do not need to select multiple members. Selecting one member pivots all members in the dimension.

- To pivot a dimension from the POV to the grid, right click the arrow next to the dimension name in the POV toolbar, then drag the dimension and drop it on the grid.

Pivoting Notes

- You can leave any number of dimensions on the POV; for example, 0, 1, or more dimensions can be left on the POV.

- After pivoting the last dimension from the POV toolbar to the grid, the POV toolbar is hidden. You can always bring it back by clicking the POV button in the provider ribbon.

- The grid must always contain at least two dimensions: one row dimension and one column dimensions. When there is only one row dimension and one column dimension on a grid, you must first pivot the replacement dimension on to the grid before you can pivot a dimension out of the grid.

For example, if you want to pivot the row dimension off of the grid, then you must first pivot the replacement row dimension on to the grid, and then pivot the unwanted row dimension off of the grid.

- You can manually type a dimension or member name to replace a dimension or member name in the grid or the POV toolbar.

Similarly, you can delete a dimension or member from the grid, refresh the grid, and the deleted dimension or member is moved from the grid and will display on the POV toolbar.

- You can pivot members by selecting them from the POV, as described in Selecting Members From the POV Toolbar .

Removing Selected Members From the Grid

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

You can remove members and their associated data from the grid as follows:

- To keep only the currently selected members, select the member cells that you want to keep. Then, from the data source ribbon, click Keep Only . All other members in the dimension are removed.

- To remove all members except the currently selected member cells, select the cells that you want to remove. Then, from the data source ribbon, click Remove Only .

Keep Only and Remove Only operate on all instances of the selected members in the grid within the selected group.

About Keep Only and Remove Only

The results of Keep Only and Remove Only depend on how the selected group is evaluated within the grid. A group consists of two or more dimensions down the grid as rows or across the grid as columns.

To use the Keep Only or Remove Only command, the selected member must have a group of members associated with it. Members do not have to be from the same dimension to be considered a group. The selected member shouldn’t be the lowest or last member of the group.

For example, in Figure 39, Grid with Market Members in Column A, Year Members in Column B , you could think of New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire as individual groups that all contain the January member. We want to keep the data for January for those four states. Yet, when we select Jan, and then click Keep Only , the grid doesn’t change. This is because Jan is not its own group, it’s actually a member of a group originating with the Market dimension, and also belongs to the New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire groups.

Figure 39. Grid with Market Members in Column A, Year Members in Column B

Try moving Jan to reposition it so that Jan is now a group, and the members New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire belong to the Jan group, as shown in Figure 40, Grid with Year Members in Column A, Market Members in Column B

Figure 40. Grid with Year Members in Column A, Market Members in Column B

Now select a Jan cell and click Keep Only . The resulting layout shows only the Market dimension members grouped under Jan.

Figure 41. Grid with Only Jan Group Members

You can further refine the report to show only the New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire members. Select those members in the grid (see Figure 42, Members Selected for Keep Only ).

Figure 42. Members Selected for Keep Only

And then click Keep Only . The result is shown in Figure 43, Grid with Only Jan Group Members New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire .

Figure 43. Grid with Only Jan Group Members New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire

Note that you can also achieve the result in Figure 43, Grid with Only Jan Group Members New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire in another way. Select the West, South and Central members, and the Market dimension, as shown in Figure 44, Members Selected for Remove Only .

Figure 44. Members Selected for Remove Only

And then click Remove Only .

Figure 45. Grid with Only Jan Group Members New York, Florida, Connecticut, and New Hampshire

Remember that the Keep Only and Remove Only commands are always performed on the selected groups, evaluated within the grid.

Inserting Rows and Columns

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

In ad hoc grids, you can insert calculating and non-calculating columns and rows within or outside the grid. Inserted rows and columns, which may contain formulas, text, or Excel comments, are retained when you refresh or zoom in.

Always refresh the grid before inserting rows or columns.

Displaying and Suppressing Repeated Members

Data source types: Essbase

This topics describes using the Repeated Members option in the Options dialog box, Data Options tab, Suppress Rows group. This option only applies to Essbase data sources. To use the other data suppress options in the Suppress Rows and the Suppress Columns group, see Data Options .

When working with stacked dimensions in an ad hoc grid, and the Suppress Repeated Members option is selected, Essbase positions the suppressed member label above the labels in the next row, up to the first column dimension, using the " proximity rule ". With the proximity rule, when repeated members are suppressed, Essbase compares the stacked dimensions row by row. It groups the non-repeating, unsuppressed members under the closest suppressed member in the previous row. Essbase can then determine which member is being queried and retrieves the data accordingly.

The scenario that follows shows the proximity rule in action.

Using the Sample Basic database, select the Ad hoc analysis option. The Measures, Product, Market, Scenario, and Year dimensions are retrieved on the worksheet as shown in Figure 46, Sample Basic Initial Ad Hoc Analysis Grid .

Figure 46. Sample Basic Initial Ad Hoc Analysis Grid

Arrange the dimensions so that there are three " stacked " dimensions and two dimensions side by side, according to Figure 47, Sample Basic Grid with Dimensions Arranged in a Stacked Configuration .

Figure 47. Sample Basic Grid with Dimensions Arranged in a Stacked Configuration

By default, in the Data tab of the Options dialog box, the Repeated Members option in the Suppress Rows group is cleared. Zoom in on the Product and Year members, then zoom in on the Market and Scenario dimensions. The resulting grid looks similar to Figure 48, Zooming in on the Dimensions in the Grid Before Selecting the Repeated Members Option .

Figure 48. Zooming in on the Dimensions in the Grid Before Selecting the Repeated Members Option

Note:

For ease of reading, the South and Central members were removed from the grid in Figure 48, Zooming in on the Dimensions in the Grid Before Selecting the Repeated Members Option and Figure 49, Refresh the Grid After Selecting the Repeated Members Option .

Now, from the Smart View ribbon, select Options , then select the Data tab. In the Suppress Rows group, select the Repeated Members options. Then refresh the sheet. The resulting grid looks similar to Figure 49, Refresh the Grid After Selecting the Repeated Members Option . For each of the column dimensions in rows 1 and 2, where there were suppressed repeated members, the member label is centered above the labels in the next row.

The data in columns C, D, E, F, and G belong to the East member; the data in columns H, I, J, K, and L belong to West. Using the proximity rule, Scenario in column G belongs to East because it is only two columns from the East member, but three columns from the West member.

The Measures dimension label applies to the entire grid.

Figure 49. Refresh the Grid After Selecting the Repeated Members Option

Using the Suppress Repeating Members Option with 11.1.2.2.102 and Earlier Workbooks

You must perform the steps in this topic before you begin using your workbooks with Smart View 11.1.2.5.200 and later.

If you are working with spreadsheets that were created and used with version 11.1.2.2.102 or earlier of Smart View, Essbase, and Provider Services, you must complete the following steps in order to assure that row and column data aligns properly with their parent members:

1. Make a backup copy of your workbook.

2. In the Data tab of the Options dialog box, clear the Repeated Members option.

3. Refresh the workbook. You may refresh the entire workbook or refresh each sheet individually.

4. Go back to the Data tab of the Options dialog box, and select the Repeated Members option.

5. Perform the refresh operation again.

The workbook is ready for use with Smart View version 11.1.2.5.200 and later.

Multiple Grids on a Worksheet

Data source types: Essbase,

In Essbase, you can create multiple grids on one worksheet. These grids can be connected to the same data source or to different Essbase data sources. You can retrieve data in these grids and shift them on the worksheet.

Note the following limitations in worksheets that support multiple grids:

- You can submit data for only one grid at a time.

If you try to submit data for more than one grid at a time—that is, if you have selected cell ranges in more than one grid—the first range returned by Excel will be used to determine the selected grid and the submit will be performed only on that grid.

- You cannot set a cell style for dirty cells.

- You cannot enter comments.

- Multiple-grid worksheets are not supported for Smart Slices.

- You cannot change the names of named ranges from the Smart View interface.

To change the names of named ranges, use the VBA function, HypModifyRangeGridName, described in the Oracle Smart View for Office Developers Guide .

- These items on the Smart View ribbon are disabled:

- Undo

- Redo

- These items on the Essbase ribbon are disabled:

- Pivot to POV

- POV

- Preserve Format

- Data Perspective

- Cascade

- View Comments

Creating Multiple-Grid Worksheets

Data source types: Data source types: Essbase,

To create a multiple-grid worksheet:

1. In Excel, connect to an Essbase data source.

2. From any location in the worksheet, select a range of cells.

You must select a range rather than only one cell.

3. From the Smart View Panel, right-click an application, and then select Ad Hoc Analysis .

Note:

Multiple-grid worksheets are not supported for Smart Slices.

4. When prompted to change the worksheet to support multiple grids, select Yes .

5. To create a second grid on the worksheet:

a. Select a different range of cells.

b. From the Smart View Panel, right click an application, and then select Ad Hoc Analysis .

6. Repeat step 5 as necessary to add grids to the worksheet.

Converting Ad Hoc Worksheets to Multiple-Grid Worksheets

To convert an existing ad hoc worksheet to a worksheet that supports multiple grids:

1. From any location in the worksheet, select a range of cells.

You must select a range rather than only one cell.

2. From the Smart View Panel, right click the application, and then select Ad Hoc Analysis .

Changing Connections in Multiple-Grid Worksheets

To change the connection of a grid in a multiple-grid worksheet:

1. In the grid whose connection you want to change, select a range of cells.

You must select a range rather than only one cell.

2. Using Excel Name Manager, delete the associated named range.

3. From the Smart View Panel, right click the application to connect to, and then select Ad Hoc Analysis .

POV on Essbase Multiple-Grid Worksheets

The POV button is enabled for Essbase multiple-grid worksheets that contain only one grid, making it possible for you to toggle the button to show or hide the POV toolbar. The POV button remains disabled on multiple-grid worksheets that contain more than one grid.

On multiple-grid worksheets that contain one grid, the POV dimensions are displayed both in the grid and in the toolbar. On regular ad hoc worksheets, POV dimensions are displayed in the grid only if the POV toolbar is hidden.

Multiple-Grid Example: Butterfly Report

Data source types: Essbase

Typically, Smart View grids consist of member names on rows above and columns on the left of the data grid. Using the range retrieval capabilities of worksheets enabled for multiple grids, you can create grids with different layouts.

For example, you can create " butterfly " reports, with a column of members between two columns of data cells.

Figure 50. Butterfly Report

Cascading Reports and Ad Hoc Grids

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

You can create separate reports for any or all of the members of one dimension in a report based on an ad hoc grid or Smart Slice query and cascade these reports separately across the worksheets of an Excel workbook. For reports created in the Report Designer, you can also cascade reports across slides in a PowerPoint presentation. Worksheets or slides are created as needed to accommodate all reports.

Formulas, comments and other text, Smart Slice function grids, charts, tables, and sliders are included in cascaded reports.

Essbase only: Cascading is not available for multiple grid worksheets.

To cascade an ad hoc grid or Smart Slice report:

1. Open an ad hoc grid or Smart Slice report on the worksheet.

Note:

Cascading Smart Slice queries applies only to Essbase and Financial Management.

2. From the Essbase or data source ad hoc ribbon, select Cascade , and then one of the following.

- Same Workbook to use the current workbook

- New Workbook to use a new workbook

- Different Workbooks to cascade each report to a different workbook

3. From Member Selection , under Dimension , select the POV dimension to use as the basis for the report.

4. Under Members , select all members of the dimension for which you want to create reports.

One report will be generated for each member you select.

5. Click OK to begin cascading.

Depending on your selection in step 2 , the resulting reports are created on separate worksheets in the current workbook or in a new one. Each worksheet tab is named for the dimension and member of the report it contains.

Note:

To enable worksheet tab naming, do not use more than 31 characters or any the following characters for dimension or member names: ( ) : \ / ? * [ ].

Note:

Cascading may be very slow for large grids.

Substitution Variables

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Substitution variables are global placeholders that represent variable values. The designation " &CurMnth " might be a substitution variable representing the current month. Application designers or administrators define and manage substitution variables and their corresponding values; Smart View users can enter a substitution variable into the grid and retrieve its value by refreshing.

For example, say the value for substitution variable " &CurMnth " is August. When you enter &CurMnth into a grid, Smart View displays August after a refresh. Later, if the value is changed to September, then September is displayed after a refresh when you enter &CurMnth.

For more complete information about substitution variables, see the Essbase and Planning documentation, available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then select Documentation.

To retrieve the value for a substitution variable:

1. Enter a substitution variable into a cell in the grid.

Note:

Substitution variable names must begin with an ampersand (&).

2. From any ribbon, select Refresh.

The current value defined for substitution variable replaces the substitution variable in the cell (and for all cells in the current worksheet that contain &CurMnth).

Data Forms

In This Section:

Working with Forms in Excel

Opening Forms in Excel

Excel Formulas in Forms

Working with User Variables

Planning Forms

Financial Management Data Forms

Working with Forms in Excel

Forms are grid displays in which you can enter data into the database from Excel and view and analyze data or related text. Certain dimension member values are fixed, giving you a specific view into the data.

Using Smart View, you can work with Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, and Hyperion Enterprise forms in Excel.

Note:

Excel worksheets are always protected to prevent entering data for read-only cells. Therefore, some Excel functions, such as AutoSum and F9, are disabled.

In forms opened in Smart View:

- You can modify data values but not the form structure in forms.

- Values submitted to the database from Excel must be non-formatted data.

- If a form is currently loaded in Excel and the administrator changes the form definition on the server side, Oracle recommends that you close the form and reload it. This action ensures that the newest form definitions are displayed.

Customizations made to forms are preserved when you save or refresh only if they are made outside the grid or if they are made to thousands and decimal separators.

Related Topics:

Opening Forms in Excel

Planning Forms

Financial Management Data Forms

Opening Forms in Excel

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

To open a form:

1. Connect to a data source.

2. In the Smart View Panel, perform an action:

- To open one form, expand the tree list and select the form you want to open. Then click Open form on the Action Panel.

- To open multiple forms, expand the tree list and select a forms folder. Then click Open forms on the Action Panel. In Select Form , follow the instructions to open one or more forms.

3. (Planning only) To view any instructions that may be associated with the form, from the Planning ribbon, select More and then Instructions .

Excel Formulas in Forms

You can create Excel formulas in form cells inside or outside the grid if the cells are not read-only or locked. Cells that contain cell text can contain Excel formulas, but cells containing supporting detail (Planning) or line item detail (Financial Management) cannot.

Formulas are preserved in forms when you refresh the form even without saving the data, later open the saved worksheet, and when you expand or collapse rows and columns.

If you move a referential formula, its cell references are updated to reflect the new location.

In forms, you are prompted to save the workbook as an Excel file if you do any of the following (but you temporarily lose access):

- Change the current page

- Take a Planning form offline

- Select a different form

- Connect to a different data source

Working with User Variables

When a Planning form contains user variables, or when a Financial Management data form has selectable dimensions, rows, or columns, you can modify them in Smart View with user variables.

User variables resemble buttons in the POV toolbar in Smart View. When you click on the user variable buttons, the Member Selection dialog box is displayed. You then select members applicable for the user variable. Any filters that apply to the selected user variable are loaded and viewable from the filter drop-down list. Once selections are made, you can easily change one or more of the user variable buttons, thus changing the POV of a form in Smart View.

Figure 51, Example of User Variables in a Planning Form shows an example of user variables in a Planning form, where Allocation Expense, Allocation Quarter, and My Segment are user variables that can be modified to change the POV of the form.

Figure 51. Example of User Variables in a Planning Form

In an example scenario, in data form design mode in Financial Management, you can select either a member list or multiple members for a dimension, such as Period, and use the Period dimension on a row or column with the @CUR function. The Period dimension will then be represented in Smart View with user variables.

Additionally, if you use the relative time period functionality in a Financial Management data form, you can have a member from the same dimension appear on the row, column, and POV. Smart View displays the relative time period members as user variables in the POV toolbar. For information on using the relative time period functionality and for setting up selectable dimensions, rows, and columns in Financial Management, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Management Administrators Guide .

To work with user variables for forms:

1. In the Smart View panel, connect to a Planning or Financial Management data source and open a form.

Notice the available user variables in the POV toolbar across the top of the sheet. Selectable buttons are enabled, non-selectable buttons are grayed out.

2. Click a user variable button to display the Member Selection dialog box.

3. From Member Selection , select one or members to add to the selected user variable button.

Planning and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud: Alternatively, click the arrow in and select Substitution Variables to select members as substitution variables.

4. In the Filter drop-down list, select an applicable filter (if filters are available).

5. Click OK .

6. Repeat step 3 through step 5 for all user variables buttons for which you want to select members and apply filters.

7. To use the user variable buttons, click each button for which you want to apply selected members, and make a selection from the drop-down list.

8. Click Refresh to view the updated form.

Planning Forms

Data sources: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see either:

- Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

- Working with Planning for Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud Service , available on the Oracle Help Center.

Note:

In the topics in this section, Planning forms refer to forms in on-premises Planning and forms in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Related Topics:

Planning Form Behavior in Smart View

Saving Ad Hoc Grids as Forms

Performing Ad Hoc Analysis in Planning Forms

Planning Form Behavior in Smart View

Forms behave differently in Smart View than they do in Planning as follows:

- Attributes in Planning forms are not displayed in Smart View.

- Multiple levels in an outline are displayed differently in Smart View than in pages on the Planning Web application. Smart View displays up to four levels, while the Web application displays up to two levels.

- If a Planning administrator hides a dimension in the row axis of a Planning form, this dimension does not display in the row header of the form in Smart View.

- In composite forms, sections that display as charts in the Planning web application will display as grids in Smart View.

Saving Ad Hoc Grids as Forms

If you have been assigned the ad hoc grid creator role, you can save Planning ad hoc grids as forms.

To save a Planning ad hoc grid as a form:

1. With the Planning ad hoc grid active, from the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, click Save Ad Hoc Grid .

2. In Save Grid As , enter a name, path to the location where you want to save the grid, and description for the grid.

3. Optional: Select Submit Formatting to save any Excel formatting or cell style changes that have been applied to the grid.

See " Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning " for additional notes and guidelines about saving formatting in Planning ad hoc grids and forms.

4. Click OK .

The saved grid is displayed in the Smart View Panel tree list in the location that you selected in step 2 .

Performing Ad Hoc Analysis in Planning Forms

If you have been assigned the ad hoc user role by the administrator, you can perform ad hoc analysis on Planning forms that have been enabled for ad hoc by the administrator.

To perform ad hoc analysis in Planning forms:

1. Open the form.

2. Do one of the following:

- From the Smart View ribbon, click Analyze . This button is enabled only if the current form has been enabled for ad hoc analysis.

- Select the form in the Smart View Panel and click Ad hoc analysis in the Action Panel.

3. See Ad Hoc Analysis for information about performing ad hoc analysis.

Financial Management Data Forms

If you are unfamiliar with Financial Management, see the Financial Management documentation, available on Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Related Topics:

About Financial Management Members

Adding Financial Management Members

Using Financial Management Linked Forms

About Financial Management Members

If you are unfamiliar with Financial Management, see the Financial Management documentation, available on the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

When working with Financial Management 11.1.2.2.300 or later, if you use the relative time period functionality, such as @CUR, in a Financial Management data form, you can have a member from the same dimension appear on the row, column, and POV. Smart View displays the relative time period members as user variables in the POV toolbar. See Working with User Variables for more information. When working with Financial Management releases earlier than 11.1.2.2.300, if you use the @CUR functionality in a data form, when the form is imported into Smart View, the @CUR member is taken from the background POV for the selected application.

The Active Member option is available only if the application has been set up for Organization by Period. For information on Organization by Period, see the Financial Management documentation.

Adding Financial Management Members

If you are unfamiliar with Financial Management, see the Financial Management documentation, available on the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

If enabled by the administrator, you can insert and save additional rows of members and data. Totals are updated to reflect the new data.

For example, suppose a data form has been defined for an account with transactions for IC1, IC2, and IC4. You could select members IC3 and IC5 for insertion into the form. The form is refreshed with the new data and the new rows are displayed in the appropriate hierarchical order.

To add members to data forms:

1. Open a data form.

2. From the HFM ribbon, click Add Member .

A cell style can be designated for Add Member.

See Cell Styles .

3. From the member selector, select the members for which to enter data.

4. Click OK .

The new members are listed in the member list.

Using Financial Management Linked Forms

Administrators can define links in data forms from one form to another to enable drill-through to a more specific data entry view. For example, a form that contains summary account balances can link to a corresponding form with the account details. The link from one form to another applies to an entire row. A form can contain up to 64 linked forms.

To use linked forms:

1. In a data form, select a row that contains linked forms. Linked forms are indicated by the following icon:

2. Right-click and select HFM Linked Forms , then select the form name.

A new form is displayed in a separate browser window.

3. When you finish using the linked form, click Close .

General Operations

In This Section:

Using Undo and Redo

Copying and Pasting

Enabling Automatic Column Width Adjustment

Sheet Information

Document Contents

Shared Workbooks

Opening Large Workbooks in Smart View

Printing POV Members in the Header and Footer

Enabling and Disabling Smart View

Using Undo and Redo

Subtopics

- Undo Support By Provider

- Specifying the Number of Undo and Redo Actions

Smart View Undo and Redo behave differently depending on the data source to which you are connected. Briefly:

- In ad hoc analysis with Essbase, Financial Management, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, or Hyperion Enterprise data sources, Undo undoes Zoom In, Zoom Out, Keep Only, Remove Only, or Refresh and restores the previous database view to the grid. Performing an Undo after modifying member data returns the sheet to its state before the last refresh, not to its state before the data modification.

- In forms with Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise, or Planning data sources, Undo undoes the last user action in a cell.

- In ad hoc grids for all providers, Excel formatting is not retained when performing an Undo.

See Undo Support By Provider for more detailed information.

Note:

You can only undo operations that are performed in Smart View. You cannot undo operations that are performed on the provider server, such as calculation status.

Undo Support By Provider

Subtopics

- Undo Support in Essbase

- Undo Support in Financial Management

- Undo Support in Planning

- Undo Support in Enterprise Performance Reporting

Undo Support in Essbase

Table 1. Undo Operations Supported by Essbase

Operation

Single Grid

Multiple Grid

VBA

Functions

Ad Hoc

Zoom In

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zoom Out

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Keep Only

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Remove Only

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Pivot

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Refresh

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Options

General

Zoom In Level

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Name Display

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Indentation

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Ancestor Position

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Retention

Include Selection

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Within Selected Group

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Remove Unselected Groups

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Comments and Formulas

Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot)

Preserve Excel Formulas: Not Supported
Preserve Smart View Functions: Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

—Formula Fill

Preserve Excel Formulas: Not Supported
Preserve Smart View Functions: Not Supported

—Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

Preserve Comments: Supported

Preserve Formula on POV Change

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Data Options

Rows

Suppress No Data/Missing

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zero

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

No Access

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Invalid

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Underscore Characters

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Repeated Members

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Columns

Suppress No Data/Missing

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zero

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

No Access

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Mode

Suppress Missing Blocks

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Modify Open Saved

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Alias Table

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Metadata (member data)

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cell Style

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Undo Support in Financial Management

Table 2. Undo Operations Supported by Financial Management

Operations

Form

Ad Hoc

Data Grid

VBA

Functions

Ad Hoc

Zoom In

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zoom Out

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Keep Only

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Remove Only

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Pivot

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Refresh

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Options

General

Zoom In Level

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Name Display

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Indentation

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Ancestor Position

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Retention

Include Selection

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Within Selected Group

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Remove Unselected Groups

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Comments and Formulas

Preserve Formulas and Comments

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

—Formula Fill

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

—Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Preserve Formula on POV Change

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Data Options

Rows

Suppress No Data/Missing

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zero

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

No Access

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Invalid

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Underscore Characters

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Repeated Members

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Columns

Suppress No Data/Missing

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zero

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

No Access

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Mode

Suppress Missing Blocks

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Modify Open Saved

N/A

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Alias Table

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Metadata (member data)

N/A

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cell Style

N/A

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Undo Support in Planning

Table 3. Undo Operations Supported by Planning

Operations

Form

Ad Hoc

VBA

Functions

Ad Hoc

Zoom In

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Zoom Out

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Keep Only

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Remove Only

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Pivot

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Refresh

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Member Options

General

Zoom In Level

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Member Name Display

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Indentation

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Ancestor Position

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Member Retention

Include Selection

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Within Selected Group

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Remove Unselected Groups

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Comments and Formulas

Preserve Formulas and Comments

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

—Formula Fill

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

—Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Preserve Formula on POV Change

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Data Options

Rows

Suppress No Data/Missing

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Zero

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

No Access

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Invalid

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Underscore Characters

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Repeated Members

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Columns

Suppress No Data/Missing

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Zero

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

No Access

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Mode

Suppress Missing Blocks

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Modify Open Saved

N/A

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

Alias Table

N/A

Supported

N/A

N/A

Metadata (member data)

N/A

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

Cell Style

N/A

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

Undo Support in Enterprise Performance Reporting

Table 4. Undo Operations Supported by Enterprise Performance Reporting

Operation

Single Grid

Multiple Grid

VBA

Functions

Ad Hoc

Zoom In

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zoom Out

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Keep Only

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Remove Only

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Pivot

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Refresh

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Options

General

Zoom In Level

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Name Display

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Indentation

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Ancestor Position

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Member Retention

Include Selection

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Within Selected Group

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Remove Unselected Groups

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Comments and Formulas

Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot)

NA

N/A

N/A

N/A

—Formula Fill

N/A

—Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

N/A

Preserve Formula on POV Change

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Data Options

Rows

Suppress No Data/Missing

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zero

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

No Access

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Invalid

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Underscore Characters

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Repeated Members

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Columns

Suppress No Data/Missing

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Zero

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

No Access

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Mode

Suppress Missing Blocks

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Modify Open Saved

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Alias Table

Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Metadata (member data)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cell Style

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Specifying the Number of Undo and Redo Actions

To specify the number of permitted undo and redo actions:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , then select Advanced in the left panel.

2. In Number of Undo Actions , specify the number of permissible Undo operations, 0 through 100.

This is also the number of Redo operations permitted.

3. Click OK . The setting takes effect after you refresh or perform a drill operation.

Copying and Pasting

Subtopics

- Importing Metadata into Copied Worksheets

- Importing Metadata into Copied Slides or Presentations

- Copying, Pasting, and Refreshing Content

- Copying Data Between Excel, Word, and PowerPoint

Importing Metadata into Copied Worksheets

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Reporting and Analysis, Hyperion Enterprise

Metadata consists of such things as the POV, alias tables, and connection information.

When you use the Excel copy and paste commands to copy an Excel worksheet, only the data is copied. The metadata is not copied. However, after the data is copied, you can import the metadata from the original worksheet to the new one.

You can import metadata in the following:

- Ad hoc mode, including Smart Slices

- Forms

- Functions

- Query-bound functions in sheets created by Smart View copy and paste

- Non-query-bound functions created by the Function Builder

- Worksheets that contain reports imported from Reporting and Analysis providers

You cannot import metadata in worksheets that contain Report Designer objects, but such workbooks can be replicated by cascading as described in Cascading Reports and Ad Hoc Grids .

Note:

This procedure should be performed only by advanced users.

To import metadata to a copied worksheet (this operation cannot be undone):

1. Back up your work.

2. From the Smart View menu, select Options , then Advanced , and ensure that Improved Metadata Storage is selected.

3. Use Excel to copy a worksheet.

This operation copies the visible contents of the source worksheet but not the metadata (connection information, POV selections, alias tables, and such items) to the destination worksheet.

4. With the destination worksheet active, from the Smart View menu, select More , then Import Metadata to display a list of all open workbooks and their corresponding open worksheets.

5. From the list, select the worksheet that contains the metadata that you want to import to the destination worksheet.

6. Click OK . You will be asked to confirm your selection.

7. Refresh.

8. To refresh the Document Contents pane, click

Importing Metadata into Copied Slides or Presentations

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Oracle BI EE, Reporting and Analysis, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

Metadata consists of such things as the POV, alias tables, and connection information.

When you use the PowerPoint copy and paste commands to copy a slide or presentation, only the data is copied; the metadata is not copied. By using the Import Metadata command, after the data is copied, you can import the metadata from the original slide or presentation into the new slide or presentation. This functionality is similar to that described in Importing Metadata into Copied Worksheets .

In a new presentation, you may want to make use of an existing PowerPoint slide that contains not only the formatting and layout that you need, but data points as well. Instead of recreating the slide from scratch, you can reuse the work that is already available. The Import Metadata command on the Smart View ribbon helps you achieve this.

Note the following guidelines when copying, pasting, and importing:

- You must select a single slide to begin the import process. Smart View displays an error message if you invoke the Import Metadata command when either no slide is selected or multiple slides are selected.

- You must first copy objects before selecting the Import Metadata command; otherwise, Smart View prompts you with a message.

- The slide from which the object is copied and the slide from which the metadata is to be imported must be the same.

- Metadata is copied only for the copied objects or shapes, only rather than copying all the metadata present in the source slide.

- Copying the POV or slider within the same presentation will result in incorrect behavior in the presentation.

To import metadata into a PowerPoint slide or presentation:

1. Back up your work.

2. From the Smart View menu, select Options , then Advanced , and ensure that Improved Metadata Storage is selected.

3. Use the PowerPoint copy command to copy information in any of the ways supported by PowerPoint; for example:

- Copy individual objects and paste to the destination slide. The destination slide could be a part of source presentation or different presentation.

- Duplicate a slide.

- Copy a complete slide and paste into the same presentation or a different one.

- Drag any slide and drop to another presentation.

- Copy and paste an entire presentation.

This operation copies the visible contents of the source slides but not the metadata—for example, connection information, POV selections, alias tables, and other such items—to the destination slide or presentation.

4. With the destination slide or presentation active, from the Smart View ribbon, click Import Metadata , .

5. In the Select slide dialog box, select the slide or presentation that contains the metadata that you want to import to the destination slide or presentation, and then click Import .

Note that importing metadata from a presentation may be a time consuming operation, particularly for presentations with large number of slides and Smart View metadata.

In the following example, Slide21 from Department Reports.pptx is the slide from which we want to import metadata.

Note:

When importing metadata from a slide to the active slide, the active slide is not shown in the tree in the Select slide dialog box. This is because the active slide is the destination slide where metadata is to be imported and is, therefore, not available for selection. For the same reason, when importing metadata from a presentation to the active presentation, the Import button is disabled when the active presentation is selected in the Select slide dialog box.

A confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.

7. Refresh.

When successful, you will see the that Document Contents pane is updated with metadata for each slide. An example is shown in Figure 52, Document Content Pane After Importing Metadata .

Figure 52. Document Content Pane After Importing Metadata

Copying, Pasting, and Refreshing Content

The following Smart View content can be copied and pasted using the Copy and Paste buttons in the Smart View ribbon, and then refreshed using Smart View Refresh.

- Ad hoc—all applicable providers

- Functions—all applicable providers

- Oracle BI EE content

Other content in Smart View will be pasted as static text, including content from Financial Management forms, Planning forms, and Excel pivot tables.

Copying Data Between Excel, Word, and PowerPoint

In Smart View, you can copy data from Excel and paste it into Excel, Word, or PowerPoint. The data you copy and paste is dynamic between Office applications. You can copy and paste data from:

- Excel to Word and PowerPoint

- Excel to Excel (ad hoc only)

- Word to Word and PowerPoint

- PowerPoint to Word and PowerPoint

The data points retain their original Excel-based query information, enabling you to perform data analysis. Word and PowerPoint can contain data points from multiple data sources, such as Essbase, Financial Management, and Planning within one document.

Notes

- Dynamic data points are maintained only in Word and PowerPoint. If you copy and paste data points within Excel, the data points are not linked to the Excel grid.

- When copying and pasting from Word to PowerPoint, or vice versa, data is displayed in a straight line. The tabular format is preserved only when copying data from Excel into Word or PowerPoint.

- Numeric formatting in Excel is preserved when data is pasted into Word and PowerPoint. Apply numeric formatting in Excel before copying and pasting data.

- If the name of the connection to the data source contains a semicolon (;), you may not be able to paste function data points.

- Copying and pasting data points is limited to use with grids and functions. You can copy data points from forms or Excel pivot tables, but they will be pasted as static text.

To copy and paste data from Excel, Word, or PowerPoint to Excel, Word, or PowerPoint:

1. Select a data cell or range (may or may not include members).

2. From the Smart View ribbon, select Copy .

3. Open a Word or PowerPoint document, or another Excel worksheet or workbook.

4. If asked if you want to create a connection, click Yes.

5. From the Smart View ribbon, select Paste .

6. Refresh.

Note:

If you paste data into a Word document and save it in a different format such as .htm or .mht , you cannot refresh the data in these other formats.

7. Optional: To change the POV in Word or PowerPoint after you paste the data, click Manage POV and follow the procedure in Selecting Members for the Default or Background POV .

Retrieving Spreadsheets From Which Data Points Were Copied

To retrieve the Excel spreadsheets from which data points were copied:

1. In a Word or PowerPoint document into which Excel data points were pasted, select a data cell.

2. From the data source ribbon, select Visualize in Excel .

3. If asked to log on the data source, enter the user name and password.

Excel displays the spreadsheet associated with the data cells. You can perform ad hoc analysis on the data.

Enabling Automatic Column Width Adjustment

To enable the automatic adjustment of Excel column width to accommodate the contents of member and data cells:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options .

2. In Options , from the left panel, select Formatting .

3. Select Adjust column width .

4. Click OK .

5. From any ribbon, select Refresh to adjust columns in the current grid.

If Adjust column width is not selected, you can adjust the width of columns manually.

Sheet Information

To view connection and other details for the current worksheet:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, click Sheet Info .

Depending on the Smart View data on the sheet, Sheet Information displays details on the following properties:

- Connected —Connection status; Yes if connected, No if not connected.

- Sheet Type —Ad hoc, Multiple grid ad hoc, or Form.

- Server —The name of the server to which the sheet is connected.

- Application —The application to which the sheet is connected.

- Cube —The cube, model, or database to which the sheet is connected.

- URL —The URL string of the data source provider to which the sheet is connected.

- Provider —The data source type to which the sheet is connected; for example, Planning, Financial Management, or Analytic Services (Essbase).

- Provider URL —The URL string of the data source provider to which the sheet is connected; this property is applicable to Analytic Provider Services 11.1.1.4.x and earlier releases.

- Friendly Name —For private connections only. The data source connection name specified by the user when creating or editing a private connection, or when adding a shared connection to private connections.

- Alias Table —The current alias table.

- Associated Ranges —For multiple grid sheets. The sheet name, application, database, and a unique identifier for each grid in the multiple grid sheet. Multiple grid worksheets apply to Essbase data sources only. To use Sheet Information with multiple grid worksheets, see Sheet Information Notes .

- Description —For private connections only. The optional connection description entered by the person creating or editing the private connection.

- Form Name —The name of the form to which the sheet is connected. This properties applies when connected to forms in Planning and Financial Management only.

2. Optional: Select the following options as needed.

- Delete —Provides these options for deleting Smart View metadata:

- Delete worksheet metadata

- Delete workbook metadata

- Delete all metadata (deletes workbook metadata and all worksheets)

- Save —Saves the Sheet Information content to an Excel spreadsheet.

3. Optional: To copy the selected item in the list to the clipboard, press Ctrl+C .

To copy the entire Sheet Information list, ensure that no items are selected in Sheet Information , then press Ctrl+C . If you have already selected an item in the list, then close Sheet Information , reopen it, and press Ctrl+C .

4. Click OK .

5. To view sheet information support by provider, sheet type, and connection status, see Sheet Information Support By Provider .

Sheet Information Notes

- Friendly names are for private connections only. The friendly name is the data source connection name specified by the user when creating or editing a private connection, or when adding a shared connection to private connections.

- When using the Sheet Info command with multiple grid worksheets:

- To display information on all grids on a multiple grid worksheet, click anywhere outside of the grid boundaries, or select only one cell within a grid.

- To display information for only one of the grids on a multiple grid worksheet, select the entire grid, and do not select any cells outside of the grid boundaries.

- When connected to Planning, it is not necessary to use the Set as Default Connection option to associate the sheet with an active connective. The association is made automatically immediately after connecting.

- The Sheet Information dialog box is not supported, or has very limited support, for the following providers: Oracle BI EE, Financial Reporting, and Strategic Finance.

Sheet Information Support By Provider

Subtopics

- Sheet Information Support in Essbase

- Sheet Information Support in Financial Management

- Sheet Information Support in Planning

Sheet Information Support in Essbase

Table 5. Sheet Information Supported by Essbase

Connection Status

Single Grid

Multiple Grid

VBA (HypExecuteMenu)

Formulas

Functions (HsGetVal, HsGetSheetInfo)

Shared Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Private Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Private Connection—Set as Default Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No Connection, open new blank worksheet

No

No

No

No

No

No connection, open a saved worksheet

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Set Active Connection for this Worksheet

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

No

Set as Default Connection, before associate with active connection

No (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

No

Set as Default Connection, after associating with active connection

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

No

Sheet Information Support in Financial Management

Table 6. Sheet Information Supported by Financial Management

Connection Status

Form

Ad Hoc

Formulas

VBA

Functions

Shared Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Private Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Private Connection—Set as Default Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No Connection, open new blank worksheet

No

No

No

Not applicable

No

No connection, open a saved worksheet

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Set Active Connection for this Worksheet

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Set as Default Connection, before associate with active connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Set as Default Connection, after associating with active connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Sheet Information Support in Planning

Table 7. Sheet Information Supported by Planning

Connection Status

Form

Ad Hoc

Smart Form

VBA

Rules

Functions

Shared Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Private Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Private Connection—Set as Default Connection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No Connection, open new blank worksheet

No

No

No

No

No

No

No connection, open a saved worksheet

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Set Active Connection for this Worksheet

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes

Yes

No

Set as Default Connection, before associate with active connection

Not applicable (see Sheet Information Notes )

Not applicable

Not applicable

Yes

Not applicable

Not applicable

Set as Default Connection, after associating with active connection

Yes (see Sheet Information Notes )

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Document Contents

Document Contents is a task pane in the Smart View Panel that provides a view of—and allows you to perform actions on—the content existing in the current Office document.

The Document Contents pane displays Office objects in a tree format, allowing you to easily see and interact with the content in a workbook, presentation, or document, regardless of the provider or type of content and including content from extensions. Content is displayed based on the provider connection, or the document layout on sheets, slides, or pages. Figure 53, Document Contents Pane Displaying Oracle BI EE Content shows an example of Oracle BI EE content in Document Contents in Excel.

Figure 53. Document Contents Pane Displaying Oracle BI EE Content

Depending on the provider, you can perform a subset of tasks on selected objects from the Document Contents pane.

- For most providers, you can Select , Refresh or Delete content on a sheet, slide, or document.

- For Oracle BI EE providers, you can perform additional tasks on individual views; for example, you can Mask a view, or review the properties of a view.

- For Reporting and Analysis providers, you can insert reporting objects and perform other tasks.

For example, in Figure 56, An Essbase Ad Hoc Grid Selected in Document Contents , Sheet1 contains an Essbase ad hoc view. With the Sheet node selected, the Refresh and Sheet Information options appear at the bottom of the Document Contents pane.

Figure 54. An Essbase Ad Hod Grid with the Sheet Node Selected in Document Contents

Click Sheet Information to view the Sheet Information dialog box ( Figure 55, Sheet Information Dialog Box for an Essbase Ad Hoc Grid ), where you can also choose to Save or Delete the sheet.

Figure 55. Sheet Information Dialog Box for an Essbase Ad Hoc Grid

Select the object node in Document Contents , and the context changes showing the Select , Refresh , and Delete options at the bottom of the pane ( Figure 56, An Essbase Ad Hoc Grid Selected in Document Contents ).

Figure 56. An Essbase Ad Hoc Grid Selected in Document Contents

In general, content is grouped by Smart View providers (Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, and Reporting and Analysis). Content from Oracle BI EE is grouped separately. In workbooks containing multiple objects from different data sources, you can switch the view using the Document Contents drop-down menu shown in Figure 57, Available Options in Document Contents Drop-Down Menu .

Figure 57. Available Options in Document Contents Drop-Down Menu

Select the Current Document option under Smart View and the Document Contents view changes to show the Smart View objects sorted by sheet ( Figure 58, Smart View Provider Content Listed by Sheet in Document Contents ).

Figure 58. Smart View Provider Content Listed by Sheet in Document Contents

Select the All Connections option under Smart View, and the Document Contents view changes to show objects sorted by provider ( Figure 59, Smart View Provider Content Listed by Provider in Document Contents ).

Figure 59. Smart View Provider Content Listed by Provider in Document Contents

Select the Document Hierarchy option under Oracle BI EE to see the Oracle BI EE views listed ( Figure 60, Oracle BI EE Content Listed in Document Contents ).

Figure 60. Oracle BI EE Content Listed in Document Contents

For Smart View provider content, such as Planning or Essbase objects, you can click in the tree area of Document Contents and then hover over an object icon to view connection properties, such as Server, Application, Cube, URL, Provider, POV and Alias Table, as shown in Figure 61, Connection Properties of an Essbase Ad Hoc Query . Properties vary depending on the provider.

For Oracle BI EE content, select an Oracle BI EE object, and then use the Properties link at the bottom of Document Contents to view connection properties (see Figure 53, Document Contents Pane Displaying Oracle BI EE Content ).

Figure 61. Connection Properties of an Essbase Ad Hoc Query

Refer to the following for more information on working with Document Contents :

Smart Slices

Smart View and Reporting and Analysis

Smart View and Oracle BI EE

Shared Workbooks

Smart View does not support Excel shared workbooks.

Opening Large Workbooks in Smart View

Smart View may stop responding when opening workbooks containing a large number of any of the following:

- Rows and columns

- Graphical objects

- Excel comments

To alleviate this problem, the Improve Metadata Storage option should be enabled.

From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , then Advanced , and then select the Improved Metadata Storage check box.

Printing POV Members in the Header and Footer

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

Note:

Printing POV members is not supported when connected to Financial Management.

To print the active POV members in the header or footer of an Excel document:

1. In Excel, use your preferred method to add a custom header or footer.

For example, go to the Page Layout ribbon, then select Print Titles , then the Header/Footer tab, and then click Custom Header or Custom Footer .

2. In the header or footer text box, add the following statement:

POV:{}

You may also include any other text that you may require in the header or footer.

When you print the Excel document, the POV members are printed in the header or footer as specified, along with any other text you may have added.

Note:

In Excel 2010 and 2013, after adding the POV:{} statement, the POV members do not display in Print Preview mode the first time you launch Print Preview. However, they will print. After printing the sheet, then return to Print Preview to view the POV members in Print Preview mode.

Enabling and Disabling Smart View

Subtopics

- Enabling and Disabling Smart View Within Smart View

- Enabling Smart View from Microsoft Office

Smart View is enabled by default after installation. You can disable Smart View within Smart View for all Microsoft Office applications on your computer or for Outlook alone.

Smart View may also be enabled through Office applications.

Enabling and Disabling Smart View Within Smart View

You can intentionally disable Smart View within Smart View for all Microsoft Office applications on your computer or for Outlook alone.

To disable Smart View for all Microsoft Office applications (including Outlook):

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Help .

2. Select About .

3. Clear Enable Add-in to disable Smart View the next time you open an Office application.

The Smart View ribbon ribbon remains, containing only the About button.

To enable Smart View for all Microsoft Office applications (including Outlook):

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select About .

2. Select Enable Add-in to enable Smart View the next time you open an Office application.

To disable Smart View for Outlook only:

1. From the Smart View ribbon in Excel, Word, PowerPoint, or Outlook, select Options , then Advanced in the left panel.

2. Under Display , select Disable Smart View add-in in Outlook .

Enabling Smart View from Microsoft Office

You can enable Smart View from Add-ins in Excel Options. This method is useful in cases where Smart View is disabled unintentionally, through a Microsoft Smart View error.

To enable Smart View for all Microsoft Office applications (including Outlook):

1. Perform the task appropriate for your Office version:

- 2013 and 2010: Go to File , then Options , and then Add-ins .

- 2007: Click the Office button in the top left corner of Excel, then select Excel Options , and then Add-ins .

2. From Manage , select COM Add-ins , and then Go .

3. In COM Add-ins , select the check box to enable the Oracle Smart View for Office add-in, and click OK .

Smart Query

In This Section:

About Smart Query

Creating a Smart Query

Opening a Smart Query

Copying and Pasting

Sharing Smart Query Definitions

About Smart Query

Data source types: Essbase

A Smart Query is a multidimensional analysis and reporting tool constructed from multiple sets of members and filters.

Related Topics:

Creating a Smart Query

Opening a Smart Query

Copying and Pasting

Creating a Smart Query

You create a Smart Query by defining one or more sets of members from the dimensions in an application. To each member set, you can define and apply composite filters to further refine the data to be returned by the Smart Query. Using these sets and their filters, you can create a highly complex query by defining unions, complements, and intersections of data from the different sets.

Once a Smart Query is created, you can use it for ad hoc reporting and analysis. Use the ad hoc reports created from Smart Queries to submit data. Smart Queries can be saved, reused, and shared. Sets and filters can be saved individually for use in other Smart Queries.

You cannot submit data directly from a Smart Query.

Creating a Smart Query involves performing the following procedures:

1. Defining Sets

2. Defining Set Filters

3. Building the Smart Query

4. Completing the Smart Query

Defining Sets

To define a set:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel to open the Smart View Panel.

2. From the Smart View Panel, connect to an Essbase cube or application.

3. From the Action Panel, select New Smart Query Sheet to display the Smart Query Panel in place of the Smart View Panel.

You can select the arrow next to to return to the Smart View Panel.

Default dimensions for the connection are displayed in the Smart Query Panel and on the worksheet. The Smart Query ribbon is displayed.

4. Optional: Pivot dimensions by dragging them from one area of the Smart Query Panel to another.

5. Select the name of a dimension under Row , Column , or Point of View to display it under Sets for... , where you define the set.

If the dimension exists in Row, Column, or Point of View , you can also start typing the dimension name in order to select it.

6. In Sets for ..., , click the arrow next to the dimension name and choose Select Base Members.

For POV dimensions, the members you specify in this step are available for selection from drop-down menus in the Point of View section. You can also enter these names directly.

7. From the popup menu, select a member level to include in the set or select Other to open the Member Selector , where you can select specific members.

8. Click the arrow next to the dimension name and select Add Custom Members (not available to Point of View dimensions).

9. Select from among specified values for the set.

Note:

When working with very long member names in Essbase, the Smart Query attempts to verify that the name works with Essbase. During the verification process, a numeric (for example, (1), (2), etc.) is appended to the long member name, signifying the number of verification attempts, up to 10 attempts. With each verification attempt, the numeric is incremented by one. Once the 10 attempts are completed, Smart Query proceeds with the last attempt, (9), so you can expect to see (9) appended to the member name.

Optional: Select Other to define members with MDX expressions (see the Essbase documentation) in Custom Member Expression .

MDX queries must be at least three characters long to accommodate the simplest member expression; for example, two operands and an operator. The OK button here is enabled only after the expression entered is validated.

Queries are given default names, but if you choose to rename an MDX query, do not use the following characters:

- Brackets ([ ])

- Double quotation marks (") or their XML-encoded representation ("&quot;", "&#34;", "&#0034;", "&#x22;", "&#x0022;")

- Single quotation marks () or their XML-encoded representation ("&apos;","&#39;","&#0039;","&#x27;","&#x0027;")

10. Optional: To allow duplicate members in the set, click the arrow next to the set name and select Allow Duplicates in Set (not available to Point of View dimensions).

This setting applies only to the set for which it is selected. When there are multiple sets in a Smart Query, members are displayed in the grid for all sets in which they are selected even if Allow Duplicates in Set is not selected. For example, if Jan, Feb, and Mar are selected as members for one set, and Level 0 members of Year are selected in another set in the same query, then Jan, Feb, and Mar will each appear twice in the grid because they are members of both sets.

11. Optional: To rename the set, click the arrow next to the set name and select Rename .

12. To save a set, click the arrow next to the set name, then select Repository , and then Save Set .

13. In Repository Item , enter a name and description for the member set and click OK .

14. Optional: To add additional member sets for this dimension, click the arrow next to a set name and select Add New Set and repeat the procedure.

15. Select other dimensions from the Smart Query Panel and repeat the procedure as necessary to add members for other dimensions.

Related Topics:

Defining Set Filters

Building the Smart Query

Defining Set Filters

To define filters for a set:

1. From Sets for... , click the arrow next to a set name and select Add Filter .

A new filter is displayed under Filters for Set...

2. Click the arrow next to the filter name and select one of the following to define the filter:

- Select Top/Bottom

- Select Based on Value

- Select Based on Value Specified by Members

- String Match (This option does not support qualified member names.)

3. Repeat this procedure as necessary to add more filters to the set.

When you have created the sets and filters that you want to compose the Smart Query, proceed to Building the Smart Query .

Building the Smart Query

To build a Smart Query, you apply composite filters to select unions, complements, and intersections of members from the different sets. Unions are selections of members that belong to either but not both of two sets. Intersections are selections of members that belong to all specified sets. Complements are selections of members of one specified set that are not members of another specified set.

You can use sets and composite filters in any combination to create highly complex Smart Queries.

Union of Sets

To select members that belong to either but not both sets, define two or more filters as described in Defining Set Filters from the dimension in Sets for... . For example, in Figure 62, Union of Sets , the query will return only Product, Level 0 members that are EITHER packaged in cans (Product = Can) OR are caffeinated (Product = Caffeinated_True).

Figure 62. Union of Sets

Intersection of Sets

Intersections include only the members that are common to all specified sets.

To select members common to all specified sets:

1. Define a filter for a set as described in Defining Set Filters .

2. Click the arrow next to the filter name and select Add Filter .

3. Additional Filters and a subset filter are displayed.

4. Define the second filter.

In Figure 63, Intersection of Sets , the query will return only Product, Level 0 members that are caffeinated AND packaged in a can.

Figure 63. Intersection of Sets

Complement of Sets

To select only members of a set that are not members of another specified set.

1. From Filters for... , click the arrow next to a filter name and select Add Filter .

Additional Filters and a subset filter are displayed.

2. Define the second filter.

3. Click the arrow next to Additional Filters. and select Exclude .

In Figure 64, Complement of Sets , the query will return only Product, Level 0 members that are caffeinated but are not packaged in a can.

Figure 64. Complement of Sets

When you have built the Smart Query, proceed to Completing the Smart Query .

Completing the Smart Query

To complete the Smart Query:

1. From the Smart Query ribbon, select options for the Smart Query as follows:

- Indentation (see Member Options )

- Show Distinct Member Names (see Member Options )

- Suppress Rows with No Data (see Data Options )

2. Optional: Select Change Alias to select an alias table.

The full names of duplicate and shared members are shown regardless of the selected alias table (if any). All other member names are shown according to the selected alias table.

3. To save the entire Smart Query definition, from the Smart Query ribbon, select Save .

4. In Repository , enter a name and description for the Smart Query.

5. Click OK .

Smart Queries are also saved within the workbook, so when you save a workbook, Smart Queries within it are also saved.

6. Optional: To perform ad hoc analysis, from the Smart Query ribbon, select Analyze .

Opening a Smart Query

Opening from a New Worksheet

To open an existing Smart Query:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel to open the Smart View Panel.

2. From the Smart View Panel, click the arrow next to , and then select Smart Query.

3. From the Smart Query Panel, select Open Definition to display the Repository list of available Smart Queries.

4. Select a Smart Query from the list.

5. Click OK .

Opening from an Existing Smart Query Worksheet

To open an existing Smart Query:

1. From the Smart Query ribbon, select Open to display the Repository list of available Smart Queries.

2. Select a Smart Query from the list.

3. Click OK .

4. When asked if you want to discard the existing Smart Query on the worksheet, click Yes .

The Smart Query is opened on the current worksheet.

Copying and Pasting

In Excel, you can copy an entire Smart Query definition from one worksheet to another, and sets and filters to other Smart Queries.

Copying Smart Query definitions can be used as a means of sharing queries between users.

Related Topics:

Copying Smart Query Sets and Filters

Copying Smart Query Reports to Word and PowerPoint

Sharing Smart Query Definitions

Copying Smart Query Definitions in Excel

You can copy a Smart Query definition to a different worksheet in the current workbook or in another workbook. If the worksheet into which you want to paste the definition already contains a Smart Query definition, it will be replaced by the pasted definition.

To copy a Smart Query definition from one worksheet to another:

1. Open the Smart Query worksheet that you want to copy.

2. From the Smart Query ribbon, select Copy .

3. Open a new worksheet.

4. Do one of the following:

- To copy the entire definition to a blank worksheet, from the Smart Query Panel, select Paste .

- To replace a Smart Query definition, from the Smart Query ribbon of the worksheet to be replaced, select Paste .

Copying Smart Query Sets and Filters

To copy a set, under Sets for... , click the arrow next to a set name and select Copy Set . You can then copy the set within the current Smart Query or to a different Smart Query using Paste Set from the same menu.

To copy a filter, under Filters for Set... , click the arrow next to a filter name and select Copy Filter . You can then copy the set within the current Smart Query or to a different Smart Query using Paste Filter from the same menu.

Copying Smart Query Reports to Word and PowerPoint

You cannot copy a Smart Query definition from Excel to Word or PowerPoint directly, but you can copy a grid or partial grid defined by a Smart Query from Excel to Word or PowerPoint. To do so, from the Smart Query ribbon, select Analyze . Then copy data as described in Copying Data Between Excel, Word, and PowerPoint .

Sharing Smart Query Definitions

You may share Smart Query definitions with other users. The Smart Query definition includes definitions for rows, columns, POV, dimension sets, filters, sorting, and custom members.

The methods for sharing a Smart Query are:

- Email Sharing

- Workbook Sharing

The following topics explain each method.

Email Sharing

To share a Smart Query definition with other users via email:

1. In Excel, open the Smart Query worksheet containing the definition that you want to copy.

2. From the Smart Query ribbon, select Copy .

3. Open a blank email message and press Ctrl-V .

When pasted into an email message, the query definition will resemble a long line of alphanumeric characters.

4. Send the email message to the users you are sharing with.

5. Recipients of the Smart Query definition then perform the following tasks:

a. In the email, select the Smart Query definition string and copy it to the Windows clipboard (use Ctl+C or the Copy command).

b. Open a blank worksheet in a new or existing workbook.

c. Optional: Connect to the appropriate data source.

If you do not connect to a data source, you will prompted to do so when you paste the definition in step 5.d .

d. From the Smart View ribbon for the active worksheet, click .

The Smart Query populates the worksheet.

Workbook Sharing

To share a Smart Query in a workbook:

1. Save the Excel workbook that contains the Smart Query to share.

2. Send the Excel workbook to the users you are sharing with or place the workbook file in a shared network location and notify those users.

3. Recipients of the workbook containing the Smart Query definition then perform the following tasks:

a. Open the workbook either directly from the email or from the shared network location.

The Smart Query populates the worksheet.

b. In the Smart View ribbon, click Refresh to be prompted for login credentials in the Connect to Data Source dialog box.

Smart Slices

In This Section:

About Smart Slices

Creating Reports with Smart Slices

Smart Slices, Ad Hoc Analysis, and Forms

Creating Smart Slices

About Smart Slices

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

A Smart Slice is a reusable perspective of an Essbase or Financial Management data source. It can be composed of a single member, a combination of single members, filters, or combination of single members and filters in any order. These components serve as boundaries to the data that users can view and work with in the Smart Slice. Any operation that can be done in Smart View can be done within the confines of a Smart Slice.

An organization can have as many different Smart Slices as it needs to accommodate the specific data requirements of its users. For example, Smart Slices can be created for different sales geographical regions, different product lines, different time frames, or a combination of any of these dimensions.

You can view and work with any data within the boundaries of a Smart Slice, but not with data outside its boundaries. For example, in a Smart Slice that limits sales data to the Western region, you could drill down to data for California or Los Angeles, but could not navigate across to New York.

Creating Reports with Smart Slices

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

Smart Slices are stored centrally and are available to users from the Smart View Panel.

An entire report is associated with an Excel workbook, a Word document, or a PowerPoint presentation. One report is associated with an Excel worksheet, a Word page, or a PowerPoint slide. For PowerPoint presentations, Oracle recommends one report type per slide.

You can create reports from entire Smart Slices or from subsets of data in a Smart Slice. Reports can then be displayed on an Excel spreadsheet, Word document, or PowerPoint slide. You can display as many reports from as many data sources as space will permit on one sheet.

To create a report from a Smart Slice:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. From the Smart View Panel, select a Smart Slice.

3. In the Action Panel, do one of the following.

- To work with the Smart Slice as is, click Insert Smart Slice into report . The Smart Slice is displayed in Document Contents in the lower portion of the Smart View Panel.

- To create a subset of the Smart Slice for local storage, click Modify Smart Slice and insert into report and use the Smart Slice Designer as described in Creating Smart Slices .

Note:

If you use Modify Smart Slice to create a Smart Slice, you must select the newly-created Smart Slice from the Smart View Panel tree list before performing ad hoc analysis.

4. Click to refresh the Document Contents tree.

5. Select the Smart Slice in Document Contents , right-click and select Insert New Reporting Object/Control .

6. From the Insert New Reporting Object/Control dialog box, select one of these report types to place on the grid:

- Function Grid — a dynamic grid format

Function grids can be used with Word, PowerPoint, and Excel. When you refresh a function grid, data cells are refreshed; members are not. To refresh both data and members, you must reinsert the function grid into the sheet. For this reason, function grids are most useful for reports in which members remain reasonably static. For reports whose members may change more often, tables and charts are better report types. Although you can have multiple reports on a worksheet, you can have only one function grid.

You can use Excel formulas, for example SUM, with function grids. To retain such formulas as part of the function grid, you must leave one empty row between the grid and the cell containing the formula and include the empty row in the range of cells selected for the formula definition. This permits retention of the formula when refreshing the data results in a different number of rows in the grid.

To format a function grid, use Excel formatting capabilities.

- Office Table

Office tables can be used with Word and PowerPoint. Office tables display results in native Microsoft Office table format. When you refresh an Office table, both members and data are refreshed.

Office tables look and feel like part of the Word or PowerPoint document, but the members and data in the table cells are connected to the Smart View provider. With Office tables, you can work with the Word or PowerPoint table formatting and styles that you are accustomed to. Insert a POV object into the report and you can change the POV of the Office table. Refresh the Office table after changing formatting or POV and the new POV is reflected in the results and custom formatting is retained.

You cannot zoom in or out in an Office table object, and you cannot perform other ad hoc operations or use free form.

- Table

Tables can be used with PowerPoint and Excel. Table reports display results in a grid format that floats on the document and can be moved and re-sized. When you refresh a table, both members and data are refreshed. Tables are useful for displaying large grids in a smaller space; their scroll bars enable you to quickly access rows and columns.

You can zoom in and out in a table report, but you cannot perform other ad hoc operations or use free form.

- Chart

Charts can be used with PowerPoint and Excel. In PowerPoint, contents of charts and tables are visible only in presentation mode. Chart reports display results in a chart format that floats on the document and can be moved and re-sized. When you refresh a chart, both members and data are refreshed.

7. Optional: To move or re-size a table or chart, in Document Contents , click the down arrow next to , and from the menu, select Toggle Design Mode .

You can now move objects within the sheet, slide, or page.

8. To insert a report control, select the Smart Slice in Document Contents , right-click and select Insert New Reporting Object/Control .

9. From the Insert New Reporting Object/Control dialog box, select one of these report control types:

- POV — a report can contain only one POV

- Slider — a report can contain multiple sliders. See Sliders .

A report can contain a POV or sliders, but not both.

10. Refresh.

11. Optional: To create a separate report for any or all of the members of one dimension in the report and cascade these reports separately across the worksheets of the workbook, see Cascading Reports and Ad Hoc Grids .

Note:

In reports that contain a chart and a table, cascading may cause the chart and table to overlap the next time you open the workbook.

Deleting Reports or Report Objects

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

To delete a report:

1. In Document Contents , click

2. Select the object to delete from the link in Document Contents ; for example, select a function grid or POV.

Selecting a report also deletes all its report objects.

3. At the bottom of the Document Contents pane, select More , then select Delete .

Sliders

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

Figure 65, Slider shows a slider. The slider displays a selected set of dimension members from a query; when you drag the slider marker to a member, its data is displayed in all reports associated with the query on the sheet. Sliders can contain dimensions from more than one query in the Report Designer if the dimensions have the same boundaries.

Figure 65. Slider

Related Topics:

- Creating a Slider from One Query

- Creating a Slider from Joined Queries

Creating a Slider from One Query

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

To create a slider:

1. Ensure that one or more report type is inserted in the worksheet for the query for which you want to create the slider.

2. From the report designer, click Query View and select Query View .

3. In the Report Designer, select the query on which to base the slider.

4. Click and select Slider to open Member Selection .

5. Select a dimension, members, and filters for the slider and click OK .

The slider is displayed on the sheet.

6. Optional: To move or re-size the slider, click and then move or re-size.

Creating a Slider from Joined Queries

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

You can create a slider that contains dimensions from multiple queries if, and only if, the dimensions from the different queries have the exact same boundaries.

To create a slider using a dimension from multiple queries:

1. Ensure that one or more report type is inserted in the worksheet for the query for which you want to create the slider.

2. Click Query View and select Dimension View . Notice that the Report Designer tree view is grouped by dimensions rather than by queries. Under each dimension are the queries that contain that dimension. If the dimensions do not contain the same boundaries, multiple sliders will be created to accommodate each of them. For example, if the Market dimension in one query contains a children filter and the Market dimension from another query contains a descendents filter, two Market sliders would be created.

3. In the Report Designer, select the dimension on which to base the query.

4. Click and select Slider to open Member Selection .

5. Select dimension members, and filters for the slider and click OK .

The slider is displayed on the sheet.

6. Optional: To move or re-size the slider, click and then move or re-size.

Smart Slices, Ad Hoc Analysis, and Forms

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

To perform ad hoc analysis on a Smart Slice, in Excel, select the Smart Slice in the Smart View Panel and click Ad Hoc Analysis in the Action Panel. Data and POV from the Smart Slice is entered into the worksheet, and you can perform ad hoc analysis.

Note:

Essbase only: Multiple-grid worksheets are not supported for Smart Slices.

To use a form, select the Smart Slice in the Smart View Panel and click Open Form in the Action Panel. Only forms enabled by the administrator may be used for ad hoc analysis.

If you want to locate the Smart Slice source of the data in an ad hoc grid, click and select Locate Worksheet Connection . The Smart Slice is highlighted in the Smart View Panel.

Creating Smart Slices

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

Administrators and database administrators can create, modify, and delete Smart Slices. In Essbase, if enabled by the administrator, all users can create, modify and delete Smart Slices.

Creating Smart Slices involves Setting Smart Slice Data Boundaries and Setting Smart Slice Preferences .

Setting Smart Slice Data Boundaries

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

To create a Smart Slice:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. Open the Smart View Panel and connect to an Essbase or Financial Management data source.

3. Do one of the following:

- From the Action Panel, click Create New Smart Slice , then select an alias table from the list of alias tables.

- With an ad hoc grid open, from the data source ribbon, select Smart Slice .

The Smart Slice Designer and a New Smart Slice – Design worksheet are displayed. You design the Smart Slice from the Smart Slice Designer; results are displayed on the worksheet.

On the Smart Slice Designer are Rows , Columns , POV , and Attributes sections for row, column, POV, and attribute dimensions.

4. From the Smart Slice Designer, use any of the following operations to create boundaries for the Smart Slice.

- To select members for row or column boundaries, drag members from the POV to Rows or Columns as needed on the Smart Slice Designer. To remove row or column members, drag them to the POV . Changes are reflected immediately on the grid.

- To select members for dimensions under Rows , Columns , or Attributes , section, click the name of the dimension to open the Member Selection dialog box.

- To select members for the POV on the Smart Slice Designer, click the arrow next to the dimension name and select the ellipsis to open the Member Selection dialog box.

5. Click Options and set preferences as described in Setting Smart Slice Preferences .

6. Click Done ; Member Selection is displayed.

7. In Member Selection , select a dimension member to use as the default POV and click OK .

8. In the Smart View Panel, in Enter a new name , enter a name for the Smart Slice.

9. Click OK . The Smart Slice is displayed in the tree view of the Smart View Panel under its data source.

Setting Smart Slice Preferences

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

The preferences that you specify are stored as part of the Smart Slice definition, and they override the global preferences set in the Options dialog box.

To specify Smart Slice preferences:

1. From the Smart Slice Designer, click Options .

2. For each option, enter or select the preference from the drop-down menu.

Users can select the options that are enabled here. See Smart View Options for descriptions of the options.

Note:

Replacement labels for missing data and other preferences specified in the Smart Slice Options dialog box in this step are not applied to function grids based on the Smart Slice (as described in Creating Reports with Smart Slices ). Instead, the options specified by Smart View users in the Options dialog box are applied to function grids.

Smart Forms

In This Section:

About Smart Forms

Creating Smart Forms

Smart Form Example Scenario

Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

About Smart Forms

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

You create and manage Smart Forms in Smart View. Starting with an ad hoc analysis grid, you can customize the grid by adding business calculations to it, in the form of Excel functions and formulas. These calculations dont affect metadata in the rest of the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud application. The business calculations that you create and save in the Smart Form can then be executed in both Smart View and the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud web interface. In Smart View, the formulas are evaluated by Excel; in the web interface, the formulas are evaluated by Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

For example, say youre analyzing Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud data in Smart View. You want to calculate the average profit margin for four products. You can add a row to the grid, with the grid label of " Average Profit Margin. " In the new row, add an Excel function for average profit margin, selecting the profit margin data cells for each of the four products. If the profit margin for each product appears in column D of the grid, then your function may be =AVERAGE(D5:D8) . In Smart Forms, the Excel formulas and functions you add are referred to as business calculations . After you add the business calculation, the average profit margin is instantly displayed in the new row, but the new row will be saved only in the Smart Form, not the rest of the application.

To make this ad hoc grid with its grid labels and calculations available as a form in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, you select the Save As Smart Form option in the Planning ribbon in Smart View. Thereafter, in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud or Smart View, you can open and use this Smart Form as a form, including any rows, columns, and business calculations you added. In Smart View, you can perform ad hoc against this Smart Form. You can even create a sandbox from a Smart Form.

The sections that follow provide descriptions and guidelines for working with Smart Forms.

Smart Forms

Smart Forms are a type of Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud form, created in Smart View and based on ad hoc grids, that have functionality not supported by regular Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud data forms. Smart Forms support grid labels , along with business calculations in the form of Excel formulas and functions. In Smart View, you can save these ad hoc grids to Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud as Smart Forms. The business calculations and grid labels, along with any empty rows and columns, are saved in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud as a part the Smart Form definition. Additionally:

- Beside calculated cells and empty rows and columns functionality, Smart Forms support extended Excel formatting features including cell merging.

- Smart Forms can be used by end users in the same way as regular forms in the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud web interface or in Smart View.

- Smart Form design, as with form design in the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud web interface, is not available for Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud end users. You must have the Admin or Interactive User role to save ad hoc grids as Smart Forms.

As with regular forms, the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud administrator must assign read/write access to Smart Forms for end users.

- In Smart View, you design Smart Forms in Excel worksheets, meaning you can clearly see the Smart Form layout, even an asymmetric layout. In the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud web interface, you would need to create separate rows and columns to achieve this.

- Member functions cannot be stored as part of the Smart Form definition.

- In the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud web interface, while in design mode:

- You can assign business rules to Smart Forms.

- You cannot modify the Smart Form grid layout, Excel formatting, or business calculations.

- Smart Form functionality is available for ad hoc grids created with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud. Check with your service administrator about the availability of Smart Forms in your service.

Business Calculations

In Smart Forms, the Excel functions and formulas that you add to an ad hoc grid are referred to as business calculations . When a grid is saved as a Smart Form, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud users can execute the business calculations from the Smart View client, without adding members to Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud metadata.

Business calculations are executed in Smart View utilizing Excels calculation engine, and do not require queries to Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud . These runtime business calculations are supported in both Smart View and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud. Also note the following:

- Many Excel functions are supported in Smart Forms. If an Excel function is not supported, a message will notify you when you attempt to save the Smart Form.

- You can apply Excel formatting to the business calculation cells so that the figures display according to your preferences; for example, with dollar signs or decimal points.

- In the grid label row or column, you cannot enter only constants for the business calculation cells; for example, 1000 or 0.10 are not supported. If you want to use a constant in a calculated cell, be sure to prefix it with an equal sign (=); for example, =1000 or =0.10 .

Grid Labels

Grid labels are used to provide placeholders in a grid for entering business calculations for corresponding data cell intersections. They are required in order to save an ad hoc grid with business calculations. Additionally:

- You enter grid labels manually in Excel in place of actual members in an ad hoc grid.

- Grid label names cannot match any actual member name in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud or any member alias from any alias table. In case of a match, the actual member name or alias name will take precedence over the grid label name.

- Grid labels cannot consist of only blank spaces.

- Grid labels do not have any dimension properties.

- Grid labels are not visible in the Planning Dimension Editor and they are not sent to Essbase.

- Data cells created by the intersection of actual members with grid labels are referred to as calculated cells .

Creating Smart Forms

In Smart View, you create Smart Forms by saving ad hoc grids that contain grid labels and business calculations. Smart Forms are saved to Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

To create a Smart Form:

1. Follow the steps in Starting Ad Hoc Analysis to create an ad hoc grid.

Alternatively, open an Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud form and, from the Planning ribbon, click Analyze to convert the form to an ad hoc grid.

2. Add grid labels and business calculations (in the form of Excel formulas and functions), to the ad hoc grid.

See Smart Form Example Scenario

3. After you have added grid labels and business calculations to an ad hoc grid, in the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, click .

4. In the Save Grid As Smart Form dialog box:

- In Grid Name , provide a name for the Smart Form.

- In Grid Path , browse to the location where you want to store the Smart Form in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

You can also type a new folder name. The folder appears under the application in the Smart View Panel.

- Optional: Select Submit Formatting to save any custom Excel formatting changes that have been applied to the grid.

See Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning for additional notes and guidelines about saving formatting in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud ad hoc grids and forms.

In the Smart View Panel, Smart Forms are designated with the icon.

Smart Form Example Scenario

Smart Forms start with an ad hoc grid, created either by opening an Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud form for ad hoc analysis or by starting ad hoc analysis at the Plan type level, as shown in Figure 66, Form Opened for Ad Hoc Analysis .

Figure 66. Form Opened for Ad Hoc Analysis

Add a row by typing " entity2 " for the Entity dimension, and the label "accountX" for the Account dimension on row 13, cells A13 and B13, creating on the row two grid labels. Cells C13:F13 will be calculated cells. In order to be used as grid labels, the member names " entity2 " and " accountX " should not exist in any dimension and there should not be any alias with the same name in any alias table. However, note that in the basic ad hoc above, entity2 is a member name, so entity2 will be treated as a member.

Figure 67. Grid Labels Added to cells A13 and B13

Add business calculations, in the form of Excel formulas, for cells C13:F13, created by the intersection of real column dimension members with the grid label’s row 13. Figure 68, Business Calculations Added to Cells C13 and D13, through to Cell F13 shows that the calculation was entered and executed in cell C13, and the same calculation is copied to cell D13.

Figure 68. Business Calculations Added to Cells C13 and D13, through to Cell F13

Figure 69, Business Calculation in the Excel Formula Bar shows the business calculation in the Excel formula bar.

Figure 69. Business Calculation in the Excel Formula Bar

Upon refresh, entity2 in cell A13 will take on the properties of a member, accountX in cell B13 will take on the properties of a grid label, and cells C13 and D13 will take on the properties of business calculation cells.

Notes

- You must enter grid labels in order to save an ad hoc grid with business calculations in the form of Excel formulas and functions.

- If an empty space is entered instead of a grid label, the grid behavior is determined by generic ad hoc rules, such as replacing empty member cell with the same member from this dimension or displaying an error in case the grid becomes malformed.

- You can enter grid labels at any dimension location for an axis: innermost, outermost, or any location in the middle.

- You can enter business calculations only on rows and columns created by grid labels.

- You may type a member name in a grid label row, but it must be placed within the correct dimension. If the member name is entered out of place, and is already in use by Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud in another dimension, a message is returned upon Refresh, prompting you to change the label name.

Now you can save the ad hoc grid as a Smart Form, as described in step 4 in Creating Smart Forms . By doing this, our grid labels and business calculations are also saved to Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

Planning will identify "accountX" as a grid label on refresh by displaying it as an ad hoc "comment" row or column (blank cells background). The " entity2 " label will take on the same properties as the other entity2 members in the grid, as this member name already exists in the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud database.

Other Examples

Using the Vision sample application, here is an example of a Smart Form, saved from an ad hoc grid, then later opened as a form in Smart View.

In Figure 70, Originally an Ad Hoc Grid, Saved as a Smart Form, then Opened as a Form in Smart View , the business calculation was constructed to show the average gross quarterly profit and average gross total profit for two years, FY13 and FY14. It also shows cell styles applied to the grid label and business calculations cells.

Figure 70. Originally an Ad Hoc Grid, Saved as a Smart Form, then Opened as a Form in Smart View

Figure 71, Smart Form Opened as an Ad Hoc Grid in Smart View shows a Smart Form opened as an ad hoc grid. The grid labels and business calculations were added in the middle of the grid, and cell styles were applied.

Figure 71. Smart Form Opened as an Ad Hoc Grid in Smart View

Figure 72, Smart Form Opened as a Form in Smart View is the same ad hoc grid, that was saved as a Smart Form and opened as a form:

Figure 72. Smart Form Opened as a Form in Smart View

Figure 73, Smart Form with Member Name Typed on Grid Label Row shows two grid labels and a business calculation cell formula, along with a member name typed into the grid label row. In the form, the hand-typed member name displays a member.

Figure 73. Smart Form with Member Name Typed on Grid Label Row

In Figure 74, Grid Label Between Members , a new column contains grid labels in cells F1 and F2. Column G contains a repeated, hand-typed member name in cell G1, and a grid label in cell G2 between the member and business calculation in cell G3.

Figure 74. Grid Label Between Members

Figure 75, Member Between and Below Grid Labels shows how grid labels can surround a valid member.

Figure 75. Member Between and Below Grid Labels

Figure 76, Out of Place Member in Grid Label Row shows how a member cannot be out of place between, or surrounded by, grid labels. A message notifies you that the member is out of place.

Figure 76. Out of Place Member in Grid Label Row

Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms

Subtopics

- Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms in Alphabetic Order

- Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms by Category

Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms in Alphabetic Order

Table 8. Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms in Alphabetic Order

Function

Category

ABS

Math and trigonometry

ACCRINT

Financial

ACCRINTM

Financial

ACOS

Math and trigonometry

ACOSH

Math and trigonometry

AMORDEGRC

Financial

AMORLINC

Financial

AND

Logical

ASIN

Math and trigonometry

ASINH

Math and trigonometry

ATAN

Math and trigonometry

ATAN2

Math and trigonometry

ATANH

Math and trigonometry

AVERAGE

Statistical

AVERAGEA

Statistical

CEILING

Math and trigonometry

COMBIN

Math and trigonometry

COS

Math and trigonometry

COSH

Math and trigonometry

COUNT

Statistical

COUNTA

Statistical

COUPDAYBS

Financial

COUPDAYS

Financial

COUPDAYSNC

Financial

COUPNCD

Financial

COUPNUM

Financial

COUPPCD

Financial

CUMIPMT

Financial

CUMPRINC

Financial

DATE

Date and time

DAY

Date and time

DAYS360

Date and time

DB

Financial

DDB

Financial

DEGREES

Math and trigonometry

DISC

Financial

DOLLARDE

Financial

DOLLARFR

Financial

DURATION

Financial

EDATE

Date and time

EFFECT

Financial

EOMONTH

Date and time

EVEN

Math and trigonometry

EXP

Math and trigonometry

FACT

Math and trigonometry

FACTDOUBLE

Math and trigonometry

FLOOR

Math and trigonometry

FV

Financial

FVSCHEDULE

Financial

GCD

Math and trigonometry

HOUR

Date and time

IF

Logical

IFERROR

- TRUE

- FALSE

Logical

- Logical

- Logical

INT

Math and trigonometry

INTRATE

Financial

IPMT

Financial

IRR

Financial

ISERR

Information

ISERROR

Information

ISPMT

Financial

LCM

Math and trigonometry

LEFT

Text

LN

Math and trigonometry

LOG

Math and trigonometry

LOG10

Math and trigonometry

MAX

Statistical

MDURATION

Financial

MID

Text

MIN

Statistical

MINUTE

Date and time

MIRR

Financial

MOD

Math and trigonometry

MONTH

Date and time

MROUND

Math and trigonometry

MULTINOMIAL

Math and trigonometry

NETWORKDAYS

Date and time

NOMINAL

Financial

NOT

Logical

NOW

Date and time

NPER

Financial

NPV

Financial

ODD

Math and trigonometry

OR

Logical

PI

Math and trigonometry

PMT

Financial

POWER

Math and trigonometry

PPMT

Financial

PRICE

Financial

PRICEDISC

Financial

PRICEMAT

Financial

PRODUCT

Math and trigonometry

PV

Financial

QUOTIENT

Math and trigonometry

RADIANS

Math and trigonometry

RAND

Math and trigonometry

RANDBETWEEN

Math and trigonometry

RATE

Financial

RECEIVED

Financial

RIGHT

Text

ROUND

Math and trigonometry

ROUNDDOWN

Math and trigonometry

ROUNDUP

Math and trigonometry

SECOND

Date and time

SIGN

Math and trigonometry

SIN

Math and trigonometry

SINH

Math and trigonometry

SLN

Financial

SQRT

Math and trigonometry

SQRTPI

Math and trigonometry

SUM

Math and trigonometry

SUMSQ

Math and trigonometry

SYD

Financial

TAN

Math and trigonometry

TANH

Math and trigonometry

TBILLEQ

Financial

TBILLPRICE

Financial

TBILLYIELD

Financial

TIME

Date and time

TODAY

Date and time

TRUNC

Math and trigonometry

WEEKDAY

Date and time

WEEKNUM

Date and time

WORKDAY

Date and time

XIRR

Financial

XNPV

Financial

YEAR

Date and time

YEARFRAC

Date and time

YIELD

Financial

YIELDDISC

Financial

YIELDMAT

Financial

Excel Functions Supported in Smart Forms by Category

Financial Functions

ACCRINT

ACCRINTM

AMORDEGRC

AMORLINC

COUPDAYBS

COUPDAYS

COUPDAYSNC

COUPNCD

COUPNUM

COUPPCD

CUMIPMT

CUMPRINC

DB

DDB

DISC

DOLLARDE

DOLLARFR

DURATION

EFFECT

FV

FVSCHEDULE

INTRATE

IPMT

IRR

ISPMT

MDURATION

MIRR

NOMINAL

NPER

NPV

PMT

PPMT

PRICE

PRICEDISC

PRICEMAT

PV

RATE

RECEIVED

SLN

SYD

TBILLEQ

TBILLPRICE

TBILLYIELD

XIRR

XNPV

YIELD

YIELDDISC

YIELDMAT

Information Functions

ISERR

ISERROR

Logical Functions

AND

IF

NOT

OR

IFERROR

- TRUE

- FALSE

Math and Trigonometry Functions

ABS

ACOS

ACOSH

ASIN

ASINH

ATAN

ATAN2

ATANH

CEILING

COMBIN

COS

COSH

DEGREES

EVEN

EXP

FACT

FACTDOUBLE

FLOOR

GCD

INT

LCM

LN

LOG

LOG10

MOD

MROUND

MULTINOMIAL

ODD

PI

POWER

PRODUCT

QUOTIENT

RADIANS

RAND

RANDBETWEEN

ROUNDDOWN

ROUND

ROUNDUP

SIGN

SIN

SINH

SQRT

SQRTPI

SUM

TAN

TANH

TRUNC

Statistical Functions

AVERAG

AVERAGEA

COUNT

COUNTA

MAX

MIN

Text Functions

LEFT

RIGHT

MID

Date and Time Functions

DATE

DAY

DAYS360

EDATE

EOMONTH

HOUR

MINUTE

MONTH

NETWORKDAYS

NOW

SECOND

TIME

TODAY

WEEKDAY

WEEKNUM

WORKDAY

YEAR

YEARFRAC

The Query Designer and MDX Queries

In This Section:

The Query Designer

Creating Queries

Editing Queries and Rerunning Reports

Filtering Data

Analyzing Time-Related Data in Query Designer

MDX Queries

The Query Designer

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

The Query Designer is a Smart View tool from which you can design the layout of a report by selecting dimensions, members, and attributes for rows, columns, and the POV from one interface. You can use the Query Designer to create a query from a blank connected worksheet, which uses the default report as a starting point, or extract a query from a saved report. The Query designer is available only for ad hoc worksheets.

Related Topics:

Creating Queries

Editing Queries and Rerunning Reports

Filtering Data

Analyzing Time-Related Data in Query Designer

MDX Queries

Creating Queries

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

To create a query report:

1. Open a worksheet or an existing report in Excel and connect to a data source.

Note:

Workbooks can contain Query Designer worksheets from multiple data sources. However, only one data source can be associated with each worksheet.

2. From the data source ribbon, select Query , then Query Designer .

The Query Designer and a query worksheet named " Sheetname - Query" (for example, Sheet1 – Query) are displayed. You design your query on this worksheet.

The following operations are disabled on the query sheet, but are re-enabled after you run the report:

- Formulas

- Asymmetric reports

- Comments

- Blank rows or columns

- Changes to alias tables

- Ad hoc actions such as zoom in and out, keep and remove only, and double-click

The following operations are unavailable in both query sheet and report sheet:

- Filtering of column members

- Changing data sources

If you are working with a duplicate member database, qualified member names are displayed on the query sheet, but only the member names are displayed after you run the report.

3. Use any of the following operations to design your query:

- To select members for the Rows and Columns dimensions displayed on the Query Designer, click the dimension name to open the Member Selection dialog box.

- To select members for POV dimensions displayed on the Query Designer, click the arrow next to the dimension name and select the ellipsis to open the Member Selection dialog box.

- To move a dimension from the POV to the grid, drag and drop it from the POV section to the Columns or Rows section in the Query Designer.

- To remove a dimension from the grid, drag and drop the dimension from the Columns or Rows section to the POV section in the Query Designer.

- To add or remove an attribute dimension, select a dimension from the Attributes drop-down menu and drag and drop to the Rows or Columns section of the Query Designer.

- Enter members directly into the grid.

Member Name Limitation

In Query Designer, when working with databases that support duplicate member names, you should avoid using member names containing periods. Smart View detects periods (.) as delimiters in Query Designer, resulting in an unknown member error. If the dimension or member names in your query contain a period, the member will be interpreted as two members, parent and child. For example, the member:

abcd.wxyz

would be interpreted as:

abcd
wxyz

4. From the Query Designer, click Apply Query . The resulting report is displayed in a new report sheet called " Sheetname - Report" (for example, Sheet1 – Report). Operations temporarily disabled in step 2 are re-enabled.

The report sheet replaces the query sheet, but you can retrieve the query sheet by repeating step 2 .

5. To save the report, save as an Excel .xls or .xlsx file, which in Essbase or Hyperion Enterprise can be used as a data load data source.

Note:

The Query Designer is not designed to work with Smart Slices.

Editing Queries and Rerunning Reports

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

Rerunning queries regenerates the report; any changes to the original report, such as zooming, comments, and formulas are lost. Formatting is also lost.

You can refresh reports, but this only refreshes the data. It does not rerun the report.

To edit a query and rerun a report:

1. Open the Query Designer query sheet to edit. If the query sheet is hidden, from the data source ribbon, select Query and then Query Designer .

2. Edit the query.

3. Select Query then Run the Report .

The report is updated.

Filtering Data

Data source types: Essbase

Filtering data limits the amount of data returned to a specified top or bottom criterion. Top or bottom ranking enables you to view, for example, the top 10 products in sales for a given region.

To filter data:

1. In the Query Designer report worksheet, select a dimension.

2. From the Essbase ribbon, select Query and then Data Filter .

3. From Data Filter , under Count , select Top or Bottom and specify a number.

4. Under Set , click .

5. From Member Selection , select a row member for ranking, and click OK to return to Data Filter .

6. Under Value , click

7. From Member Selection , select a column member to run the ranking against, and click OK to return to the Data Filter dialog box.

8. Click OK .

An MDX query in the form TopCount( { [Qtr3] }, 10, [Measures].[Profit]), that represents your data filtering settings is inserted into the grid. The example returns the top 10 most profitable products in quarter 3.

9. Click Apply Query to display query results.

Analyzing Time-Related Data in Query Designer

Data source types: Essbase

Using Smart View, you can analyze flash metrics such as sales of cost of goods sold against time-based metrics. This enables you to look for trends, find averages for different time periods, and so forth. To do this, you use linked attributes which enable periodicity of members. Periodicity is a shared pattern among time dimension members that make them meaningful for time-based analysis (January and April share periodicity as first months of quarters, for example). Day by month, day by week, and week by year are examples of linked attributes. You can also set ranges for linked attributes and apply filters.

To analyze time-related data in Query Designer:

1. Create a query.

2. From the Query Designer toolbar, select Date-Time dimension and drag it to the grid or within the toolbar.

3. Click Date-Time in the Query Designer toolbar to open Member Selection , where you can select members and apply Period, Range, and other filters.

4. Under Attributes on the Query Designer toolbar, select an attribute or linked attribute in the drop-down menu, then drag it to the grid or within the toolbar. Repeat as necessary for other attributes.

5. To select members and apply filters to an attribute, click the attribute name on the Query Designer toolbar to open Member Selection .

6. Click on the POV toolbar.

MDX Queries

Data source types: Essbase

MDX users can bypass the Query Designer interface and enter MDX commands in the query sheet or in the Execute MDX dialog box.

To execute MDX queries:

1. In Excel, connect to an Essbase data source.

2. From the Essbase ribbon, select Query , then Execute MDX .

3. In Execute Free Form MDX Query , enter the MDX query.

For example:

SELECT {[Sales], [Cogs]} on columns, Filter ([Product].Levels( 2 ).Members, AVG([Year].CHILDREN, 9001.0) > 9000.00) on rows

4. Click Execute .

Task Lists

In This Section:

Task Lists

Working with Tasks from the Smart View Panel

Integrating Task Lists with Microsoft Outlook

Task Lists

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Financial Close Management

Depending on your data source, you can open and manage tasks from the Smart View Panel in Excel or Outlook or integrate task lists from the data source into Outlook and use Outlook functionality to manage your tasks.

- In Planning and Financial Management, you can manage tasks from the Smart View Panel in both Excel and Outlook, and integrate task lists into Outlook as described in Working with Tasks from the Smart View Panel .

- In Financial Close Management, you can integrate task lists into Outlook as described in Integrating Task Lists with Microsoft Outlook .

Working with Tasks from the Smart View Panel

Opening a Task List

Viewing the Task List

Executing a Task

Completing a Task

Creating Task List Reports

Opening a Task List

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

To open a task list from Excel:

1. From the Smart View ribbon or menu, click Panel .

2. If prompted, enter your user name and password.

3. From the Smart View Panel, do one of the following:

- From Recently Used on Smart View Home, click the name of a task list.

- From Shared Connections or Private Connections, navigate to the task list that you want to open, and then click Open Task List on the Action Panel.

To open a task list from Outlook:

1. Ensure that Outlook displays a Smart View menu. If it does not, do the following:

a. Close Outlook.

b. In Excel, from the Smart View ribbon, click Options , then Advanced in the left panel.

c. Clear Disable Smart View add-in in Outlook .

d. Click OK .

e. Reopen Outlook.

2. Ensure that you are connected to a data source as described in Managing Data Source Connections.

3. From the Outlook toolbar, click Smart View , and then select Panel to display the Smart View Panel.

4. From the Smart View Panel, do one of the following:

- From Recently Used on Smart View Home, click the name of a task list.

- From Shared Connections or Private Connections, navigate to the task list that you want to open, and then click Open Task List on the Action Panel.

Viewing the Task List

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

A task list opened in the Task List pane of the Smart View Panel displays the following:

- The individual tasks in the task list. These may contain subordinate tasks. The status of the task – complete, incomplete, or overdue – is indicated by color-coding.

- A drop-down menu from which you can select any of the other task lists associated with the current application

- The Action Panel, which displays the actions that are available for the selected task

- Task Details, which opens when you click the double arrows

- A color-coded status bar for the task list

Executing a Task

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

To execute a task:

1. Open the task list that contains the task to execute.

2. From the Action Panel, click Execute Task .

3. Task execution varies with the task and data source.

Completing a Task

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

After completing task requirements, mark the task complete. To complete a task:

1. Complete the requirements of the task.

2. Open the task list that contains the task to complete.

3. Ensure that any dependent tasks are completed.

4. Select the task to mark complete.

5. From the Action Panel, click Mark Complete .

Creating Task List Reports

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

To review the status of your process, you can create a detailed report of one or more task lists in an application in PDF or Excel worksheet format.

To create a task list report:

1. From the Smart View Panel, open a task list.

2. Right-click a task and select Create Report .

3. In Report Wizard, use the arrow keys to move all task lists to be included in the report from Available Task Lists to Selected Task Lists .

4. Click Next .

5. Use the arrow keys to move the users whose status you want to view from Available Users to Selected Users .

6. Click Next .

7. Select options to create your report.

8. Click Finish .

The report is created in PDF or Excel, depending on your selection in step 7 .

Integrating Task Lists with Microsoft Outlook

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management

You can import task lists into Microsoft Outlook and use Outlook functionality to manage your tasks. Changes to the status of tasks are sent back to the data source, but you cannot delete tasks in Outlook.

To import task lists into Microsoft Outlook:

1. Ensure that Outlook displays a Smart View menu. If it does not:

a. Close Outlook.

b. In Excel, from the Smart View ribbon, click Options , and then Advanced in the left panel.

c. Clear Disable Smart View add-in in Outlook .

d. Click OK .

2. Open Outlook.

3. Click Smart View and select Task List .

4. Select Shared Connections or Private Connections .

5. From the Task List, click Select application .

6. In Select Application, from the drop-down menus, select the server and application associated with the task lists to import.

7. Click OK .

All task lists associated with the selected application are displayed in Task List.

8. Double-click a task list to display its individual tasks in Outlook Task Lists.

From here, you can apply Outlook functionality to your tasks. See the Outlook product documentation for information on working with tasks in Outlook.

Oracle Journals for Financial Management

In This Section:

About Oracle Journals for Financial Management

Installing the Oracle Journals Extension

Journal Roles

Processing Journals in Smart View

Creating Journals

Opening Journals

Scanning Journals

Viewing Journal Status

Modifying List Display in Manage Journals Window

Editing Journals

Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail

Copying and Pasting Journal Cells

Submitting Journals

Unsubmitting Journals

Approving Journals

Rejecting Journals

Posting Journals

Unposting Journals

Journal Validation

Analyzing Journals

Deleting Journals

Entity Detail Reports

About Oracle Journals for Financial Management

Data source types: Financial Management

During a financial period, you may need to adjust data after it is entered or loaded into base-level entities. Oracle Journals for Financial Management provide an audit trail of changes made in the application and indicate which users made adjustments and which accounts, entities, and time periods are affected.

With Oracle Journals, you can:

- Create double-sided journal entries by using debits and credits

- Balance entries, or permit single-sided, out-of-balance entries

- Create recurring journals that are repeated for a number of future periods

- Create auto-reversing journals that generate reversing entries in the next time period

- Use the journal approval process to provide accountability

After creating a journal, you submit it to your supervisor for approval before posting it to the database.

In Smart View, Oracle Journals for Financial Management is an extension that supports a subset of the Journals functionality found in the Financial Management web interface. Before you can use Oracle Journals, you must install and enable the extension. After connecting to a Financial Management data source, right-click a Financial Management application to view two journal commands in the Action Panel:

- Manage Journals —Launches the Manage Journals dialog box. When you select a journal to work with, the Oracle Journals ribbon is displayed.

- Create Journal —Launches the Create Journal dialog box.

When you select a journal to work with or create a journal, the Oracle Journals ribbon is displayed. Ribbon actions are available to you on a context basis; for example, if the journal is available for editing, the Edit button is enabled.

With the Oracle Journals for Financial Management extension in Smart View, you can perform these journal tasks:

- Open a journal and view its properties, such as Status, Type, Balance Type, Group, and Class

- Create a new blank journal or create a journal using a standard or recurring template

- Create a journal from data grids or data forms opened in Excel using the right-click option in the grid or form, or the Create Journal command in the ribbon

- Create an ad hoc query from within a journal.

- Edit and save journals

- Submit, Unsubmit, Approve, Reject, Post, Unpost, and Delete journals

- Open an Entity Detail Report from data grids or data forms, and from an Entity Detail report, click on a journal to drill down for further details

Additionally, in Smart View, you can analyze posted journals to see the adjustments and totals in an ad hoc grid. You can analyze selected rows, or analyze the entire journal.

Get started by installing the Oracle Journals for Financial Management extension, following the instructions in Installing the Oracle Journals Extension .

Note:

The Oracle Journals for Financial Management extension works with Smart View version 11.1.2.5.500 and later, and with Financial Management 11.1.2.4.100 and later.

Installing the Oracle Journals Extension

For Smart View End Users

There is more than one method for installing the Oracle Journals extension; your Smart View administrator will inform you which method you should use.

If you are installing the extension directly from your own Smart View installation folder, see Installing from the Smart View Installation Folder .

If you are installing the extension automatically or optionally, see Installing Extensions .

For Smart View Administrators

Your users can install the Oracle Journals extension directly from the extensions folder of their Smart View installation.

Or, you can control how your Smart View end users install the Oracle Journals extension via the Extensions page of the Smart View Options dialog box. See " Administering Extension Installations and Updates " in the Oracle Smart View for Office Installation and Configuration Guide for more information on setting up automatic or manual installations.

If you choose to set up automatic or manual installations, you should install Smart View in a test environment first, then refer to the UpdateList.xml file, found in the extensions folder of your Smart View installation. Use the entry in this file as a guideline for the Oracle Journals entry you will add to the UpdateList.xml file, as described in " Configuring Manual Extension Updates " in the Oracle Smart View for Office Installation and Configuration Guide .

Installing from the Smart View Installation Folder

Before you install the Oracle Journals extension, you must install Smart View.

You do not have to close Office (Excel, Word, or PowerPoint) to install the Oracle Journals extension using this method.

To install the Oracle Journals for Financial Management directly from your Smart View installation:

1. Navigate to the folder where you installed Smart View and open the extensions folder.

For example, navigate to:

C:\Oracle\SmartView\extensions

2. Double-click SVFMJournalInstaller.svext .

3. If an Office product is running, follow the prompts to restart Office; for example, if Excel is open, restart Excel.

If no Office products were open, then start Excel.

Journal Roles

The journal tasks that you can perform depend on the role assigned to you by the administrator. If a journal task is not available to you, it is disabled.

To open a journal, you must have Read access to one or more of the cells referenced in the line items. If you do not have Read access to the cells, journal reports display NOACCESS status for these cells.

To edit a journal, you must have All access to the class for the journal. To post a journal, you must have All access to the classes of every dimension in the detail lines that use classes.

These default roles pertain to journals:

- Journals Administrator (unrestricted journals access)

- Manage Templates

- Create Journals

- Create Unbalanced Journals

- Generate Recurring

- Read Journals

- Approve Journals

- Post Journals

Processing Journals in Smart View

After you set up journals, you can enter journal information and process journals. See these procedures:

- Creating Journals

- Editing Journal Properties

- Guidelines for Creating Journals from Ad Hoc Grids or Data Forms

- Opening Journals

- Scanning Journals

- Viewing Journal Status

- Modifying List Display in Manage Journals Window

- Editing Journals

- Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail

- Copying and Pasting Journal Cells

- Submitting Journals

- Unsubmitting Journals

- Approving Journals

- Rejecting Journals

- Posting Journals

- Unposting Journals

- Deleting Journals

Creating Journals

You use journals to enter adjustments to account balances and maintain an audit trail of changes to your data. You create journals by entering a journal label and description, balance type, point of view, and adjustment amounts. You can also enter a class for the journals, and a journal group that you can use to filter and sort journals. After you create a journal, its status is Working.

You can drag the Entity, ICP, and all Custom dimensions between the journal grid and the POV. If all dimensions in the journal detail lines are the same, the dimension is moved to the POV header information. If they are not the same, they remain in the journal details. The Account dimension remains on the detail line, and all other dimensions remain in the header. If you are creating a journal for a single entity, you can use the entity dimension from the POV header without dragging it to the journal rows.

When you enter journal data, you can scan the journal and verify that the entries are valid. You can then make any necessary changes before posting the journal. See Scanning Journals .

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To create a journal:

1. Perform an action:

- In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Create Journal .

Alternatively, in the Smart View Panel, select a Financial Management application , and then select Create Journal from the Action Panel, shown in Figure 77, Create Journal Command in the Smart View Action Panel .

Figure 77. Create Journal Command in the Smart View Action Panel

The Create Journal dialog box is displayed:

Figure 78. Create Journal Dialog Box

- From an ad hoc grid or form, select a cell or range of cells on which to base the journal, and in the HFM Ad Hoc ribbon or HFM ribbon, click Create Journal , .

Alternatively, right-click a cell or cell range on which to base the journal and select Smart View , then Journals , and then Create Journal .

Note:

See Guidelines for Creating Journals from Ad Hoc Grids or Data Forms for additional information on creating journals using this method.

The journal is created and you can now proceed directly to Editing Journal Properties .

Note:

Do not click Refresh or Save if you want to make further changes to the POV. Once you click Refresh or Save , the POV is locked for this journal.

2. In Create Journal , to change the Point of View, click the arrow in the text box next to a dimension name and select a member.

The dimensions that display in the POV across the top of the Create Journal dialog box ( Figure 78, Create Journal Dialog Box ) are always the Scenario, Year, Period and Value dimensions.

When creating a journal, ensure that the values in Scenario, Year, Period, and Value are the ones to which you want to enter adjustments.

3. From Template , select an option:

- To create a new blank journal, select Blank Journal .

Note that when you select Blank Journal , the options in the Filters area are not available.

Proceed to step 5 .

- To use a standard journal template, select Standard Templates , then select a template from the list.

Standard templates contain accounts and entities for adjustments that you enter frequently.

Optional: To filter the list of standard templates, go to step 4 . Otherwise, proceed to step 5 .

- To use a recurring journal template, select Recurring Templates , then select a template from the list.

You can use a recurring template to create journals automatically. When you generate a journal from a recurring template, you receive a confirmation message that the journal has been generated. The status of the journal is Approved.

Optional: To filter the list of recurring templates, go to step 4 . Otherwise, proceed to step 5 .

Note:

The journal template type you select determines the Type property for the journal you are creating and is a one-time selection. Once a journal is created, you can view the Type property for the journal, but it cannot be edited.

4. Optional: To filter the standard or recurring templates list, set filters for one or more of the following criteria, and then click Apply Filters , :

- Entity —Click the Search button, and, in the Member Selection dialog box, select the members to filter on.

Or, type the member names, in their qualified format, directly into the text box, separated by a semicolon (;). For example, for EastSales , type EastRegion.EastSales .

- Group —Enter journal group names, separated by a semicolon (;). The percent sign ( % ) may be used as a wildcard character. The journal group that you assign must exist in the application.

- Label —Enter a journal label. The label can contain a maximum of 20 characters. The percent sign ( % ) may be used as a wildcard character. These characters are not allowed: . + - */ # {} ; , @ "

- Description —Enter a description. The percent sign ( % ) may be used as a wildcard character.

- Balance Types —Select a type: All , Balanced , Unbalanced , or Balanced by Entity . Selecting All automatically selects all balance types.

To clear filters and view the entire template list, click Reset Filters , .

5. Click Create Journal .

The journal is displayed, but the basic properties of the journal are yet to be defined. Continue with the procedure in Editing Journal Properties .

An example journal is shown in Figure 79, Journal Example, Balanced Using Standard Template , using a standard, balanced template, The POV for this journal is Scenario=Actual, Year=2008, Period=January, and Value=<Entity Curr Adjs>.

Figure 79. Journal Example, Balanced Using Standard Template

Additionally, the Oracle Journals ribbon is displayed, where you can access the Edit button to edit properties of the journal you created in this procedure.

6. Continue to Editing Journal Properties .

Editing Journal Properties

Use this procedure to define the properties of new journals and edit properties of existing journals.

To edit a journal:

1. Perform an action:

- To edit the properties of the journal you just created, as described in Creating Journals (assumes the journal is still open), click Edit in the Oracle Journals ribbon.

- To edit an existing journal, open the journal (see Opening Journals ), and then click Edit in the Oracle Journals ribbon.

The Journal Properties dialog box is displayed ( Figure 80, Journal Properties Dialog Box—Example ).

Figure 80. Journal Properties Dialog Box—Example

2. Edit the journal properties:

- Label —Enter a journal label.

The label can contain a maximum of 20 characters. These characters are not allowed:

. + -  */ # {} ; , @ "

The ampersand character ( & ) is allowed, but will not display properly in Manage Journals . For example, if a single ampersand in used in a journal name, then no ampersand is displayed in the name in Manage Journals ; if two consecutive ampersands are used, then a single ampersand is displayed in the name in Manage Journals . Once the journal is opened in Smart View, the name displays correctly. The name also displays correctly in the Financial Management web interface.

- Description —Enter an optional journal description.

- Balance Type —Select a type:

- Balanced

- Unbalanced

- Balanced by Entity

- Type —Non-editable. Type is the journal type, which was set when you created the journal (see Creating Journals ). Once the journal type is set during the journal creation process, it cannot be changed.

- Group —Select a group for the journal.

Use the Group property to help to classify journals by type. Examples of journal groups are Allocation or Overhead.

- Class —Select a class or use the Default class.

3. Status —Non editable. The Status field changes when you perform an action in the Deployment group. Status types are:

- Working

- Submitted

- Approved

- Rejected

- Posted

4. When you have finished updating the journal properties, click OK .

5. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click the Save button to save the changes to the journal properties.

Guidelines for Creating Journals from Ad Hoc Grids or Data Forms

Refer to this section when creating journals from ad hoc grids or forms, as described in step 1 of Creating Journals . When you are finished reviewing this topic, you can continue with the steps in Editing Journal Properties .

You may start the journal creation process by selecting one or more cells in an ad hoc grid or data form. Note that:

- The journal will be displayed with the selected members in the cell intersections as the line items.

- The selected cells should have valid members in the Value dimension.

- Before saving the journal, make any necessary changes to the POV in the POV toolbar. Once you save or refresh the journal, you can no longer make any changes to the POV.

Working with Value Members

- If you select one or more value members from <Entity Currency>, <Entity Curr Adjs>, or <Entity Curr Total>, the new journal will use <Entity Curr Adjs> as the Value member.

- If the selection has one or more members from <Parent Currency>, <Parent Curr Adjs>, or <Parent Curr Total>, the new journal will use Parent Curr Adjs> as the Value member.

- If you select one or more members [Parent], [Parent Adjs] or [Parent Total], the new journal will use [Parent Adjs] as the Value member.

- [Contribution Adjs], will be used if the selection has one or more of the following members: [Proportion], [Elimination], [Contribution], [Contribution Adjs], [Contribution Total].

- If the selected members contain <Currency>, <Currency>_Adjs, or <Currency>_Total, and the selection has only one Entity member, the following checks are performed:

- If the Entity default currency is the selected Currency, <Entity Curr Adjs> is used as the Value member.

- If the default currency is not the selected Currency, and the Entity has a single parent, and if the parents currency is the selected Currency, use <Parent Curr Adjs> as the Value member.

- If neither of the above conditions are met, an <Entity Currency> and <Parent Curr Adjs> will be available for the selection.

- If the selection does not contain any of the valid members noted above, an error message is displayed.

- If the selection contains members from different valid groups—for example, <Entity Curr Adjs> and <Parent Curr Adjs>—you will be given selection options.

Scenario, Period, and Year Members

If the selection contains multiple Scenario, Period, or Year members, you will have the option to select one of these. Otherwise, the selected value will be used as the POV.

Opening Journals

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To open a journal

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

Alternatively, in the Smart View Panel, select a Financial Management application , and then select Manage Journals from the Action Panel, shown in Figure 81, Manage Journal Command in the Smart View Action Panel .

Figure 81. Manage Journal Command in the Smart View Action Panel

The Manage Journals window is displayed:

Figure 82. Manage Journals Dialog Box

2. Optional: To filter the list of journals, set filters for one or more of the following criteria, and then click Apply Filters,

- Entity —Click the Search button, and, in the Member Selection dialog box, select the members to filter on.

Or, type the member names, in their qualified format, directly into the text box, separated by a semicolon (;). For example, for EastSales , type EastRegion.EastSales .

- Group —Enter journal group names, separated by a semicolon (;). The percent sign ( % ) may be used as a wildcard character. The journal group that you assign must exist in the application.

- Label —Enter a journal label. The percent sign ( % ) may be used as a wildcard character. The label can contain a maximum of 20 characters. These characters are not allowed: . + - */ # {} ; , @ "

- Description —Enter a description. The percent sign ( % ) may be used as a wildcard character.

- Journal Types —Select a type: All , Auto-reversing , Regular , or Auto-reversal .

Note:

An auto reversal journal is a system generated journal. When you create an auto reversing journal, then, the next month, a system-generated journal is created with the journal type, " Auto reversal. " A newly-created journal will not be of the Auto-reversal type.

- Balance Types —Select a type: All , Balanced , Unbalanced , or Balanced by Entity . Selecting All automatically selects all balance types.

- Status —Select a status: All , Working , Submitted , Approved , Rejected , or Posted .

To clear filters and view the entire list of journals, click Reset Filters , .

3. Select a journal in the list and click Edit , .

Alternatively, double-click a journal in the list to open it.

From here, you can proceed to other journal tasks, such as Scanning Journals or Editing Journals .

Scanning Journals

After you enter journal data, you can scan the journal to verify that all entries are valid. The scan process enables you to identify errors and make any necessary changes before you post the journal.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To scan journals:

1. Create or open a journal.

See Creating Journals or Opening Journals .

2. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click Scan , .

If the journal contains errors, a message window is displayed noting the error. If all of the entries are valid, no message is displayed.

3. Optional: To scan another journal, repeat step 1 and step 2 .

4. When finished, click Close .

Viewing Journal Status

The journal status indicates the current state of the journal. The status of a journal changes when you create, submit, approve, reject, or post the journal.

To view journal status:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

Alternatively, in the Smart View Panel, select a Financial Management application , and then select Manage Journals from the Action Panel, shown in Figure 77, Create Journal Command in the Smart View Action Panel .

2. In the Manage Journals dialog box, view the Status column for the journal.

Status

Description

Working

Journal is created. It has been saved, but it can be incomplete. For example, it might need to have a label or single entity assigned.

Submitted

Journal is submitted for approval.

Approved

Journal is approved for posting.

Rejected

Journal is rejected or unposted.

Posted

Journal adjustments are posted to the database.

3. When finished, click Close .

Modifying List Display in Manage Journals Window

In the Manage Journals dialog box, the journals list displays the label, status, entity, short description, and group of all of the journals in the system. You can sort the list of journals. You can select which columns to display, and sort the list alphabetically in ascending or descending order by any single displayed column. If the Entity or Parent column is selected for display, and if any journals have multiple values in the Entity or Parent column, then for each individual value, a separate journal row is displayed.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To select journal columns to display on the list:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

Alternatively, in the Smart View Panel, select a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals from the Action Panel, shown in Figure 77, Create Journal Command in the Smart View Action Panel .

2. Select View , then Columns , and then select a column to display or hide from the drop-down list; alternatively, to display all the columns in the list, select Show All .

Figure 83, List of Columns to Display in Manage Journals Dialog Box shows the column drop-down list.

Figure 83. List of Columns to Display in Manage Journals Dialog Box

3. Optional: If you did not select Show All in step 2 , then repeat step 2 for each additional column that you want to add to the display.

4. Optional: To change the column sort order from ascending to descending, click the column header.

5. When finished, click Close .

Editing Journals

You can edit a journal that you previously created. For example, you can change the description of a journal, add adjustments, or change the balance type.

You can edit only Working, Submitted, and Rejected journals. You cannot edit Approved or Posted journals. You must have All access to the class for a journal to edit the journal. See Journal Roles .

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To edit journals:

1. Open a journal with the status of Working , Submitted , or Rejected .

See Opening Journals .

2. To edit journal properties, in the Oracle Journals ribbon, click Edit , and then complete the procedure in Editing Journal Properties .

3. To change the POV of the journal detail:

a. Double-click a member cell within the grid.

b. Select a member in the Member Selection dialog box, and click OK .

c. Repeat step 3.a and step 3.b for each POV change you want to make.

d. Click Refresh ,

For more information on member selection, see Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

4. To update a journal entry, under the Debit or Credit column in the grid, type directly into the cell that you want to change.

The figures in the Total and Variance rows are updated automatically.

5. To perform ad hoc analysis with the selected journal, in the Oracle Journals ribbon, select Analyze , .

For more information, see Ad Hoc Analysis .

6. To scan the journal and verify that the entries are valid, click Scan .

See Scanning Journals .

Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail

The journal detail contains a set of dimension members that you define to specify the data accessed for a specific journal. Each journal saves the journal detail with dimension information you select, which is displayed automatically the next time that you open the journal.

The point of view displays the members for the Scenario, Year, Period, and Value dimensions. To select members for journal detail, you can select a row and click Member Selection in the Oracle Journals ribbon. The system displays the point of view from which you can select the member for each dimension. To create journals for parent adjustments, you select the Parent Adjs member for the Value dimension. For each line of journal detail, you must specify a Parent member if the Value dimension is Parent Currency Adj, Parent Adj, or Contribution Adj. In addition, you must specify an entity, account, intercompany partner, and Custom dimension.

You can select the journal detail when the journal status is Working, Submitted, or Rejected. You cannot make changes to the journal detail when the journal status is Approved or Posted.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To select dimensions for journal detail:

1. Create or open a journal.

The Create Journal or Manage Journals window is displayed.

See Creating Journals or Opening Journals .

2. To change the point of view, at the top of Create Journal or Manage Journals , click the arrow in the drop-down text box for a dimension and select a member.

Repeat this step to change the point of view for the Scenario, Year, Period, and Value dimensions, as you require.

For example, you could change point of view in the Period dimension from June to July:

3. Click Create or Close .

Copying and Pasting Journal Cells

You can copy and paste the information in the journals grid from one cell to another to create journal entries.

To copy or paste journal rows:

1. Create or open a journal.

The Create Journal or Manage Journals window is displayed.

See Creating Journals or Opening Journals .

2. Perform an action:

- Select a row in the journals grid.

- Select a cell.

3. In Excels Home ribbon, click the Copy button.

Alternatively, right-click and select Copy .

4. Select the row or cell to which to paste the values.

5. From Excels Home ribbon, click the Paste button.

Alternatively, right-click and select Paste .

6. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click the Save button to save the changes to the journal properties.

Submitting Journals

After creating journals and entering journal data, you must submit them to your supervisor for approval before posting them to the database. You can submit a journal when you create it, or submit it later by selecting it from the list of available journals.

You can submit journals one at a time or in batches. After you submit a journal, the status changes to Submitted. A reviewer then approves or rejects the journal, and if it is approved, you can post it.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To submit journals:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

The Manage Journals window is displayed.

2. Set the point of view as described in Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

3. Before proceeding, click Refresh, , to update the list of journals with those that correspond to the selected POV.

Refreshing the journals list helps you to avoid errors that may arise when the selected POV and the listed journals are not in sync.

4. Perform a task:

- To submit unopened journals:

- In the Manage Journals window, press and hold the Ctrl key, then select journals with the status, " Working. "

Alternatively, select a single journal with the status, " Working. "

- Click Submit , .

- When youre finished submitting journals, in the Manage Journals window, click Close .

- To submit an opened journal:

a. Open a journal, as described in Opening Journals .

b. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click .

Unsubmitting Journals

You can unsubmit a journal that you previously submitted. When you unsubmit a journal, the status reverts from Submitted to Working.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To unsubmit journals:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

The Manage Journals window is displayed.

2. Set the point of view as described in Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

3. Before proceeding, click Refresh, , to update the list of journals with those that correspond to the selected POV.

Refreshing the journals list helps you to avoid errors that may arise when the selected POV and the listed journals are not in sync.

4. Perform a task:

- To unsubmit unopened journals:

a. In the Manage Journals window, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then select journals with the status, " Submitted. "

Alternatively, select a single journal with the status, " Submitted. "

b. Click Unsubmit , .

c. When youre finished unsubmitting journals, in the Manage Journals window, click Close .

- To unsubmit an opened journal:

a. Open a journal, as described in Opening Journals .

b. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click .

Approving Journals

After you submit a journal, you can approve it for posting. You can approve a journal from the Oracle Journals ribbon after you create and submit it, or you can approve it later by selecting it from the journals list.

You can approve journals one at a time or in batches. After you approve a journal, the status changes to Approved and the journal cannot be edited.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To approve journals:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

The Manage Journals window is displayed.

2. Set the point of view as described in Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

3. Before proceeding, click Refresh, , to update the list of journals with those that correspond to the selected POV.

Refreshing the journals list helps you to avoid errors that may arise when the selected POV and the listed journals are not in sync.

4. Perform a task:

- To approve one or more unopened journals:

a. In the Manage Journals window, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then select journals with the status, " Submitted. ".

Alternatively, select a single journal with the status, " Submitted. "

b. Click Approve , .

c. When youre finished approving journals, in the Manage Journals window, click Close .

- To approve an opened journal:

a. Open a journal, as described in Opening Journals .

b. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click .

Rejecting Journals

After a journal is submitted for approval, or approved, you can reject it. You can reject journals one at a time or in batches. After you reject a journal, the status changes to Rejected.

To reject journals:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

The Manage Journals window is displayed.

2. Set the point of view as described in Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

3. Before proceeding, click to update the list of journals with those that correspond to the selected POV.

Refreshing the journals list helps you to avoid errors that may arise when the selected POV and the listed journals are not in sync.

4. Perform a task:

- To reject one or more unopened journals:

a. In the Manage Journals window, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then select journals with the status, " Submitted " or " Approved. "

Alternatively, select a single journal with the status, " Submitted " or " Approved. "

b. Click Reject , .

c. When youre finished rejecting journals, in the Manage Journals window, click Close .

- To reject an opened journal:

a. Open a journal with the status " Submitted " or " Approved, " as described in Opening Journals .

b. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click .

Posting Journals

You can post a journal after it is approved, after it is submitted, or after it is submitted and approved. Or, you can post it later by selecting it from the list of available journals.

The scenario view to which a journal is posted depends on the setting for the Scenario attribute "ZeroViewForAdj." If this attribute is set to Periodic, the journal is posted to the Periodic value. If this attribute is set to YTD, the journal is posted to the YTD value.

You can post journals one at a time or in batches. You must have the journal period open before you can post, and you must have All access to the classes of every entity for the detail lines.

Your ability to post a journal also depends on the process level of the data in the journal. For example, if you have a process management role of Reviewer 2 and the data that the journal affects is at Process Level 6, you cannot post the journal. See .

When you post adjustments from a journal, the adjustment values are stored in the specified adjustment member. These four Value dimension members are valid for posting journals: Entity Currency Adjustments, Parent Currency Adjustments, Parent Adjustments, and Contribution Adjustments.

You can post a journal to a specific parent and child combination (node) by using one of these Value dimensions:

- Parent Adjs—Applied to the node before consolidation.

- Contribution Adjs—Applied to the contribution when determining the contribution total.

Note:

Node adjustments are posted in the currency of the parent.

If more than one journal is posted to the Entity Currency Adjs member for the same account, the results are cumulative. The total from the current journal is added to or subtracted to from the existing total in Entity Currency Adjs.

When you post a journal, the system recalculates the account balances so that the database reflects the adjustments. The journal status changes to Posted, and you can view the adjustment in a data grid.

Note:

Do not delete or rename a posted journal, as this will result in unresolved data for the adjustment values that the journal had created.

To post journals:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

The Manage Journals window is displayed.

2. Set the point of view as described in Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

3. Before proceeding, click Refresh, , to update the list of journals with those that correspond to the selected POV.

Refreshing the journals list helps you to avoid errors that may arise when the selected POV and the listed journals are not in sync.

4. Perform a task:

- To post one or more unopened journals:

a. In the Manage Journals window, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then select journals with the status, " Approved. "

Alternatively, select a single journal with the status, " Approved. "

b. Click Post , .

c. When youre finished posting journals, in the Manage Journals window, click Close .

- To post an opened journal:

a. Open a journal with the status, " Approved ", as described in Opening Journals .

b. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click .

Unposting Journals

You can unpost a journal after it is posted. For example, suppose you post several journals with adjustments to an entity, and you receive new data for that entity. You can unpost the journals, load the new data, and post the journals again.

When you unpost a journal, the journal status changes to Rejected. When you unpost an auto-reversal journal, the journal status changes back to Approved.

To unpost journals:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

The Manage Journals window is displayed.

2. Set the point of view as described in Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

3. Before proceeding, click Refresh, , to update the list of journals with those that correspond to the selected POV.

Refreshing the journals list helps you to avoid errors that may arise when the selected POV and the listed journals are not in sync.

4. Perform a task:

- To unpost one or more unopened journals:

a. In the Manage Journals window, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then select journals with the status, " Posted. "

Alternatively, select a single journal with the status, " Posted. "

b. Click Unpost , .

c. When youre finished unposting journals, in the Manage Journals window, click Close .

- To unpost an opened journal:

a. Open a journal with the status " Posted, " as described in Opening Journals .

b. In the Oracle Journals ribbon, click .

Journal Validation

When you submit, approve, or post a journal, the system validates the journal. The system checks for these conditions:

- The period must be a base period for the scenario’s base frequency.

- When you post or unpost a journal, the period must be opened.

- The Value dimension must be an adjustment dimension.

- The journal must have the appropriate status for the action to be performed.

- Line items must exist for the journal.

- The entity and the parent must be valid dimensions. For regular journals, the entity must allow adjustments. If you are posting a journal to Parent Currency Adjs, you must enter a valid parent. The entity must be a child of the specified parent for the journal entity.

- If you are posting a journal to a node, the parent must allow adjustments for child entities. The entity must be a child of the specified parent.

- Node journals must have valid parent-entity combinations. The system also checks for the Organization by Period application setting when you attempt to post node journals. The entity must be active for the parent for the period in which you are posting.

- The account must be valid. It must be an Asset, Liability, Revenue, Expense, Balance, Flow, or Balance Recurring account. The account must be a base account and cannot be designated as calculated in metadata. It cannot be calculated through a roll-up process; the account cannot have children.

- All other dimensions must be valid. The ICP dimension cannot be ICP Top, ICP Entities, or blank, but you can select ICP None. If an ICP is specified, the account must be set up as an ICP account.

- The Custom dimensions cannot be designated as calculated in metadata and cannot be calculated through a roll-up process; the Custom dimensions cannot have children.

- For a balanced journal, the total debits must equal the total credits. For a balanced- by-entity regular journal, the total debits must equal the total credits for each entity. For a balanced-by-entity node journal, the total debits must equal the total credits for each node and the parent and children entities must have the same currency. If the Value dimension is Entity Currency, the parent entities in the journal can have different currencies, but they must have the same currency as their children entities.

- All dimension intersections must be valid.

- The subcube of dimensions containing the line item cell cannot be locked.

- The cell cannot be designated as a NoInput cell in rules.

Analyzing Journals

After posting journals, you can use ad hoc analysis in Smart View to check the adjustments and totals. You can analyze one or more rows, or the entire journal.

You can analyze journals of any status: Working, Posted, Submitted, Approved, or Rejected.

When forming the ad hoc grid, the Value dimensions will always be in the column and all other dimensions will be in the row. The row dimensions will appear in the following order:

- Entity

- Account

- ICP

- Customs

If your selection has the same members for a dimension, that dimension will appear in the grid POV.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To analyze journals:

1. Create or open a journal.

See Creating Journals or Opening Journals .

2. Set the point of view as described in Selecting Dimension Members for Journal Detail .

3. In the journal grid, select one or more dimension, member, or data cells, and click Analyze , .

Observe that the journal has been converted to an ad hoc grid, where you can perform further ad hoc analysis.

Deleting Journals

You can delete unposted journals that you no longer need. You cannot delete Approved or Posted journals, because that would result in unresolved data for the adjustment values that the journal had created.

Before you begin this procedure, in the Smart View Panel, ensure that you are connected to a Financial Management data source.

To delete journals:

1. In the Smart View Panel, right-click a Financial Management application, and then select Manage Journals .

The Manage Journals window is displayed.

2. Optional: Filter journals by status.

To filter by status, select one or more of the following options, and then click Apply Filters , :

- Working

- Submitted

- Rejected

You cannot delete Approved or Posted journals

3. Select a journal and click Delete ,

Alternatively, use the Shift or Ctrl keys to select multiple journals and click Delete , .

4. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes .

5. Repeat step 2 to step 4 for each journal that you want to delete.

6. Click Close to exit the Manage Journals window.

Entity Detail Reports

Subtopics

- Starting the Entity Detail Report

- Report Point of View

- Selecting Rows for the Report

- Displaying Base Details

- Displaying Line Item Detail

- Linking to Journal Detail

- Displaying Source and Destination Transactions

- Exporting the Entity Details Report to Excel

Entity Detail Reports provide a full audit detail of the entire consolidation path for a specific data cell of a specified entity. The report starts with the source amount entered in the Entity Currency Value dimension and shows all of its related details in each Value dimension, including the journal entries generated in the journal posting process and the audit transaction details generated as part of the consolidation process. If the account contains line item detail, the report also shows the related line item details entered for the account.

This report provides the capability of viewing transactions, showing the detail of the amounts generated from each step of the consolidation process, including currency translations and intercompany eliminations. It also displays the transaction records for derived data from prior periods.

Starting the Entity Detail Report

You access the Entity Detail Report from an ad hoc grid or data form.

Before you begin, connect to a Financial Management application and open an ad hoc grid or form.

To start the Entity Detail Report:

1. From a Financial Management ad hoc grid or form, select the cell for which to view entity transaction detail.

2. Right-click and select Smart View , then Journals , and then Entity Details .

Alternatively, in the HFM or HFM Ad Hoc ribbon, click .

The Entity Details dialog box is displayed.

Report Point of View

The Entity Detail report uses the point of view from the data grid that you are using. The Point of View information used for the report includes the Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, View, Account, ICP, and Custom dimensions. The Value dimension information is ignored, and all Value members are displayed on the report.

You can only select one account when you run the report. If the account selected is a parent account, the system does not display line item details, journal details, or audit transaction details for the account. The system does not enumerate the details for the base members of the parent account. The support of base members applies only to the custom dimensions. For example, if the Intercompany Partner, Custom1 is a Parent member, all entries that are posted to all base members of the Parent member are displayed.

Selecting Rows for the Report

You can select the rows to display on the report. You can change these selections at any time.

The rows can display Entity Currency, Entity Curr Adjs, Entity Curr Total, Parent Currency, Parent Curr Adjs, Parent Curr Total, Parent Adjs, Parent Total, Proportion, Elimination, Contribution, Contribution Adjs, and Contribution Total.

The columns display the amount, Custom accounts, ICP, debits, credits, ID, or remarks.

You can suppress the display of some transaction details or dimensions by deselecting the applicable options. For example, if you want the report to show only the journal details, you can deselect all other row display options, leaving only the journals option selected. If you want to also suppress the Custom columns because they are not used for the account, you can deselect these options from the column display.

The Value column contains all of the Value members. If the currency of the parent member is the same as the currency of the entity, the system skips the display of the Parent Currency related Value members because it is duplicate information. The Amount column contains the amount from the data subcube. The amounts for each transaction detail are stored in the Debit or Credit column, depending on the sign of the data cell.

The Remarks column contains additional information about the amount. Depending on the Value dimension, you can have several possible remark comments such as whether the amount is Input, Calculated, or Derived, or uses the Nature parameter for auditing transactions. It can also contain information about prior records. One of the main purposes of the Entity Detail Transaction Report is to show all of the transaction records that made up the amount stored in the database. Prior LID, Journals, and Transactions remarks indicate that the amount stored in the database could be from line item details, journal adjustments, consolidation eliminations, as well as derived data from prior periods.

Table 9. Possible Values for the Remark Column

Value Dimension

Remark

Entity Currency

- Input

- Calculated

- Prior LID

- Derived

Adjustment

- Calculated

- Group Label

- Prior Journals

- Derived

Proportion/Elimination

- Nature

- Prior Transactions

- Derived

To select report rows:

1. Start an Entity Details Report, as described in Starting the Entity Detail Report .

2. In the Entity Details dialog box, select View , then Rows , and then select rows to display, or select Show All .

The row types that you can choose to display are:

- Base Details —See Displaying Base Details

- Line Item Details —See Displaying Line Item Detail

- Journals —See Linking to Journal Detail

- Destination Transactions —See Displaying Source and Destination Transactions

- Source Transactions —See Displaying Source and Destination Transactions

Displaying Base Details

In the Entity Detail Report, the option to display base details applies only to a data cell that is a parent member cell. If the option to display base details is not selected, the aggregated amount for the parent cell is displayed as one entry in the report. If you select to display base details, all the information from the base records of the parent cell is displayed.

For example, suppose AllCustom1 is a parent member of the Custom 1 dimension. The base members include Opening, Appropriation, Variances, Increases, Decreases, and Closing. When you select to display base details in the report, the system generates the report with all applicable base records for AllCustom1. If you do not select to display base details, the only the amount for the selected parent cell is displayed; for example, the parent cell AllCustom1 is displayed without any base details.

Displaying Line Item Detail

In the Entity Detail Report, the option to display line item detail is only applicable for the scenario and account defined to use line item detail. Line item detail information is available only for the Entity Currency Value dimension.

Linking to Journal Detail

When the Entity Detail Report contains the journal detail for any of the adjustment Value members, the debit or credit amount is displayed with the journal ID. You can click the journal ID link in the ID column to display the Journals Detail page containing all of the information for that journal entry.

To link to journal detail:

1. Start an Entity Details Report, as described in Starting the Entity Detail Report .

2. Click on a Journal ID in the ID column of the report.

A new worksheet opens containing the journal detail for the Journal ID you selected.

Displaying Source and Destination Transactions

From the Entity Detail report, you can view the audit transaction detail information generated from the consolidation process. To view the transaction detail, you can display Destination Transactions. If you also want to view the Source transactions that generated the amount, you can also display Source Transactions.

You can view these transactions only if you have set up your consolidation rules file to store these transactions. You must use the HS.CON function with the Nature parameter in the rules file. If the HS.CON function is not used or if the Nature parameter is not specified in the function, the system will not generate any audit transaction detail during the consolidation process. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial Management Administrators Guide.

Exporting the Entity Details Report to Excel

After selecting the rows to display in the Entity Details dialog box, you can export the report content to a sheet in an Excel workbook.

To export the Entity Details report to Excel:

1. Define an Entity Details Report, as described in Starting the Entity Detail Report and Selecting Rows for the Report .

2. In the Entity Details dialog box, click .

The report is opened in a new Excel workbook.

Note that the exported content is for display purpose only. You cannot connect to Smart View from the exported sheet; however, you may save or print the workbook.

Smart View and Planning

In This Section:

Planning Approvals

Monitoring Planning Job Status

Searching for a Page in Planning

Copying Versions

Composite Forms

Working with Planning Business Rules

Spreading Data

Member Formula

Supporting Detail

Setting Planning Preferences

Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning

Working Offline

Data source types: Planning

This guide provides only procedural information for using the Planning features that Smart View supports. For detailed information about Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide available on the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

If you are working with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see Smart View and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

Planning Approvals

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Planning Approvals is the submission, review, and approval process of a planning unit. If you are assigned the Approvals role, you can perform the Approvals functions described here. For information about roles, see the administrator.

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Changing Planning Unit Status

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

You can change the status of one or more planning units at a time.

To view or change the status of a planning unit:

1. Open the appropriate form.

2. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

3. From Manage Approvals , select a Scenario and Version .

4. Click to display the list of planning units to which you have access.

5. Optional: From the view mode button, select one of the following:

- Flat View to display planning units as a list.

- Tree View to display planning units as a hierarchy (available only to administrators).

From the Tree View, you can select Start to start a planning unit and Exclude to exclude a planning unit from the process.

- My Planning Units to display only the planning units that you own.

6. Select the planning unit or units whose status you want to change. If the list is too long to locate the planning unit easily, you can search or apply filters to the list as described in Finding Planning Units .

7. To view details for the selected planning unit, click Planning Unit Details .

The Approval Status tab displays a history of the process status, owner, actions taken, and the date and times the status changed.

The Annotations tab displays any comments that were entered for the planning unit. See Planning Unit Annotations .

8. To change the planning unit status, click Change Status .

Note:

If you change the status of a parent entity, all of its children change, too, unless they were excluded during the First Pass state or were approved.

9. From Approvals - Change Entitys Status , select an action and the next owner for the planning unit.

10. Optional : Enter comments under Enter Annotation .

11. Click Submit .

12. Optional: To validate the changed planning unit, click . You can validate only one planning unit at a time.

Related Topics:

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Finding Planning Units

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

In Manage Approval , you can locate planning units easily by searching or by applying a filter to the list of planning units. You can use an auto filter or select members or generations as filter criteria.

To filter the list of planning units:

1. Open Manage Approval and select a scenario and version as described in Changing Planning Unit Status .

2. Click to enable filtering.

The filter bar, which contains filtering tools, is displayed just above the planning unit list.

3. Use one of the following procedures:

Search

To search for a specific planning unit, enter its name in the Planning Unit field and click .

Auto filter

a. From the filter bar, click the arrow in the column header for Approvals Status , Sub-Status , or Current Owner.

b. Select the column value to filter by. You can apply auto filters to more than one of these columns.

Filter by member selection

a. From the filter bar, click , and then select Member selector .

b. Click , and then select members for the planning unit list as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

c. Click to filter the list.

Filter by generation

a. From the filter bar, click , and then select Generation .

b. Click and select one or more generations to display in the planning unit list.

c. Click to filter the list.

d. Click OK.

4. Optional: To undo your filter selections before applying the filter, click .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Planning units move from person to person and department to department based on the following:

- The owners and reviewers assigned to the planning unit

- The planning unit place in the hierarchy

To view the promotional path of a planning unit in graphical form:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

2. From Manage Approvals , select a Scenario and Version .

3. Click Go to display the list of planning units to which you have access.

4. Select a planning unit.

5. Click .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Planning Unit Annotations

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

You can add or view comments about data in a planning unit that is started. Annotations can vary by combinations of scenario, version, and entity members.

To add a planning unit annotation:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

2. From Manage Approvals , select a Scenario and Version .

3. Click Go to display the list of planning units to which you have access.

4. Select the planning unit for which you want to add an annotation. To filter the list, see Finding Planning Units .

5. Optional: To view existing annotations for the selected planning unit, click Planning Unit Details and then the Annotations tab.

6. Click .

7. In Approvals - Add Annotation , enter a title and annotations (up to 1500 characters). On multibyte systems, Oracle recommends limiting annotations to 750 characters. You can enter URLs and links as well as text.

8. Click Submit .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Out of Office Assistant

Out of Office Assistant

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

You can set up the Out of Office Assistant to reassign planning units that arrive while you are out of the office.

To set up the Out of Office Assistant:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

2. From Manage Approvals , select Out of Office Assistant .

3. From Out of Office Assistant , select I am Currently Out of Office .

4. From Select Action, select an action and next owner for planning units that arrive while you are out of the office.

5. Optional: Enter an annotation.

6. Click Submit .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Planning Unit Annotations

Monitoring Planning Job Status

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

You view the execution status of Planning jobs and delete them if needed on the Job Console. To check the execution status of jobs:

1. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select More , and then Job Console .

2. By default, all jobs are displayed. To filter the list of jobs, from Filter Criteria, use any of the following job criteria:

- Type : From the drop-down menu, select one of these:

- Business Rule

- Ruleset (for Calculation Manager)

- Sequence (for Business Rules)

- Clear cell detail

- Copy data

- Push data

- Status : From the drop-down menu, select Processing, Completed, or Error.

- Job Name

- User Name

- Start Date

- End Date

3. Click Go . The Job Console displays the jobs matching your selection criteria.

4. Optional: To view the application name and plan type of a job, select the job and click Show Details.

5. Optional: To delete a job, select the job and click Delete .

Searching for a Page in Planning

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

If the Planning administrator sets up multiple page dimensions for a form, you select the page with the data you require from the page drop-down menu. To search for a page in Planning:

1. Click in the page dimension that you want to search to highlight it.

2. From the drop-down menu, select the page name containing the data with which you want to work.

Copying Versions

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

You can copy data from one bottom-up or target version of a selected scenario to another bottom-up or target version within the same scenario. For example, you can create a Best Case version and copy some or all the data in that version to a Worst Case version to quickly create a starting point for the new version.

You can copy between bottom-up and target versions.

- When you copy to a bottom-up version, only the selected level 0 members are copied.

- When you copy to a target version, all selected members are copied.

- To protect data in approved planning units, copying a version does not copy to approved planning units.

Note:

To successfully copy data, when specifying the copy data criteria, you must select at least one member for the Scenario, Account, Entity, Period, and Version dimensions.

To copy a version:

1. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Copy Version .

2. From Scenario , select the scenario to copy.

3. From Copy From , select the source version.

4. From Copy To , select the destination version.

5. Click Go to display the available entities (planning units) for the selected source version.

6. Use the arrow keys to select entities from Available Entities. You can copy entities with a Process Status of Not Started or First Pass.

7. Optional: To copy associated information, select any of these options:

- Copy Account Annotations. Only annotations for selected entities are copied. If you are copying to a bottom-up version, only level 0 entities (and their annotations) are copied.

- Copy Cell text and Document links

- Copy Supporting Details

8. Click Copy Data.

Note:

Wait for the Copy Version completion message before loading another Web page.

Composite Forms

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide and Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrators Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

To open a Planning composite form:

1. Connect to a Planning data source that contains composite forms.

2. From the Connections tree list, double-click a composite form (indicated by ).

The composite form opens in a new Excel workbook with each subform displayed in a separate worksheet.

Smart View supports Planning master composite forms.

Working with Planning Business Rules

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

In Planning forms and ad hoc grids, you can use business rules to calculate data in Essbase. Some business rules prompt you to enter information, called a runtime prompt .

Related Topics:

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Entering Runtime Prompts

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation .

To launch a business rule in Excel to recalculate data in Essbase:

1. Open a Planning ad hoc grid or form (single or composite).

2. Save any unsaved data.

Unsaved data is lost when you launch a business rule.

3. From the Planning ribbon, select Calculate , and then Business Rules .

4. From Business Rules , under Plan Type , select the plan type associated with the rule you want to use.

5. Select a rule from the rules listed for that plan type, and then click Launch .

If the business rule includes runtime prompts, enter the information described in step 2 of Entering Runtime Prompts .

Note:

Planning administrators: During form design in Planning, rules directly attached to a composite form with Run on Save enabled are not supported in Smart View. You should always attach rules to a simple form, enable Run on Save , then attach the business rules from the simple to the composite form. This way, all runtime prompt values are picked up correctly from the form context and the business rules launch successfully.

If the calculation is successful, the values in the Essbase database reflect the results of the calculation.

6. Click Close .

7. From the Smart View ribbon, select Refresh .

Related Topics:

Entering Runtime Prompts

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Entering Runtime Prompts

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available on the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

When launched, a business rule can prompt you to enter variable information, called a runtime prompt . The business rule designer sets up runtime prompts.

To enter a runtime prompt:

1. Launch a business rule having a runtime prompt.

2. Enter or select the input type specified by the runtime prompt, summarized in the following table:

Icon

Expected Input Type

One member selection

Multiple member selections

Numeric value (either entered or selected from cell drop-down menu)

Text value—Use only with enhanced calculation scripts, not with graphical scripts

Dimension from the database—Use only with enhanced calculation scripts, not with graphical scripts

For Calculation Manager business rules only: A member or member combination that includes only one member from each dimension the designer has set for this runtime prompt (for example: Sales -> Actual -> Jan refers to the member intersection of Sales, Actual, and January)

For Calculation Manager business rules only: A range of members, selectable from each dimension the designer has set for this runtime prompt (for example: IDescendants("Marketing"),FY08)

Ensure that the runtime prompts are valid. You cannot launch a business rule until all runtime prompt values are valid.

3. Click Launch .

If the calculation is successful, the values in the database reflect the calculation results.

Related Topics:

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

The Calculate Data Form business rule is created for each form to calculate subtotals. The Calculate Currencies business rule is created for forms that include multiple currencies in a row, column, or page to enable the conversion of values among available currencies.

The order in which business rules are launched is important and may affect the data. If you plan to launch both Calculate Data Form and the Calculate Currencies business rules, always run the conversions before subtotaling the form.

To launch the Calculate Data Form and Calculate Currencies business rules in Excel:

1. Open a form.

Any data that is not saved on the spreadsheet is lost when you launch the business rule.

2. From the Planning ribbon, select Calculate , and then Rules on Form .

The business rules associated with the form are displayed in the Business Rules dialog box.

3. Complete one or both of the following actions:

- To convert currencies, select Calculate Currencies .

- To calculate subtotals, select Calculate Data Forms .

4. Click Launch .

If the calculation is successful, the values in the Essbase database reflect the results of the calculation.

Related Topics:

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Entering Runtime Prompts

Spreading Data

Subtopics

- Spreading Data for Time Periods

- Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

- Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Data source types: Planning

Spreading Data for Time Periods

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation .

In a form, the spreading rules for time periods are set in Planning as part of the as part of the Planning dimension property settings. When you work with a form in Excel, and depending on how the form was set up by the administrator, data values can be spread, or distributed, in several ways:

- Spread the value of a summary time period to its base time periods or to the first parent or first child of the parent time period

- Spread values among children and parents proportionally, based on existing distribution

- Spread values based on the weekly distribution of a quarter, which could be 4-4-5, 5-4-4, 4-5-4, or None (as set up by the budget administrator)

- Temporarily lock the values of certain cells while spreading data over time periods (see Spreading Data with Cell Locking )

- Spread values for different time periods using a different spreading rule for each separate time period on the same row or column dimension. For example, FY2013 can have formula fill, and FY2014 can have flow.

This type of spreading requires Planning Release 11.1.2.3.500 or later.

Notes

- You cannot spread data in a summary time period that includes members with mixed currency types.

- Excel formulas in child cells are ignored during spreading.

To spread data for time periods:

1. Open a form.

2. Select a cell and enter a new value.

The value is distributed according to the rules described in "Adjusting and Spreading Data" in the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide

3. Click Save .

Related Topics:

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

When spreading data over time periods, you can temporarily lock the values of one or more cells to preserve their values when other values are recalculated. You can spread data across time periods based on various calculations and visually review the changes before committing them to the database. For examples of spreading with cell locking, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide .

To temporarily lock values:

1. Open a form.

2. In the form, select the cell or group of cells that you want to lock.

3. From the Planning ribbon, select Lock .

A color change indicates that a cell is locked. You can now spread or manipulate data in the other cells however you want, without affecting the locked cells.

4. To unlock a cell, refresh the grid.

Related Topics:

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

If your administrator has enabled Grid Spread, you can specify an amount or percentage to increase or decrease values across multiple dimensions on the grid, based on the existing values in the target cells. When calculating the spread data, read-only and locked cells and cells having supporting detail are ignored. Data integrity is ensured because values can be spread only to cells to which you have access.

To spread values using Grid Spread:

1. Put the cursor in the Subtotal or Total source cell whose value you want to spread to target cells.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Adjust , and then Grid Spread.

3. From the drop-down menu, select one of these options:

- Value to increase or decrease values by a specified amount

- Percentage to increase or decrease values by a percentage

4. Select Increase By or Decrease By and enter a value or percentage.

5. In Spread Value , enter the actual spread value that you want.

For example, if the Current Value is 100 and you want the spread value to be 125, enter 125 directly in Spread Value and do nothing with the Increase By / Decrease By options or text box in step 4 .

Alternatively, you can enter 25 in Increase By , and 125 will be displayed in Spread Value .

Note:

Entering a value in Spread Value has no effect on the Increase By / Decrease By text box. But when you enter a value in Increase By / Decrease By , the spread value is reflected in the Spread Value text box.

6. Select a spreading pattern:

- Proportional Spread to spread the value proportionally, based on the existing values in the target cells (the default)

- Evenly Split to spread the value evenly among the target cells

- Fill to replace the value in all target cells

Your administrator can add other spreading patterns.

7. Click Spread . The specified value or percentage is spread across the target cells, replacing former values with new ones.

8. To save the new values, click Save .

Related Topics:

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Using mass allocation, you can spread data to all descendents of a source cell and across all dimensions. Spreading by mass allocation spreads data to cells not displayed on the grid and does not require that you have access to the target cells.

Mass allocation is available only for forms, which must be enabled for mass allocation by the administrator. You must be provisioned with the Mass Allocate role to use mass allocation.

Note:

Mass allocation cannot be undone.

To spread values by mass allocation:

1. Put the cursor in the Total or Subtotal cell whose value you want to spread.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Adjust , and then Mass Allocate .

3. Enter a new value in Spread Value to replace the current value, or from the drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

- Value to increase or decrease values by a specified amount

- Percentage to increase or decrease values by a percentage

4. Select Increase By or Decrease By and enter a value or percentage.

5. In Spread Value , enter the actual spread value that you want.

For example, if the Current Value is 100 and you want the spread value to be 125, enter 125 directly in Spread Value and do nothing with the Increase By / Decrease By options or text box in step 4 .

Alternatively, you can enter 25 in Increase By , and 125 will be displayed in Spread Value .

Note:

Entering a value in Spread Value has no effect on the Increase By / Decrease By text box. But when you enter a value in Increase By / Decrease By , the spread value is reflected in the Spread Value text box.

6. Select the Spread Type for allocating the specified value or percentage across the target cells:

- Proportional Spread to spread the value proportionally, based on the existing values in the target cells (the default)

- Evenly Split to spread the value evenly among the target cells

- Fill to replace the value in all target cells

- Relational Spread to spread into the selected cells based on values that exist in a different source location. Selecting this option displays the currently selected members for each dimension in the Selected column.

Your administrator can add other spreading patterns.

7. Click Spread. The new values are automatically saved in Essbase.

Related Topics:

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Member Formula

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Note:

In the Planning web interface, the Member Formulas property must be enabled in the form before you can view formulas in Smart View. Users with the proper permissions should open the form in Planning, go to the Layout tab, then Dimension Properties , and then select Member Formulas .

You can view the underlying formula in cells that contain a formula. Such cells can be indicated on the grid by a cell style specified in the Options window. To view a member formula:

1. Select the member whose formula you want to view.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select More , and then Member Formula .

Details of the formula are displayed.

Supporting Detail

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Supporting detail serves as a built-in calculator for developing data that is not in the member outline. It can include text, values, and operators that define how data aggregates.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Adding Supporting Detail

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Use the Supporting Detail window to set how detail items aggregate to cell values in a form.

To add supporting detail that calculates values in a form or ad hoc grid:

1. Open a form, and then select the cells.

You can select one cell or a range of contiguous cells in a row or column. The section cannot include a combination of rows and columns. Select cells that are in the local currency so that you can write to them.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Cell Actions and then Supporting Detail .

The Supporting Detail window reflects your cell selection.

3. Enter a description over the initial "untitled" text.

The text and its associated operator must be unique among children of the same parent. By default, you can enter up to 1,500 characters.

4. Use the buttons to create or change the indented hierarchy to reflect the desired structure and calculations.

For example, click Add Child to add a line item directly below the selected item.

5. Set the mathematical relationships among the line items by selecting an operator for each of them.

Select from these operators: + (add), - (subtract), * (multiply), / (divide), and ~ (ignore).

6. Enter data to set or calculate.

Enter numbers using the same scaling that was set up for the form.

7. Click Save .

Values are dynamically calculated and aggregated before the data is saved. Data on the form is also saved.

Related Topics:

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

The supporting detail hierarchy should reflect the type of information that supports the cell values and the mathematical operators that create the relationships.

To create or change the supporting detail hierarchy:

1. In a form, select the cells with supporting detail.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Supporting Detail .

3. Create or change the rows in the hierarchy that provide the detail for the data values by putting the cursor on an item and clicking the options in this table:

Option

Result

Add Child

Adds an item one level below the selected cell. You can add an unlimited number of children, but consider its potential performance impact.

Add Sibling

Adds an item at the same level as the selected cell. You can add an unlimited number of siblings, but consider its potential performance impact.

Delete

Removes the selected item

Delete All

Simultaneously removes all supporting detail

Promote

Moves the selected item to the next-higher level

Demote

Moves the selected item to the next-lower level

Move Up

Moves the selected item to before its sibling predecessor

Move Down

Moves the selected item to after its sibling successor

Duplicate Row

Adds a row below the selected item, duplicating its structure (text, operator, and values)

Fill

For rows, copies the data from the current cell to the cells to its right

Refresh

Gets the latest stored database values, restoring the previously saved values, and possibly overwriting changes you just made.

4. Click Save .

The save operation stores the detail text, values, and aggregate values.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

Cells that contain supporting detail can be indicated on the grid by a cell style specified in the Options dialog box.

To view or change calculations or supporting data:

1. Open a form, and select the cells for which to view or add detail.

You can select one cell or a range of contiguous cells in a row or column. The section cannot include a combination of rows and columns. Select cells that are in the local currency so that you can write to them.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Supporting Detail .

3. View or change the line items or calculations that aggregate the data in the selected cells.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

In Planning applications, when you delete supporting detail for a cell, you affect the associated value in the relational database. You specify how to handle the stored Essbase value. You can set it to #Missing or leave it as it was before the supporting detail was deleted. This feature is useful if you want to use supporting detail as a scratch pad or calculator.

To synchronize supporting detail with Essbase:

1. Open a form.

2. In the form, click the cell that has the supporting detail you want to remove.

3. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Supporting Detail .

4. In the Supporting Detail window, delete the information, and then click OK .

5. Select an option from the displayed message to specify how to handle the aggregate value of the deleted supporting detail stored in Essbase:

- To delete the value from Essbase, click Yes, set the value(s) to #Missing.

- To leave the data value in Essbase as is, click No, leave the value(s) as is.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Setting Planning Preferences

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

To set user preferences for a Planning application:

1. From the tree list in the Smart View Panel, select an application.

2. Right-click, and then select User Preferences .

3. From Preferences , specify options for the following

- Application Settings: Email, alias and workflow options.

- Display Settings: Formatting, page, and other options.

- User Variables: Variables set up by the Planning to help you navigate large forms and grids.

Note:

You cannot set preferences in offline mode.

Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning

Subtopics

- Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

- Viewing Formatting in Smart View

- Clearing Formatting

- Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

- Supported Native Excel Formatting

- Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Data source types: Planning

Smart View provides a way for users to save native Excel formatting back to the Planning server as part of a form or ad-hoc grid. The saved formatting is applied in both the Planning browser interface and when the form is rendered within Excel. You can then choose how to display the formatting in Smart View. This functionality is in addition to the existing Smart View cell styles functionality (described in Cell Styles ).

These formatting options are available in the Formatting group of the Planning ribbon shown in Figure 84, Formatting Options .

Figure 84. Formatting Options

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Data source types: Planning

To save Excel formatting on a Planning form:

1. Open a Planning form for editing in Smart View.

2. Use native Excel formatting features to apply the formatting to the sheet.

3. On the Planning ribbon, select Save from the Formatting group.

4. Go to Viewing Formatting in Smart View to choose a viewing option.

Related Topics:

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Data source types: Planning

Once a form is rendered within Excel, Smart View provides the options to view the formatting on a sheet. These options are accessed from the Apply button within the Formatting group on the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon.

Tip:

The Apply options are viewing options only and allow you to display the cell styles and native Excel formatting that were previously saved on a form.

To toggle between formatting view options on a Planning form:

1. Open a Planning form and click the Apply button within the Formatting group on the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon (see Figure 85, Apply Options ).

The Apply options are displayed. The initial state before any option is selected is that no option is selected. Once an option is selected, the last option selection will be preserved the next time the form is opened.

Figure 85. Apply Options

2. Select an option:

- None —Applies no styles (Excel formatting or Smart View cell styles) to the sheet. Though cell styles or custom styles may exist on the sheet, neither are shown when selecting this option. They are preserved, however, if you want to display them later using the Cell styles , Custom styles , or Custom and cell styles options.

- Cell styles —Applies only Smart View cell styles to the sheet, as described in the " Cell Styles " topic.

- Custom styles —Applies only custom user-defined native Excel formatting to the sheet.

- Custom and cell styles —Applies both Excel formatting and Smart View cell styles to the sheet. Note that when you select Custom and cell styles , cell styles take precedent over custom Excel formatting.

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Clearing Formatting

Data source types: Planning

To clear the formatting associated with a form or ad hoc grid, select Clear from the Formatting group on the Planning ribbon.

Selecting the Clear option removes any Excel formatting associated with the form or grid on the Planning server. Note that you can still work with cell styles functionality since cell styles are not dependent on any custom formatting that is saved.

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Data source types: Planning

To save formatting from an ad hoc grid:

1. Perform ad hoc analysis to create a grid to save.

2. Use Excel native formatting features to format the grid.

3. From the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Save Ad Hoc Grid .

4. In the Save Grid As dialog box, select the Submit Formatting option when saving the ad hoc grid as a form.

You can now open the saved form and choose a viewing option as described in Viewing Formatting in Smart View .

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Data source types: Planning

Table 10 summarizes the native Excel formatting supported by Planning forms in Smart View, and whether the formatting is supported when the form is viewed in the Planning web application.

Table 10. Native Excel Formatting Supported in Smart View and Planning

Formatting

Smart View

Planning

Font

Font family

Yes

Yes

Font size

Yes

Yes

Bold

Yes

Yes

Italic

Yes

Yes

Strikethrough

Yes

No

Underline

Only Single and Continuous

No

Text color

Red, Green, and Blue

Red, Green, and Blue

Background color

Plain, Solid, and Red, Green, and Blue

Plain, Red, Green, and Blue

Alignment

Vertical

Top, Center, and Bottom

No

Horizontal

Left, Center, and Right

No

Indent

Only Left Indent and five levels of indent

No

Word wrap

Yes

No

Borders

Border color

Yes, can be set differently for each cells four borders, and Red, Green, and Blue

Yes

Border width

Yes, in points

Yes

Border style

None, Solid, Double, Dotted, Dash, Dash-Dot, Dash-Dot-Dot

None, Solid

Number and date format

Number format

Decimal places, negative and positive suffixes and prefixes, negative and positive color, eight colors, Percentage, scientific format, presence of thousand separator

No

Date format

Long and Short Dates, Hours, Minutes, Seconds, AM and PM

No

Miscellaneous

Read-only

Yes

No

Column width and row height

Yes, in points

No

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Data source types: Planning

- When designing a grid, care should be taken to avoid conflicts between custom Excel formatting and Smart View cell styles.

- For some ad hoc analysis operations, not all Excel formatting may be preserved. You may need to reapply formatting after performing certain operations.

- When a saved ad hoc grid is opened, Smart View tries to preserve the formatting that was saved on the Planning server. For further ad hoc operations, existing formatting options apply; for example, Use Excel formatting or cell styles.

- To preserve custom Excel formatting on ad hoc operations, select the Use Excel Formatting and the Move formatting on operations options on the Formatting page of the Options dialog box.

- Formatting can affect performance, especially during ad hoc operations when the Move formatting on operations option is enabled.

- Saving formatting is not recommended on large forms (for example, forms of 20,000 or more cells).

- There are differences between grids rendered in Smart View and those rendered in the browser in Planning. When a saved grid is rendered in Planning, some formatting may not appear exactly as it does in Smart View. Planning will attempt to approximate the Smart View formatting.

- The Planning administrator may have defined certain formatting on a form. Planning end users can overwrite this formatting and save it on the form. It can then be merged with the administrators formatting based on the option selected for this form in Planning by the administrator. Refer to the Planning documentation for more information.

- Save formatting functionality is not supported on composite Planning forms.

- Ad hoc analysis started from a saved Planning grid will inherit the formatting options saved as part of the grid.

To use Smart View Cell Styles or the Use Excel Formatting option for an ad hoc grid generated from a saved grid, complete the following steps:

1. Open the saved Planning grid as a form.

2. In the Planning ribbon, Formatting group, select Apply , and then None .

3. Click Save to save the form back to the Planning server.

4. Now use the saved form to perform ad hoc analysis.

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Working Offline

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

If the Planning offline component is installed and configured for your system, you can take forms offline and perform essentially the same operations as you do when connected to a Planning server. The changes that you make to offline forms can be synchronized back to the server.

Note:

Offline functionality is supported for Planning on-premises only. It is not supported for Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

Related Topics:

Taking Forms Offline

Working Offline with Forms

Synchronizing Data to the Planning Server

Refreshing the Offline Form Definition and Data

Taking Forms Offline

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

You can include both online and offline forms in the same Excel workbook.

Note:

Currency conversion is not supported offline.

To take forms offline:

1. In Excel, connect to the Planning data source that contains the forms you want to take offline.

2. From the Planning ribbon, select More , and then Take Offline .

The Take Offline Wizard is displayed; all forms that you can take offline are listed.

3. Expand the Available Forms/Folders and select folders and forms to take offline.

4. Click Next .

5. Double-click a dimension. You can select only one dimension.

If you selected multiple forms, the dimensions displayed are merged from the dimensions available for the selected forms.

6. Select members and system variables from the Member Selection page.

About member relationships:

Table 11. Member Relationships

Relationship

Members Included on the Form

Member

The selected member

Descendants

All members below the selected member

Descendants (inc)

The selected member and all its descendants

Ancestors

All members above the selected member

Ancestors (inc)

The selected member and all its ancestors

Siblings

All members from the same level in the hierarchy as the selected member, excluding the selected member

Siblings (inc)

The selected member and all its siblings

Parents

The member in the level above the selected member

Parents (inc)

The selected member and its parent

Children

All members in the level immediately below the selected member

Children (inc)

The selected member and all its children

Level 0 Descendants

All descendants of the selected member that have no children

Note:

Different forms may have children and page-member selections. The Page drop-down list should contain at least one member for each form from each dimension.

7. Click OK .

8. Repeat step 5 through step 7 to select members or system variables for each dimension in the list.

9. Click Next .

10. Supply a unique name and a description for the offline connection.

11. Click Finish to download the selected forms and members.

12. Click OK , and then click Done .

Related Topics:

Working Offline with Forms

Synchronizing Data to the Planning Server

Refreshing the Offline Form Definition and Data

Working Offline with Forms

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

To work with forms offline:

1. In Excel, from the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. From the Smart View Panel, select the offline connection.

Online connections specify Planning in the Provider column; offline connections specify Offline Planning .

3. Right-click and select Connect .

4. Right-click and select Open Form .

Note:

If you have a form open while you are directly connected to the Planning server, and then take the form offline in the same session, you must reopen the form from the offline connection to work with it offline.

5. In the offline form, add or change data.

6. From the Planning menu, select Submit Data .

The changed data is saved locally. You can exit Excel without losing the changed data.

Related Topics:

Taking Forms Offline

Synchronizing Data to the Planning Server

Refreshing the Offline Form Definition and Data

Synchronizing Data to the Planning Server

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

When you synchronize to the server, all data changed within a forms taken offline since the beginning of the session is saved to the server. You can sync data from all forms at once or from selected forms and members.

To save changed data to the Planning server for all forms and members taken offline:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Forms , and then Sync Back To Server .

2. Log in to the Planning server.

3. Click Sync Back All .

4. Click OK .

To save changed data to the Planning server for selected forms and members taken offline:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Forms , and then Sync Back To Server .

2. Logon to the Planning server.

3. Click Next .

4. Double-click a dimension.

5. From the Member Selection page, select members and system variables.

6. Click OK .

7. Repeat step 4 through step 6 to select members or system variables for each dimension in the list.

8. Select Finish to save data.

9. Click OK , and then Done .

Tip:

After you reconnect to the server, check that the work that you completed offline is correct in the database. If you lose a row or column of data when you refresh a form, contact the administrator.

Related Topics:

Taking Forms Offline

Working Offline with Forms

Refreshing the Offline Form Definition and Data

Refreshing the Offline Form Definition and Data

Data source types: Planning

If you are unfamiliar with Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide , available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Help , and then Documentation.

To refresh an offline form definition:

- Updates data on the offline forms with current values from the online forms.

- Adds or deletes members or forms from the ones available during an offline session.

To update offline data and the offline form definition:

1. From the Smart View menu, select Panel .

2. From the Smart View Panel, select the connection associated with the current offline session.

3. From the Planning menu, select More , and then Offline .

Note:

If you are using an offline connection and the Refresh Offline Definition option is not available, contact the Planning administrator. This option is not available if you are using an online connection.

4. Enter the user name and password for the online data source.

Because you want to refresh the offline data from the Planning server, you must log on to the server.

5. Do one of the following:

- Click Refresh All to update all members and forms taken offline with current online values and definitions. Refresh All maintains the current offline form definition. Skip to step 10 .

- Click Next to select forms, members, and system variables to update. This selection may change the form definition; only members and forms that you select remain part of the definition. Members and forms not selected are no longer available offline. Continue to step 6 .

6. Double-click a dimension.

7. From the Member Selection page, select members and system variables.

The list contains members and system variables of the selected dimension.

Use the arrow keys to move members and system variables to or from the Selected Members list.

8. Click OK .

9. Repeat step 6 through step 8 to select members or system variables for each dimension in the list.

10. Click Finish to start the refresh.

11. Click OK , and then click Done after the refresh is complete.

Related Topics:

Taking Forms Offline

Working Offline with Forms

Synchronizing Data to the Planning Server

Smart View and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

In This Section:

Planning Approvals

Monitoring Planning Job Status

Searching for a Page in Planning

Copying Versions

Composite Forms

Working with Planning Business Rules

Spreading Data

Member Formula

Supporting Detail

Setting Planning Preferences

Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

This guide provides only procedural information for using the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud features that Smart View supports. For other Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud information, see the documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

This chapter discusses Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud features in Smart View.

Planning Approvals

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

Planning Approvals is the submission, review, and approval process of a planning unit. If you are assigned the Approvals role, you can perform the Approvals functions described here. For information about roles, see the administrator.

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Changing Planning Unit Status

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

You can change the status of one or more planning units at a time.

To view or change the status of a planning unit:

1. Open the appropriate form.

2. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

3. From Manage Approvals , select a Scenario and Version .

4. Click to display the list of planning units to which you have access.

5. Optional: From the view mode button, select one of the following:

- Flat View to display planning units as a list.

- Tree View to display planning units as a hierarchy (available only to administrators).

From the Tree View, you can select Start to start a planning unit and Exclude to exclude a planning unit from the process.

- My Planning Units to display only the planning units that you own.

6. Select the planning unit or units whose status you want to change. If the list is too long to locate the planning unit easily, you can search or apply filters to the list as described in Finding Planning Units .

7. To view details for the selected planning unit, click Planning Unit Details .

The Approval Status tab displays a history of the process status, owner, actions taken, and the date and times the status changed.

The Annotations tab displays any comments that were entered for the planning unit. See Planning Unit Annotations .

8. To change the planning unit status, click Change Status .

Note:

If you change the status of a parent entity, all of its children change, too, unless they were excluded during the First Pass state or were approved.

9. From Approvals - Change Entitys Status , select an action and the next owner for the planning unit.

10. Optional : Enter comments under Enter Annotation .

11. Click Submit .

12. Optional: To validate the changed planning unit, click . You can validate only one planning unit at a time.

Related Topics:

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Finding Planning Units

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

In Manage Approval , you can locate planning units easily by searching or by applying a filter to the list of planning units. You can use an auto filter or select members or generations as filter criteria.

To filter the list of planning units:

1. Open Manage Approval and select a scenario and version as described in Changing Planning Unit Status .

2. Click to enable filtering.

The filter bar, which contains filtering tools, is displayed just above the planning unit list.

3. Use one of the following procedures:

Search

To search for a specific planning unit, enter its name in the Planning Unit field and click .

Auto filter

a. From the filter bar, click the arrow in the column header for Approvals Status , Sub-Status , or Current Owner.

b. Select the column value to filter by. You can apply auto filters to more than one of these columns.

Filter by member selection

a. From the filter bar, click , and then select Member selector .

b. Click , and then select members for the planning unit list as described in Selecting Members from the Member Selector .

c. Click to filter the list.

Filter by generation

a. From the filter bar, click , and then select Generation .

b. Click and select one or more generations to display in the planning unit list.

c. Click to filter the list.

d. Click OK.

4. Optional: To undo your filter selections before applying the filter, click .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

Planning units move from person to person and department to department based on the following:

- The owners and reviewers assigned to the planning unit

- The planning unit place in the hierarchy

To view the promotional path of a planning unit in graphical form:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

2. From Manage Approvals , select a Scenario and Version .

3. Click Go to display the list of planning units to which you have access.

4. Select a planning unit.

5. Click .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Annotations

Out of Office Assistant

Planning Unit Annotations

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

You can add or view comments about data in a planning unit that is started. Annotations can vary by combinations of scenario, version, and entity members.

To add a planning unit annotation:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

2. From Manage Approvals , select a Scenario and Version .

3. Click Go to display the list of planning units to which you have access.

4. Select the planning unit for which you want to add an annotation. To filter the list, see Finding Planning Units .

5. Optional: To view existing annotations for the selected planning unit, click Planning Unit Details and then the Annotations tab.

6. Click .

7. In Approvals - Add Annotation , enter a title and annotations (up to 1500 characters). On multibyte systems, Oracle recommends limiting annotations to 750 characters. You can enter URLs and links as well as text.

8. Click Submit .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Out of Office Assistant

Out of Office Assistant

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

You can set up the Out of Office Assistant to reassign planning units that arrive while you are out of the office.

To set up the Out of Office Assistant:

1. From the Planning ribbon, select Approvals .

2. From Manage Approvals , select Out of Office Assistant .

3. From Out of Office Assistant , select I am Currently Out of Office .

4. From Select Action, select an action and next owner for planning units that arrive while you are out of the office.

5. Optional: Enter an annotation.

6. Click Submit .

Related Topics:

Changing Planning Unit Status

Finding Planning Units

Planning Unit Promotional Path

Out of Office Assistant

Monitoring Planning Job Status

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

You view the execution status of Planning jobs and delete them if needed on the Job Console. To check the execution status of jobs:

1. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select More , and then Job Console .

2. By default, all jobs are displayed. To filter the list of jobs, from Filter Criteria, use any of the following job criteria:

- Type : From the drop-down menu, select one of these:

- Business Rule

- Ruleset (for Calculation Manager)

- Sequence (for Business Rules)

- Clear cell detail

- Copy data

- Push data

- Status : From the drop-down menu, select Processing, Completed, or Error.

- Job Name

- User Name

- Start Date

- End Date

3. Click Go . The Job Console displays the jobs matching your selection criteria.

4. Optional: To view the application name and plan type of a job, select the job and click Show Details.

5. Optional: To delete a job, select the job and click Delete .

Searching for a Page in Planning

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

If the Planning administrator sets up multiple page dimensions for a form, you select the page with the data you require from the page drop-down menu. To search for a page in Planning:

1. Click in the page dimension that you want to search to highlight it.

2. From the drop-down menu, select the page name containing the data with which you want to work.

Copying Versions

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

You can copy data from one bottom-up or target version of a selected scenario to another bottom-up or target version within the same scenario. For example, you can create a Best Case version and copy some or all the data in that version to a Worst Case version to quickly create a starting point for the new version.

You can copy between bottom-up and target versions.

- When you copy to a bottom-up version, only the selected level 0 members are copied.

- When you copy to a target version, all selected members are copied.

- To protect data in approved planning units, copying a version does not copy to approved planning units.

Note:

To successfully copy data, when specifying the copy data criteria, you must select at least one member for the Scenario, Account, Entity, Period, and Version dimensions.

To copy a version:

1. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Copy Version .

2. From Scenario , select the scenario to copy.

3. From Copy From , select the source version.

4. From Copy To , select the destination version.

5. Click Go to display the available entities (planning units) for the selected source version.

6. Use the arrow keys to select entities from Available Entities. You can copy entities with a Process Status of Not Started or First Pass.

7. Optional: To copy associated information, select any of these options:

- Copy Account Annotations. Only annotations for selected entities are copied. If you are copying to a bottom-up version, only level 0 entities (and their annotations) are copied.

- Copy Cell text and Document links

- Copy Supporting Details

8. Click Copy Data.

Note:

Wait for the Copy Version completion message before loading another Web page.

Composite Forms

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

To open a Planning composite form:

1. Connect to a Planning data source that contains composite forms.

2. From the Connections tree list, double-click a composite form (indicated by ).

The composite form opens in a new Excel workbook with each subform displayed in a separate worksheet.

Smart View supports Planning master composite forms.

Working with Planning Business Rules

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

In Planning forms and ad hoc grids, you can use business rules to calculate data in Essbase. Some business rules prompt you to enter information, called a runtime prompt .

Related Topics:

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Entering Runtime Prompts

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

To launch a business rule in Excel to recalculate data in Essbase:

1. Open a Planning ad hoc grid or form (single or composite).

2. Save any unsaved data.

Unsaved data is lost when you launch a business rule.

3. From the Planning ribbon, select Calculate , and then Business Rules .

4. From Business Rules , under Plan Type , select the plan type associated with the rule you want to use.

5. Select a rule from the rules listed for that plan type, and then click Launch .

If the business rule includes runtime prompts, enter the information described in step 2 of Entering Runtime Prompts .

Note:

Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud administrators: During form design in Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, rules directly attached to a composite form with Run on Save enabled are not supported in Smart View. You should always attach rules to a simple form, enable Run on Save , then attach the business rules from the simple to the composite form. This way, all runtime prompt values are picked up correctly from the form context and the business rules launch successfully.

If the calculation is successful, the values in the Essbase database reflect the results of the calculation.

6. Click Close .

7. From the Smart View ribbon, select Refresh .

Related Topics:

Entering Runtime Prompts

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Entering Runtime Prompts

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

When launched, a business rule can prompt you to enter variable information, called a runtime prompt . The business rule designer sets up runtime prompts.

To enter a runtime prompt:

1. Launch a business rule having a runtime prompt.

2. Enter or select the input type specified by the runtime prompt, summarized in the following table:

Icon

Expected Input Type

One member selection

Multiple member selections

Numeric value (either entered or selected from cell drop-down menu)

Text value—Use only with enhanced calculation scripts, not with graphical scripts

Dimension from the database—Use only with enhanced calculation scripts, not with graphical scripts

For Calculation Manager business rules only: A member or member combination that includes only one member from each dimension the designer has set for this runtime prompt (for example: Sales -> Actual -> Jan refers to the member intersection of Sales, Actual, and January)

For Calculation Manager business rules only: A range of members, selectable from each dimension the designer has set for this runtime prompt (for example: IDescendants("Marketing"),FY08)

Ensure that the runtime prompts are valid. You cannot launch a business rule until all runtime prompt values are valid.

3. Click Launch .

If the calculation is successful, the values in the database reflect the calculation results.

Related Topics:

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Executing the Calculate Form and Calculate Currencies Business Rules

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

The Calculate Data Form business rule is created for each form to calculate subtotals. The Calculate Currencies business rule is created for forms that include multiple currencies in a row, column, or page to enable the conversion of values among available currencies.

The order in which business rules are launched is important and may affect the data. If you plan to launch both Calculate Data Form and the Calculate Currencies business rules, always run the conversions before subtotaling the form.

To launch the Calculate Data Form and Calculate Currencies business rules in Excel:

1. Open a form.

Any data that is not saved on the spreadsheet is lost when you launch the business rule.

2. From the Planning ribbon, select Calculate , and then Rules on Form .

The business rules associated with the form are displayed in the Business Rules dialog box.

3. Complete one or both of the following actions:

- To convert currencies, select Calculate Currencies .

- To calculate subtotals, select Calculate Data Forms .

4. Click Launch .

If the calculation is successful, the values in the Essbase database reflect the results of the calculation.

Related Topics:

Launching Business Rules in Excel

Entering Runtime Prompts

Spreading Data

Subtopics

- Spreading Data for Time Periods

- Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

- Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Spreading Data for Time Periods

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

In a form, the spreading rules for time periods are set in Planning as part of the as part of the Planning dimension property settings. When you work with a form in Excel, and depending on how the form was set up by the administrator, data values can be spread, or distributed, in several ways:

- Spread the value of a summary time period to its base time periods or to the first parent or first child of the parent time period

- Spread values among children and parents proportionally, based on existing distribution

- Spread values based on the weekly distribution of a quarter, which could be 4-4-5, 5-4-4, 4-5-4, or None (as set up by the budget administrator)

- Temporarily lock the values of certain cells while spreading data over time periods (see Spreading Data with Cell Locking )

- Spread values for different time periods using a different spreading rule for each separate time period on the same row or column dimension. For example, FY2013 can have formula fill, and FY2014 can have flow.

This type of spreading requires Planning Release 11.1.2.3.500 or later.

Notes

- You cannot spread data in a summary time period that includes members with mixed currency types.

- Excel formulas in child cells are ignored during spreading.

To spread data for time periods:

1. Open a form.

2. Select a cell and enter a new value.

The value is distributed according to the rules described in "Adjusting and Spreading Data" in the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide

3. Click Save .

Related Topics:

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

When spreading data over time periods, you can temporarily lock the values of one or more cells to preserve their values when other values are recalculated. You can spread data across time periods based on various calculations and visually review the changes before committing them to the database. For examples of spreading with cell locking, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Users Guide .

To temporarily lock values:

1. Open a form.

2. In the form, select the cell or group of cells that you want to lock.

3. From the Planning ribbon, select Lock .

A color change indicates that a cell is locked. You can now spread or manipulate data in the other cells however you want, without affecting the locked cells.

4. To unlock a cell, refresh the grid.

Related Topics:

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

If your administrator has enabled Grid Spread, you can specify an amount or percentage to increase or decrease values across multiple dimensions on the grid, based on the existing values in the target cells. When calculating the spread data, read-only and locked cells and cells having supporting detail are ignored. Data integrity is ensured because values can be spread only to cells to which you have access.

To spread values using Grid Spread:

1. Put the cursor in the Subtotal or Total source cell whose value you want to spread to target cells.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Adjust , and then Grid Spread.

3. From the drop-down menu, select one of these options:

- Value to increase or decrease values by a specified amount

- Percentage to increase or decrease values by a percentage

4. Select Increase By or Decrease By and enter a value or percentage.

5. In Spread Value , enter the actual spread value that you want.

For example, if the Current Value is 100 and you want the spread value to be 125, enter 125 directly in Spread Value and do nothing with the Increase By / Decrease By options or text box in step 4 .

Alternatively, you can enter 25 in Increase By , and 125 will be displayed in Spread Value .

Note:

Entering a value in Spread Value has no effect on the Increase By / Decrease By text box. But when you enter a value in Increase By / Decrease By , the spread value is reflected in the Spread Value text box.

6. Select a spreading pattern:

- Proportional Spread to spread the value proportionally, based on the existing values in the target cells (the default)

- Evenly Split to spread the value evenly among the target cells

- Fill to replace the value in all target cells

Your administrator can add other spreading patterns.

7. Click Spread . The specified value or percentage is spread across the target cells, replacing former values with new ones.

8. To save the new values, click Save .

Related Topics:

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Spreading Values Using Mass Allocation

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

Using mass allocation, you can spread data to all descendents of a source cell and across all dimensions. Spreading by mass allocation spreads data to cells not displayed on the grid and does not require that you have access to the target cells.

Mass allocation is available only for forms, which must be enabled for mass allocation by the administrator. You must be provisioned with the Mass Allocate role to use mass allocation.

Note:

Mass allocation cannot be undone.

To spread values by mass allocation:

1. Put the cursor in the Total or Subtotal cell whose value you want to spread.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Adjust , and then Mass Allocate .

3. Enter a new value in Spread Value to replace the current value, or from the drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

- Value to increase or decrease values by a specified amount

- Percentage to increase or decrease values by a percentage

4. Select Increase By or Decrease By and enter a value or percentage.

5. In Spread Value , enter the actual spread value that you want.

For example, if the Current Value is 100 and you want the spread value to be 125, enter 125 directly in Spread Value and do nothing with the Increase By / Decrease By options or text box in step 4 .

Alternatively, you can enter 25 in Increase By , and 125 will be displayed in Spread Value .

Note:

Entering a value in Spread Value has no effect on the Increase By / Decrease By text box. But when you enter a value in Increase By / Decrease By , the spread value is reflected in the Spread Value text box.

6. Select the Spread Type for allocating the specified value or percentage across the target cells:

- Proportional Spread to spread the value proportionally, based on the existing values in the target cells (the default)

- Evenly Split to spread the value evenly among the target cells

- Fill to replace the value in all target cells

- Relational Spread to spread into the selected cells based on values that exist in a different source location. Selecting this option displays the currently selected members for each dimension in the Selected column.

Your administrator can add other spreading patterns.

7. Click Spread. The new values are automatically saved.

Related Topics:

Spreading Data with Cell Locking

Spreading Values Using Grid Spread

Member Formula

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

Note:

In the Planning web interface, the Member Formulas property must be enabled in the form before you can view formulas in Smart View. Users with the proper permissions should open the form in Planning, go to the Layout tab, then Dimension Properties , and then select Member Formulas .

You can view the underlying formula in cells that contain a formula. Such cells can be indicated on the grid by a cell style specified in the Options window. To view a member formula:

1. Select the member whose formula you want to view.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select More , and then Member Formula .

Details of the formula are displayed.

Supporting Detail

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

Supporting detail serves as a built-in calculator for developing data that is not in the member outline. It can include text, values, and operators that define how data aggregates.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Adding Supporting Detail

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

Use the Supporting Detail window to set how detail items aggregate to cell values in a form.

To add supporting detail that calculates values in a form or ad hoc grid:

1. Open a form, and then select the cells.

You can select one cell or a range of contiguous cells in a row or column. The section cannot include a combination of rows and columns. Select cells that are in the local currency so that you can write to them.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Cell Actions and then Supporting Detail .

The Supporting Detail window reflects your cell selection.

3. Enter a description over the initial "untitled" text.

The text and its associated operator must be unique among children of the same parent. By default, you can enter up to 1,500 characters.

4. Use the buttons to create or change the indented hierarchy to reflect the desired structure and calculations.

For example, click Add Child to add a line item directly below the selected item.

5. Set the mathematical relationships among the line items by selecting an operator for each of them.

Select from these operators: + (add), - (subtract), * (multiply), / (divide), and ~ (ignore).

6. Enter data to set or calculate.

Enter numbers using the same scaling that was set up for the form.

7. Click Save .

Values are dynamically calculated and aggregated before the data is saved. Data on the form is also saved.

Related Topics:

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

The supporting detail hierarchy should reflect the type of information that supports the cell values and the mathematical operators that create the relationships.

To create or change the supporting detail hierarchy:

1. In a form, select the cells with supporting detail.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Supporting Detail .

3. Create or change the rows in the hierarchy that provide the detail for the data values by putting the cursor on an item and clicking the options in this table:

Option

Result

Add Child

Adds an item one level below the selected cell. You can add an unlimited number of children, but consider its potential performance impact.

Add Sibling

Adds an item at the same level as the selected cell. You can add an unlimited number of siblings, but consider its potential performance impact.

Delete

Removes the selected item

Delete All

Simultaneously removes all supporting detail

Promote

Moves the selected item to the next-higher level

Demote

Moves the selected item to the next-lower level

Move Up

Moves the selected item to before its sibling predecessor

Move Down

Moves the selected item to after its sibling successor

Duplicate Row

Adds a row below the selected item, duplicating its structure (text, operator, and values)

Fill

For rows, copies the data from the current cell to the cells to its right

Refresh

Gets the latest stored database values, restoring the previously saved values, and possibly overwriting changes you just made.

4. Click Save .

The save operation stores the detail text, values, and aggregate values.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

Cells that contain supporting detail can be indicated on the grid by a cell style specified in the Options dialog box.

To view or change calculations or supporting data:

1. Open a form, and select the cells for which to view or add detail.

You can select one cell or a range of contiguous cells in a row or column. The section cannot include a combination of rows and columns. Select cells that are in the local currency so that you can write to them.

2. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Supporting Detail .

3. View or change the line items or calculations that aggregate the data in the selected cells.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Synchronizing Supporting Detail with Essbase

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

In Planning applications, when you delete supporting detail for a cell, you affect the associated value in the relational database. You specify how to handle the stored Essbase value. You can set it to #Missing or leave it as it was before the supporting detail was deleted. This feature is useful if you want to use supporting detail as a scratch pad or calculator.

To synchronize supporting detail with Essbase:

1. Open a form.

2. In the form, click the cell that has the supporting detail you want to remove.

3. From the Planning or Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Supporting Detail .

4. In the Supporting Detail window, delete the information, and then click OK .

5. Select an option from the displayed message to specify how to handle the aggregate value of the deleted supporting detail stored in Essbase:

- To delete the value from Essbase, click Yes, set the value(s) to #Missing.

- To leave the data value in Essbase as is, click No, leave the value(s) as is.

Related Topics:

Adding Supporting Detail

Working with the Supporting Detail Hierarchy

Viewing or Changing Supporting Detail

Setting Planning Preferences

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

If you are unfamiliar with Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, see the Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documentation and videos available on the Oracle Help Center.

To set user preferences for a Planning application:

1. From the tree list in the Smart View Panel, select an application.

2. Right-click, and then select User Preferences .

3. From Preferences , specify options for the following

- Application Settings: Email, alias and workflow options.

- Display Settings: Formatting, page, and other options.

- User Variables: Variables set up by the Planning to help you navigate large forms and grids.

Saving Native Excel Formatting to Planning

Subtopics

- Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

- Viewing Formatting in Smart View

- Clearing Formatting

- Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

- Supported Native Excel Formatting

- Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Smart View provides a way for users to save native Excel formatting back to the Planning server as part of a form or ad hoc grid. The saved formatting is applied in both the Planning browser interface and when the form is rendered within Excel. You can then choose how to display the formatting in Smart View. This functionality is in addition to the existing Smart View cell styles functionality.

See also Cell Styles .

These formatting options are available in the Formatting group of the Planning ribbon, shown in Figure 86, Formatting Options .

Figure 86. Formatting Options

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

To save Excel formatting on a Planning form:

1. Open a Planning form for editing in Smart View.

2. Use native Excel formatting features to apply the formatting to the sheet.

3. On the Planning ribbon, select Save from the Formatting group.

4. Go to Viewing Formatting in Smart View to choose a viewing option.

Related Topics:

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Once a form is rendered within Excel, Smart View provides the options to view the formatting on a sheet. These options are accessed from the Apply button within the Formatting group on the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon.

Tip:

The Apply options are viewing options only and allow you to display the cell styles and native Excel formatting that were previously saved on a form.

To toggle between formatting view options on a Planning form:

1. Open a Planning form and click the Apply button within the Formatting group on the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon (see Figure 87, Apply Options ).

The Apply options are displayed. The initial state before any option is selected is that no option is selected. Once an option is selected, the last option selection will be preserved the next time the form is opened.

Figure 87. Apply Options

2. Select an option:

- None —Applies no styles (Excel formatting or Smart View cell styles) to the sheet. Though cell styles or custom styles may exist on the sheet, neither are shown when selecting this option. They are preserved, however, if you want to display them later using the Cell styles , Custom styles , or Custom and cell styles options.

- Cell styles —Applies only Smart View cell styles to the sheet, as described in the " Cell Styles " topic.

- Custom styles —Applies only custom user-defined native Excel formatting to the sheet.

- Custom and cell styles —Applies both Excel formatting and Smart View cell styles to the sheet. Note that when you select Custom and cell styles , cell styles take precedent over custom Excel formatting.

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Clearing Formatting

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

To clear the formatting associated with a form or ad hoc grid, select Clear from the Formatting group on the Planning ribbon.

Selecting the Clear option removes any Excel formatting associated with the form or grid on the Planning server. Note that you can still work with cell styles functionality since cell styles are not dependent on any custom formatting that is saved.

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

To save formatting from an ad hoc grid:

1. Perform ad hoc analysis to create a grid to save.

2. Use Excel native formatting features to format the grid.

3. From the Planning Ad Hoc ribbon, select Save Ad Hoc Grid .

4. In the Save Grid As dialog box, select the Submit Formatting option when saving the ad hoc grid as a form.

You can now open the saved form and choose a viewing option as described in Viewing Formatting in Smart View .

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Table 12 summarizes the native Excel formatting supported by Planning forms in Smart View, and whether the formatting is supported when the form is viewed in the Planning web application.

Table 12. Supported Native Excel Formatting

Formatting

Smart View

Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Font

Font family

Yes

Yes

Font size

Yes

Yes

Bold

Yes

Yes

Italic

Yes

Yes

Strikethrough

Yes

No

Underline

Only single and Continuous

No

Text color

Red, Green, and Blue

Red, Green, and Blue

Background color

Plain, Solid, and Red, Green, and Blue

Plain, Red, Green, and Blue

Alignment

Vertical

Top, Center, and Bottom

No

Horizontal

Left, Center, and Right

No

Indent

Only Left Indent and five levels of indent

No

Word wrap

Yes

No

Borders

Border color

Yes, can be set differently for each cells four borders, and Red, Green, and Blue

Yes

Border width

Yes, in points

Yes

Border style

None, Solid, double, Dotted, Dash, Dash-Dot, Dash-Dot-Dot

None, Solid

Number and date format

Number format

Decimal places, negative and positive suffixes and prefixes, negative and positive color, eight colors, Percentage, scientific format, presence of thousand separator

No

Date format

Long and Short Dates, Hours, Minutes, Seconds, AM and PM

No

Miscellaneous

Read-only

Yes

No

Column width and row height

Yes, in points

No

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Guidelines for Working with Native Excel Formatting and Planning Forms

Data source types: Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

- When designing a grid, care should be taken to avoid conflicts between custom Excel formatting and Smart View cell styles.

- For some ad hoc analysis operations, not all Excel formatting may be preserved. You may need to reapply formatting after performing certain operations.

- When a saved ad hoc grid is opened, Smart View tries to preserve the formatting that was saved on the Planning server. For further ad hoc operations, existing formatting options apply; for example, Use Excel formatting or cell styles.

- To preserve custom Excel formatting on ad hoc operations, select the Use Excel Formatting and the Move formatting on operations options on the Formatting page of the Options dialog box.

- Formatting can affect performance, especially during ad hoc operations when the Move formatting on operations option is enabled.

- Saving formatting is not recommended on large forms (for example, forms of 20,000 or more cells).

- There are differences between grids rendered in Smart View and those rendered in the browser in Planning. When a saved grid is rendered in Planning, some formatting may not appear exactly as it does in Smart View. Planning will attempt to approximate the Smart View formatting.

- The Planning administrator may have defined certain formatting on a form. Planning end users can overwrite this formatting and save it on the form. It can then be merged with the administrators formatting based on the option selected for this form in Planning by the administrator. Refer to the Planning documentation for more information.

- Save formatting functionality is not supported on composite Planning forms.

- Ad hoc analysis started from a saved Planning grid will inherit the formatting options saved as part of the grid.

To use Smart View Cell Styles or the Use Excel Formatting option for an ad hoc grid generated from a saved grid, complete the following steps:

1. Open the saved Planning grid as a form.

2. In the Planning ribbon, Formatting group, select Apply , and then None .

3. Click Save to save the form back to the Planning server.

4. Now use the saved form to perform ad hoc analysis.

Related Topics:

Saving Excel Formatting on a Planning Form

Viewing Formatting in Smart View

Clearing Formatting

Saving Excel Formatting From an Ad Hoc Grid

Supported Native Excel Formatting

Smart View and Reporting and Analysis

In This Section:

Importing Reporting and Analysis Documents

Editing and Refreshing Documents

Refreshing Reporting and Analysis Documents

Financial Reporting and Web Analysis Import Formats

Importing Interactive Reporting Documents

Importing Financial Reporting Documents

Importing Production Reporting Documents

Importing Web Analysis Documents

Note:

In this chapter, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

Importing Reporting and Analysis Documents

Using Smart View, you can import Reporting and Analysis documents into Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint.

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

Table 13. Reporting and Analysis Applications

Reporting and Analysis Application

What You Can Import

Financial Reporting
On-Premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Reports

Oracle Hyperion Web Analysis

Reports

Oracle Hyperion Interactive Reporting

Reports

Charts

Dashboards

Using the latest run of BQY jobs, Interactive Reporting supports refresh capabilities

Oracle Hyperion SQR Production Reporting

Jobs

Job outputs

Related Topics:

Importing Financial Reporting Documents

Importing Web Analysis Documents

Importing Interactive Reporting Documents

Importing Production Reporting Documents

Editing and Refreshing Documents

In Office, you can edit and refresh documents that were previously imported from EPM Workspace and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud. The Smart View ribbon or menu provides the following edit and refresh options:

- Edit—change filters, POVs, or parameters of embedded EPM Workspace and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documents.

- Refresh—refresh the selected job with the latest EPM Workspace and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud data. Only the job selected in Office is updated; not the entire Office document.

- Refresh All— update all jobs in the Office document.

General edit and refresh behavior

- When you refresh an imported document in which pages have been deleted, only the remaining pages are refreshed. The deleted pages are not reinstated.

- If editing or refreshing results in fewer pages in an imported document, the removed pages display as blanks pages in Office.

- If editing or refreshing results in more pages in an imported document, those pages are appended to the document in Office.

- Formatting headings and comments are retained when you refresh in Word and PowerPoint but not when you refresh in Excel.

Maintaining cell references during document refresh

In Excel, a customized worksheet that references imported document cells or ranges is updated when you execute a Refresh All on the imported documents. For example, imported worksheet A and B are referenced in customized worksheet C. When you execute Refresh All on worksheet A and B, worksheet C is refreshed with updated data from worksheets A and B.

Refreshing Reporting and Analysis Documents

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

Refreshing updates the report with the latest data from EPM Workspace and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud.

Refresh behavior in Production Reporting and Interactive Reporting

- In Word, if a report is selected, the entire report is refreshed. If no report is selected, the first report found in the document is refreshed. The first report is not necessarily the report at the beginning of the document.

- In PowerPoint, if no report is selected, the first report found in the slide is updated.

When refreshing job outputs in Production Reporting, new outputs in EPM Workspace are updated.

Refresh behaviors in Financial Reporting and Web Analysis

- You must select a page in the report to refresh. In Word and PowerPoint, if you do not select any pages when refreshing, a message is displaying stating that no pages are updated.

- If you select Refresh, all pages of the report are refreshed. If you select Refresh All, then all reports in the document are refreshed.

To refresh EPM Workspace and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud documents in Excel, Word, or PowerPoint, perform an action:

- To update the selected Reporting and Analysis document, including all pages associated with that document, select Refresh on the Smart View ribbon.

- To update all Reporting and Analysis documents, select Refresh All on the Smart View ribbon.

Refreshing Reporting and Analysis documents against Essbase or Financial Management connections

Refreshing against Essbase or Financial Management connections updates the report with the latest data from the provider and enables you to perform ad hoc analysis on the Reporting and Analysis document, such as retrieving, zooming, or pivoting data.

Perform a Refresh on an imported report before you begin working on it in query-ready mode to ensure that the report and the POV are in sync.

Refresh for a report imported in query-ready HTML applies to the current page and not all pages.

Related Topics

Editing Interactive Reporting Documents

Editing Financial Reporting Documents

Editing Production Reporting Jobs

Editing Web Analysis Documents

Financial Reporting and Web Analysis Import Formats

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

You can import Financial Reporting and Web Analysis documents as fully-formatted HTML, which you can display in Excel, or in query-ready HTML, which enables you to connect to Financial Management or Essbase data sources and run queries.

Perform a Refresh on an imported report before you begin working on it in query-ready mode to ensure that the report and the POV are in sync.

When you import Reporting and Analysis documents as query-ready HTML, the selected pages of the current data object are converted to HTML, and Smart View-specific formatting is removed. Thus, Smart View can re-query the data source independent of the Web application.

When you import Oracle Hyperion Reporting and Analysis documents as fully formatted HTML, the selected pages of the current data object are converted to HTML, and Smart View formatting definitions and calculated members are retained. Thus, Smart View cannot directly query the data source, but Smart View content can be leveraged by Microsoft Office applications.

Tip:

After importing an image in Word or PowerPoint, use the Office Format Picture option to format it; for example, to crop and resize. The Format Picture settings are preserved, even after you refresh the image.

Importing Interactive Reporting Documents

- Importing Interactive Reporting Documents into Excel

- Importing Interactive Reporting Documents into Word and PowerPoint

- Editing Interactive Reporting Documents

Imported Interactive Reporting documents are section-specific.

Table 14. Interactive Reporting Import Object Types

Section

Excel

Word, PowerPoint

Table

Formatted data

N/A

Results

Formatted data

N/A

Chart

Formatted data

Image

Pivot

Formatted data

N/A

Report

Formatted data

Image

Dashboard

Image

Image

Query

N/A

N/A

CubeQuery

Query ready (Internet Explorer only, not supported by Firefox)

Formatted data

N/A

Data model

N/A

N/A

The following restrictions apply when Interactive Reporting documents are imported into Excel:

- Hidden sections are displayed during import.

- Importing dashboard sections into Excel resizes A1 cells.

- Importing report sections into Excel places chart images before tables

- Importing into Excel may not preserve colors correctly.

- Results sections that contain the euro currency format do not import into Excel.

- Results sections with + (plus sign) in their name do not import.

Importing Interactive Reporting Documents into Excel

To import Interactive Reporting documents into Excel:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, connect to a EPM Workspace data source.

3. Navigate to the Interactive Reporting document that you want to import.

4. From the Action Panel, click Open.

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

Note:

Some wizard screens do not apply to some documents.

5. In Sections , select the section for importing.

6. In Actions , select an option:

- Refresh and Preview , to change filters or values prior to previewing the document

- Preview , to preview the document with default settings

If you are importing a CubeQuery section in query ready format, do not select this option.

7. Click Next .

8. If you selected Preview in step 6 , skip to step 11 . If you select Refresh and Preview , continue with the next step.

9. If user authentication is required to change filters, such as variable, value, or option in the documents settings, in Specify Database Credentials , enter the username and password , and select Next .

The connection name is displayed in parentheses (for example, Sample.oce).

10. In Specify Filters , select a value and click Next .

11. To import all pages of the document, leave the All Pages field check enabled.

12. If your document contains multiple pages, select Split pages across worksheets to display each page on a separate Excel worksheet.

13. From the Import Section As drop-down, select one of the following:

- Data to import content as query-ready HTML. The current page of the current CubeQuery section is converted to HTML and Smart View formatting is removed. This enables you to requery the data source independent of the Web application.

- Image to import content as formatted HTML. The current page of the CubeQuery section is converted to HTML with Smart View formatting definitions and calculated members. Smart View does not directly query the data source. This option is available only for a CubeQuery section for Refresh and Preview .

14. Click Finish .

The document is displayed in Excel.

Importing Interactive Reporting Documents into Word and PowerPoint

To import Interactive Reporting documents into Word:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, connect to a EPM Workspace data source.

3. Navigate to the Interactive Reporting document that you want to import.

4. From the Action Panel, click Open.

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

Note:

Some wizard screens do not apply to some documents.

5. In Select an Action , select an option:

- Refresh and Preview , to change filters or values prior to previewing the document

- Preview , to preview the document with default settings

6. Click Next .

7. If you selected Refresh and Preview :

a. If user authentication is required to change filters, such as variable, value, or option in the document settings, in Specify Database Credentials , enter the user name and password, and click Next .

The connection name is displayed in parentheses (for example, Sample.oce ).

b. In Specify Filters , select a value.

8. Click Apply , and click Next .

9. In Preview , to import a page, select a page from the drop-down list located in the upper left of the data object.

10. Optional: To import all pages of the document, select All Pages .

11. Click Finish .

The document is imported.

Editing Interactive Reporting Documents

To edit Interactive Reporting documents in Excel, Word, and PowerPoint:

1. Open the Interactive Reporting document to edit.

2. From the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow in , then select Reporting and Analysis Document , and then Edit .

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

Note:

Some wizard screens do not apply to some documents.

3. If you selected Refresh and Preview :

a. If user authentication is required to change filters, such as variable, value, or option in the document settings, in Specify Database Credentials , enter the user name and password, and click Next .

The connection name is displayed in parentheses (for example, Sample.oce ).

b. In Specify Filters , select a value.

4. Click Apply , and click Next .

5. In Preview , to import a page, select a page from the drop-down list located in the upper left of the data object.

6. Click Finish .

Importing Financial Reporting Documents

- Financial Reporting and Web Analysis Import Formats

- Importing Financial Reporting Documents into Excel

- Importing Financial Reporting Documents into Word and PowerPoint

- Editing Financial Reporting Documents

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

Table 15. Financial Reporting Import Document Types

Document Type

Excel

Word, PowerPoint

Report

Fully Formatted, Query-Ready, Function Grid

Image, Function Grid

Snapshot report

Fully Formatted

Image

Book

N/A

N/A

Snapshot Book

N/A

N/A

Batch

N/A

N/A

Grid Object

N/A

N/A

Image Object

N/A

N/A

Chart Object

N/A

N/A

Text Object

N/A

N/A

Row and Column template

N/A

N/A

Importing Financial Reporting Documents into Excel

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

To import Financial Reporting documents into Excel:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, connect to an EPM Workspace data source.

3. Navigate to the Financial Reporting document that you want to import.

4. From the Action Panel, click Open.

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

Note:

Some wizard screens do not apply to some documents.

5. In Select a Document , expand the repository, select a Financial Reporting document, and click OK .

The document is previewed in the Import Workspace Document window.

Note:

Some options may not be available for some documents.

6. If Preview User Point of View is displayed, preview the current POV or change the members of the POV.

Note:

To display this screen, select Preview in EPM Workspace preferences, for User Point of View.

7. Click Next .

8. Optional: If you want to change the default value, in Respond to Prompts , make a selection for prompts, and click Next .

Note:

This screen is displayed only if the document contains prompts.

9. Optional: In Preview from Grid POV , change the POV by selecting a POV.

10. Change the page dimension by selecting Page .

11. To import all pages of the document, select All Pages .

12. Optional: To refresh the Financial Reporting document using the EPM Workspace Point of View, select Refresh Using Workspace Point of View .

13. In Import Document As , select an option:

- Fully-Formatted —displays reports in a fully-formatted HTML.

- Query-Ready —enables you to run ad hoc analysis on reports when connected to Financial Management and Essbase data sources.

Note:

Perform a Refresh on an imported report before you begin working on it in query-ready mode to ensure that the report and the POV are in sync.

- Function Grid —a dynamic grid format, allows you to further select a report option, as described in step 18 .

14. To display each page on a separate Excel worksheet, select Split Pages across worksheets .

Note:

This option available only if you selected Fully-Formatted in step 13 .

15. Click Finish .

Your next steps depend on the option you selected in step 13 :

If you selected:

- Fully-Formatted —the document is imported into the Office application, and you can only view the Reporting and Analysis document.

- Query-Ready —the document is imported into the Office application, and you can now connect to a Financial Management or Essbase data source, where you can perform ad hoc analysis, such as retrieving, zooming, or pivoting data.

- Function Grid —continue with step 16 .

16. Click to refresh the Document Contents pane.

17. Select the function grid object in Document Contents , right-click and select Insert New Reporting Object/Control .

18. From the Insert New Reporting Object/Control dialog box, select one of these report types to place on the grid:

- Function Grid — a dynamic grid format

When you refresh a function grid, data cells are refreshed; members are not. To refresh both data and members, you must reinsert the function grid into the sheet. For this reason, function grids are most useful for reports in which members remain reasonably static. For reports whose members may change more often, tables and charts are better report types. Although you can have multiple reports on a worksheet, you can have only one function grid.

You can use Excel formulas, for example SUM, with function grids. To retain such formulas as part of the function grid, you must leave one empty row between the grid and the cell containing the formula and include the empty row in the range of cells selected for the formula definition. This permits retention of the formula when refreshing the data results in a different number of rows in the grid.

To format a function grid, use Excel formatting capabilities.

- Table

Table reports display results in a grid format that floats on the document and can be moved and re-sized. When you refresh a table, both members and data are refreshed. Tables are useful for displaying large grids in a smaller space; their scroll bars enable you to quickly access rows and columns.

You can zoom in and out in a table report, but you cannot perform other ad hoc operations or use free form.

- Chart

Chart reports display results in a chart format that floats on the document and can be moved and re-sized. When you refresh a chart, both members and data are refreshed.

19. Optional: To move or resize a table or chart, in Document Contents , click the down arrow next to , and from the menu, select Toggle Design Mode .

You can now move objects within the sheet, slide, or page.

When you are ready to exit design mode, select Toggle Design Mode again.

20. Refresh.

21. Optional: To create a separate report for any or all of the members of one dimension in the report and cascade these reports separately across the worksheets of the workbook, see Cascading Reports and Ad Hoc Grids .

Note:

In reports that contain a chart and a table, cascading may cause the chart and table to overlap the next time you open the workbook.

Importing Financial Reporting Documents into Word and PowerPoint

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

To import Financial Reporting documents into Word and PowerPoint:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, connect to a EPM Workspace data source.

3. Navigate to the Financial Reporting document that you want to import.

4. From the Action Panel, click Open.

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

5. In Select a Document , expand the repository, select a Financial Reporting document, then click OK .

The document is previewed in the Import Workspace Document window.

Note:

Some screens do not apply to some documents.

6. If the Preview User Point of View screen is displayed, preview the current POV or change the members of the POV by selecting a member.

Note:

To display this screen, select Preview in EPM Workspace preferences, for User Point of View.

7. Optional: If you want to change the default value, in Respond to Prompts , make a selection for prompts, and click Next .

Note:

This screen is displayed only if the document contains prompts.

8. In Preview from Grid POV , change the POV by selecting a POV.

Note:

Some wizard screens do not apply to some documents.

9. Change the page dimension by selecting Page .

10. Select All Pages to import all pages of the document.

11. Optional: To refresh the Financial Reporting document using the EPM Workspace Point of View, select Refresh Using Workspace Point of View .

12. In Import Document As , select an option:

- Image —To import the document as an image.

- Function Grid —To import a dynamic grid format, which allows you to further select a report option, as described in step 18 (available in Word only).

13. Click Finish .

Your next steps depend on the option you selected in step 12 :

If you selected:

- Image —The report is imported into the document as an image and you can only view the Reporting and Analysis image in the Word.

- Function Grid —Continue with step 14 (Word only).

14. Click to refresh the Document Contents pane.

15. Select the report object in Document Contents , right-click and select Insert New Reporting Object/Control .

16. From the Insert New Reporting Object/Control dialog box, select one of these report types to place on the grid:

- Function Grid —a dynamic grid format

When you refresh a function grid, data cells are refreshed; members are not. To refresh both data and members, you must reinsert the function grid into the sheet. For this reason, function grids are most useful for reports in which members remain reasonably static. For reports whose members may change more often, tables and charts are better report types. Although you can have multiple reports on a worksheet, you can have only one function grid.

You can use Excel formulas, for example SUM, with function grids. To retain such formulas as part of the function grid, you must leave one empty row between the grid and the cell containing the formula and include the empty row in the range of cells selected for the formula definition. This permits retention of the formula when refreshing the data results in a different number of rows in the grid.

To format a function grid, use Excel formatting capabilities.

- Office Table

Office tables can be used with Word only. Office tables display results in native Microsoft Office table format. When you refresh an Office table, both members and data are refreshed.

Office tables look and feel like part of the Word document, but the members and data in the table cells are connected to the Smart View provider. With Office tables, you can work with the Word table formatting and styles that you are accustomed to. Insert a POV object into the report and you can change the POV of the Office table. Refresh the Office table after changing formatting or POV and the new POV is reflected in the results and custom formatting is retained.

You cannot zoom in or out in an Office table object, and you cannot perform other ad hoc operations or use free form.

- Table

Table reports display results in a grid format that floats on the document and can be moved and re-sized. When you refresh a table, both members and data are refreshed. Tables are useful for displaying large grids in a smaller space; their scroll bars enable you to quickly access rows and columns.

You can zoom in and out in a table report, but you cannot perform other ad hoc operations or use free form.

- Chart

Chart reports display results in a chart format that floats on the document and can be moved and re-sized. When you refresh a chart, both members and data are refreshed.

17. Optional: To move or re-size a table or chart, in Document Contents , click the down arrow next to , and from the menu, select Toggle Design Mode .

You can now move objects within the sheet, slide, or page.

When you are ready to exit design mode, select Toggle Design Mode again.

18. Refresh.

Editing Financial Reporting Documents

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

To edit Financial Reporting documents in Excel, Word, and PowerPoint:

1. Open the Financial Reporting document to edit.

2. From the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow in , then select Reporting and Analysis Document , and then Edit .

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

Note:

Some wizard screens do not apply to some documents.

3. If the Preview User Point of View screen is displayed, preview the current POV or change the members of the POV.

Note:

To display this screen, in EPM Workspace preferences, select Preview for User Point of View.

4. Optional: In documents that contain prompts, to change the default value, in Respond to Prompts , make a selection for prompts, and click Next .

Note:

Respond to Prompts is displayed only if the document contains prompts.

5. To change the POV, in Preview from Grid POV select a POV.

6. Click Finish .

Creating Templates in PowerPoint Documents

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

You can create PowerPoint template documents that can be saved by importing one or more Financial Reporting reports to the presentation. Every Create Template action creates a new PowerPoint slide with a report name to show where it will be placed when Refresh Template is used.

To create a template:

1. Open PowerPoint.

2. Connect to a Reporting and Analysis provider.

3. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel , then Reporting and Analysis Document , and then Create Template .

4. In Import Workspace Document , select a Financial Reporting document.

- Optional: To import all pages of the document, select All Pages . A separate slide is created for each page.

- To import the current screen presentation, clear All Pages .

5. Optional: To use the Workspace point of view, select Refresh Using Workspace Point of View.

6. Click OK . The document name is imported into the PowerPoint presentation.

Refreshing PowerPoint Templates

Note:

In this topic, references to Financial Reporting apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Financial Reporting.

To refresh a template:

1. Open the PowerPoint presentation containing the template.

2. Connect to a Reporting and Analysis provider.

3. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel , then Reporting and Analysis Document , and then Refresh Template .

4. Edit and save the PowerPoint presentation as needed.

Importing Production Reporting Documents

Production Reporting documents consist of jobs and job outputs, which you can import into Excel, Word, and PowerPoint.

- Importing Production Reporting Jobs into Excel

- Importing Production Reporting Jobs into Word and PowerPoint

- Importing Production Reporting Job Outputs into Word, and PowerPoint

- Editing Production Reporting Jobs

Table 16.  Production Reporting Import Object Types

Object Type

Excel

Word, PowerPoint

Job

Formatted data

Image

Job output

Formatted data

Image

Some limitations exist for importing:

- Images and charts are not imported into Excel.

- Secure jobs are supported, but jobs imported as generic jobs are not supported.

Importing Production Reporting Jobs into Excel

To import Production Reporting jobs into Excel:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, connect to a EPM Workspace data source.

3. Navigate to the Oracle Hyperion Interactive Reporting document that you want to import.

4. From the Action Panel, click Open.

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

5. In Select a Document , expand the repository, select a Production Reporting job, then click OK .

The import wizard screen is displayed.

Note:

Depending on the document, some screens may not be applicable.

6. If the Specify Parameters screen is displayed, define the job parameters, and click Next .

Note:

This screen is displayed only if the job contains parameters.

7. In Preview , to import a page, select a page from the drop-down list located in the upper left of the data object.

8. To import all pages of the job, select All Pages .

9. Select Split Pages across worksheets to display each page on a separate Excel worksheet.

10. Click Finish .

The document is displayed in Excel.

Importing Production Reporting Jobs into Word and PowerPoint

The procedures for importing Production Reporting jobs into Word and PowerPoint are similar.

To import Production Reporting jobs into Word and PowerPoint:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, connect to a EPM Workspace data source.

3. Navigate to the Production Reporting document that you want to import.

4. From the Action Panel, click Open.

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

5. In Select a Document , expand the repository, select a Reporting and Analysis document, then click OK .

The import wizard is displayed.

Note:

Some screens may not apply to some documents.

6. If the Specify Parameters screen is displayed, define the job parameters, and click Next .

Note:

This screen is displayed only if the job contains parameters.

7. In Preview , to import a page, select a page from the drop-down list located in the upper left of the data object.

8. To import all pages of the job, select All Pages .

For Word, Split pages across pages is disabled. For PowerPoint, Split pages across slides is selected and disabled because by default, the pages from jobs or job outputs always split across pages and slides.

9. Click Finish .

The job is imported.

Importing Production Reporting Job Outputs into Word, and PowerPoint

To import Production Reporting job outputs into Excel, Word, and PowerPoint:

1. Connect to a EPM Workspace data source.

2. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel , then Reporting and Analysis Document , and then Import .

The Import Workspace Document dialog box is displayed.

3. In Select a Document , expand the repository, select a Production Reporting job output, then click OK .

The job output is imported.

Editing Production Reporting Jobs

You can edit imported Production Reporting jobs, but not job outputs. You can edit only job parameters.

To edit Production Reporting jobs:

1. Open an imported Oracle Hyperion SQR Production Reporting document.

2. From the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow in , then select Reporting and Analysis Document , and then Edit .

The Import Workspace Document dialog box is displayed.

3. If the Specify Parameters screen is displayed, define the job parameters, and click Next .

Note:

This screen is displayed only if the job contains parameters.

4. In Preview . view the job.

Note:

If you deleted any imported pages, edit updates only the remaining pages of the job.

5. Click Finish .

The job is updated.

Importing Web Analysis Documents

Web Analysis includes five data object display types, but Smart View can import only three (spreadsheet, chart, and pinboard). Smart View cannot import free-form grid and SQL spreadsheets.

See Financial Reporting and Web Analysis Import Formats .

- Importing a Web Analysis Document or Document Objects

- Editing Web Analysis Documents

Table 17.  Web Analysis Import Document Type

Document Type

Excel

Word, PowerPoint

Report

Fully formatted, query-ready

Image

Table 18.  Web Analysis Import Data Object Type

Data Object

Excel

Word, PowerPoint

Spreadsheet

Data + formatting

Image

Chart

Data + formatting

Image

Pinboard

Data + formatting

Image

Importing a Web Analysis Document or Document Objects

Using Smart View in Excel, you can import one or all document pages or multiple data objects with one or more pages from a Web Analysis document residing in the Workspace repository. All Web Analysisdata objects (spreadsheet, chart, pinboard) are imported as Excel spreadsheets. Freeform Grid and SQL spreadsheets cannot be imported.

To import Web Analysis data objects:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, connect to a EPM Workspace data source.

3. Navigate to the Web Analysis document that you want to import.

4. From the Action Panel, click Open.

The Import Workspace Document wizard is displayed.

5. In Select a Document , expand the repository, select a Web Analysis document, and click OK .

6. If database credentials are not saved with the Web Analysis document, then the Specify Database Credentials page is displayed where you are required to enter valid log on credentials to data sources used in the report. If a report has only one data source and you skip entering credentials, the report is not imported. If you have data objects with different data sources in one report and only want to import one of the data objects, you can enter the credentials for the data objects you want to import and skip credential for the data object you do not wish to import. Enter the user name and password or select Skip to skip entering credentials to any of the data sources, and click Next .

Tip:

Select Save Credentials to save credentials with a Web Analysis document. It enables you to refresh an imported document later. Currently, you cannot refresh imported documents without saving credentials.

7. In Preview , when selecting objects to import for Microsoft Excel, Word, and PowerPoint:

- Select individual data objects, by clicking the check box located in the top left corner of each report object OR select all data objects by clicking the All Objects check box.

- Select Split Objects across worksheets to create a new worksheet for each report object OR deselect Split Objects across worksheets to placed all report objects in the same worksheet.

- Select a page to import from the drop-down list located in the top of each selected to import data objects OR select All Pages to import all pages of all selected to import data objects.

- Select Split Pages across Worksheets to create a new worksheet for each import page OR deselect Split Pages across Worksheets to place all imported pages of each data object in the same worksheet.

8. In Preview, when selecting object to import for Microsoft Word and PowerPoint, select Import Screen to import a screen print of the entire report.

9. For Microsoft Excel, In Import Document As , select an option:

- Fully Formatted (imports reports in fully-formatted HTML). You can connect to EPM System at any time and refresh the imported document for current data.

- Query-Ready (imports reports in query-ready HTML). You can connect to Financial Management or Essbasedata source to get data directly and perform ad hoc analysis, such as retrieving, zooming, and pivoting data.

10. Click Finish . The document is imported. You can then connect to EPM System at any time and refresh the imported document with current data.

Editing Web Analysis Documents

To edit Web Analysis documents:

1. Select a page (Excel) or an image (Word or PowerPoint).

2. From the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow in , then select Reporting and Analysis Document , and then Edit .

3. If database credentials are not saved with the Web Analysis document, then the Specify Database Credentials page is displayed. In Specify Database Credentials , enter the user name and password, or select Skip , and then click Next .

Tip:

You can select Save Credentials to save them with the Oracle Hyperion Web Analysis document.

4. Select a spreadsheet, chart, or pinboard to import.

5. In Preview , to import a page, select a page from the drop-down list located in the upper left of the data object.

6. Select All Pages to import all pages of the document. Leave the box cleared to import only the current page.

7. Select Split Pages across worksheets to display each page on a separate worksheet (Excel only).

8. In Import Document As , select:

- Fully Formatted (Excel only)

- Query-Ready (Excel only)

- Image (Word and PowerPoint)

9. Click Finish .

Smart View and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

In This Section:

About Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

Setting Up Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Smart View

Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View

Using Performance Reporting Home

Authoring Doclets

Performing Reviews

Performing Sign Offs

Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Data in Smart View

About Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

With Smart View and the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud extension, you use familiar Microsoft Office tools to access and work with data in Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud.

With Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Smart View, you and your colleagues work in a collaborative environment with Word or PowerPoint documents containing refreshable data copied from Smart View. With its clearly defined assignments and tasks, the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud workflow organizes input from many contributors in one document. Some tasks are done in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface, and others are completed in Smart View.

With Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud:

- Use the web interface to assemble a set of Word documents or PowerPoint slides, called doclets , into a structure called a report package .

- Use the web interface to add supplemental doclets , such as Word documents, PowerPoint slides, Excel workbooks, and other file types such as PDF, HTML, TXT, to the report package.

- Assign user access and responsibilities, as well as timelines and due dates, in the web interface for the authoring, review, and approval of each doclet and supplemental doclet in the report package.

- Use Smart View to author doclet content directly in Microsoft Word or PowerPoint, and Office-based supplemental doclet content in the appropriate Office application.

You can work with doclets and supplemental doclets in Smart View while connected to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Word or PowerPoint, or you can download doclets and work with them locally.

Note that Word- and PowerPoint- supplemental doclets follow standard doclet workflow tasks, such as checkout, upload, and checkin.

- Leverage Smart Views ability to access various data sources and include individual data points or formatted reports within the doclet.

You can retrieve data from Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data sources and other EPM System on-premises and cloud data sources.

- Collaboratively review and comment on assigned review instances either on the web interface or in Smart View.

- Sign off on the entire report package either on the web interface or in Smart View.

- Finalize the report package in the web interface.

When you work with the doclets and Office-based supplemental doclets in an Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud report package, you can use Smart View to copy and paste data from Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data sources and other EPM System data sources, including on-premises and cloud data sources. For example, you can incorporate data from Essbase and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud in the same doclet. A doclet in a report package in Word or PowerPoint may contain a profit and loss statement that was created from an Essbase source along with an income statement report created from a Planning source. The data points for the areas that you copy are retained in Word or PowerPoint, so you can refresh the doclet to keep the data up to date.

See the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud documentation on the Oracle Help Center for complete descriptions of Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, including overviews and procedural information.

The topics in this chapter discuss the following areas:

- Setting Up Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Smart View , includes:

- Downloading and Running the Smart View Installer

- Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting

- Installing the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Extension

- Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View

- Authoring Doclets

- Performing Reviews

- Performing Sign Offs

- Example: Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Data in Smart View , includes:

- Performing Ad Hoc Analysis with Enterprise Performance Reporting Data

- Copying and Pasting Enterprise Performance Reporting Data into Doclets

Setting Up Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Smart View

The topics in this section discuss setting up Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Smart View. This is the workflow:

- Download and run the Smart View installer.

- Set up a data source connection to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud.

- Install the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud extension.

Downloading and Running the Smart View Installer

To download and run the Smart View installer:

1. Start Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in a web browser, and log in with your user name and password.

2. In the upper-right corner of the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface, select the arrow next to your user name to display the user menu.

3. From the user menu, select Install , and then select Smart View .

4. On the Smart View download page on Oracle Technology Network, click Accept License Agreement , and then click Download Now .

If the Oracle sign-in page is displayed, then sign in with your Oracle user name (usually your email address) and password.

5. Follow the steps for your browser to download the ZIP file, and save it to a folder on your computer; for example, you can save it in the Downloads folder or in a different folder of your choice.

6. Navigate to the folder that you used in step 5 , and then double-click SmartView.exe to start the installation wizard.

7. Select a destination folder for Smart View, and then click OK .

For new installations, Smart View is installed by default in:

C:/Oracle/SmartView

Note:

If you are upgrading an installation of Smart View, then the installer defaults to the folder where you previously installed Smart View.

8. When installation is complete, click OK .

The tab for the Smart View ribbon is displayed the next time you open Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint, or Word.

Continue the setup process with Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting .

Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting

After you install Smart View, as described in Downloading and Running the Smart View Installer , you can create connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data sources.

Connections require information about the server, port, and data source provider. Your Smart View administrator should provide you with the information that you need to create the connection.

For the connection to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, we will use the quick connection method in Smart View.

To create a private connection using the quick connection method:

1. Open Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint, and select the Smart View ribbon.

2. From the Smart View ribbon, click Panel .

3. From the Smart View Panel, click the arrow next to the Switch to button, , and then select Private Connections from the drop-down list.

4. Still in the Smart View Panel, in the text box shown in Figure 88, Quick Connection - Enter a URL , enter the URL for the data source to which you want to connect.

The URL syntax:

http://
server
:
port
/epm/SmartView

Figure 88. Quick Connection - Enter a URL

Your Smart View administrator should provide you with the server and port information for your data source.

5. Click the Go button, , or press Enter .

6. In the login window, enter your Oracle Cloud Identity Service Domain credentials and identity domain, and then select a data source from the drop-down menu.

The connection is established.

Continue the setup process with Installing the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Extension .

Installing the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Extension

Before you begin this procedure, complete the steps in Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting .

To install the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Cloud Service extension:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. Click the Check for updates link.

Smart View checks for all extensions that your administrator has made available to you.

3. Locate the extension named Oracle EPRCS and click the Install link, , to launch the installer.

4. Follow the prompts to install the extension.

For more information on extension installation, see the following topics:

- Initially Checking for Available Extensions

- Installing Extensions

After completing the procedure in this topic, you are ready to begin using Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud with Smart View. Continue with Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View .

Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View

After you have completed the procedures in Downloading and Running the Smart View Installer and Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting , you can connect to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud anytime you start Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint.

To connect to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud:

1. Perform an action:

- If youre working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud report packages, launch Word or PowerPoint, depending on the content of the report package.

Note:

Report packages can consist of either Word documents or PowerPoint slides, but not both.

- If youre working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud models and reports, launch Excel.

2. Select the Smart View ribbon, and then click Panel .

3. In the Smart View Panel, select Private Connections .

Alternatively, from the Smart View Panel, click the arrow next to the Switch to button, , and then select Private Connections from the drop-down list.

4. In the text box shown in Figure 89, Quick Connection Arrow for Drop-down List , click the arrow to display the drop-down menu and select your connection.

Figure 89. Quick Connection Arrow for Drop-down List

If you created your data source connection using the procedure in Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting , then it should be listed under Quick Connect URLs in the drop-down list.

5. In the Login window, enter your User Name and Password , and then click Sign In .

The Performance Reporting Home panel is displayed. Performance Reporting Home allows you to quickly access your pending tasks and other work in which you are involved. From the Performance Reporting Home, you can access:

- Incomplete Tasks —Incomplete tasks assigned to you.

- Active Report Packages —These are the active report packages for which you have outstanding tasks and responsibilities.

- Recent Items —Items you have recently accessed.

- Library —The library of items in Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, including report packages and reporting applications.

Figure 90, Performance Reporting Home shows an example of Performance Reporting Home.

Figure 90. Performance Reporting Home

Note:

The following step, step 6 , explains how to access a report package or reporting application from the EPRCS Library node by clicking Library in Performance Reporting Home. You can also access report packages and tasks using Incomplete Tasks , Active Report Packages , and Recent Items . Those access methods are described in Using Performance Reporting Home .

6. Click Library and then perform an action:

- To work with report packages in Word or PowerPoint:

a. Expand the EPRCS node, then the Library node, then expand the Report Packages folder, and then select a report package.

You can also locate the report package by navigating to:

- The Recent folder, if you have recently accessed the report package in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface

- The Favorites folder, if you have designated the report package as a favorite in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface.

- A user-defined folder, if the report package was saved in a folder created in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface.

b. In the Action Panel, select Open Report Package .

Alternatively, you can right-click the report package name and select Open Report Package , or double-click the report package name to open it.

c. To work with report packages, continue with these topics in this chapter:

- Authoring Doclets

- Performing Reviews

- Performing Sign Offs

- To work with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud models in Excel:

a. Expand the Reporting Applications folder, and then expand an application, then select a model.

b. In the Action Panel, click Connect .

Alternatively, you can right-click the model name and select Connect , or double-click the model name to connect.

c. Refer to Ad Hoc Analysis chapter in this guide for information on working with the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud reporting application or applications from other Oracle providers.

Note:

In Excel, you can also navigate in the Smart View Panel to EPRCS , then Library , and select a report package. Smart View will launch the report package in Word or PowerPoint as applicable.

7. Optional: For a brief look at using Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud with Smart View, see Example: Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Data in Smart View .

Using Performance Reporting Home

The procedures in this topic assume that you have created a connection to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud as described in Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting , and connected, following the procedure up to step 5 in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View

To use Performance Reporting Home:

1. Connect to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud as described in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View to display Performance Reporting Home.

Figure 91, Performance Reporting Home shows an example of Performance Reporting Home.

Figure 91. Performance Reporting Home

2. To access tasks that require your attention:

a. In Performance Reporting Home, click Incomplete Tasks or click the corresponding .

Each item in the Incomplete Tasks list consists of a link to help you access the task.

Figure 92. Performance Reporting Home Displaying Incomplete Tasks

b. In the Incomplete Tasks list, click a task link to open the Task Information dialog box, shown in Figure 93, Task Information Dialog Box

Figure 93. Task Information Dialog Box

c. Perform an action:

- In Task Information , select either a report package link or a specific doclet or supplemental doclet link.

The report package, specific doclet, or specific Office-based supplemental doclet is opened for you in the correct Office application in the context of the task you selected. For example, if you are in Word, and click a link for a review task in PowerPoint, then the review instance is opened in PowerPoint.

Non-Office-based supplemental doclets are downloaded to your download directory where you can open them manually.

- If the doclet shown in Task Information is ready to be submitted, click the Submit button.

d. To exit Task Information without performing any actions, click the X in the top right corner of the dialog box.

e. To return to Performance Reporting Home from the Incomplete Tasks list without performing any actions on tasks in the list, click

3. To access active report packages for which you have a responsibility:

a. In Performance Reporting Home, click Active Report Packages or click the corresponding .

Each item in the Active Report Packages list consists of a link to a report package for which you have a responsibility.

Figure 94. Performance Reporting Home Displaying Active Report Packages

b. In the Active Report Packages list, click a link to open a report package.

The report package is opened for you in the correct Office application in the context of the your current responsibility. For example, if you are in Word, and click a report package link for which you have a review task in PowerPoint, then the report package is opened for you in PowerPoint with the review instance ready for you to select in the Report Center.

Alternatively, to return to Performance Reporting Home from the Active Report Packages list without opening any report packages in the list, click .

4. To access recently-opened items:

a. In Performance Reporting Home, click Recent items or click the corresponding .

Each item in the Recent Items list consists of a link to a report package that you have recently opened and for which you have a responsibility.

Figure 95. Performance Reporting Home Displaying Active Report Packages

b. In the Recent Items list, click a link to open a report package.

The report package is opened for you in the correct Office application in the context of the your current responsibility. For example, if you are in Word, and click a report package link for which you have a review task in PowerPoint, then the report package is opened for you in PowerPoint with the review instance ready for you work with.

Alternatively, to return to Performance Reporting Home from the Recent Items list without opening any report packages in the list, click .

5. To access the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud library, follow step 5 and step 6 in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View .

Authoring Doclets

Subtopics

- About the Author Phase Process

- Authoring Doclets in Smart View

- Approving or Rejecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

- Inspecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

About the Author Phase Process

Report packages are made up of subcomponents called doclets and supplemental doclets. A report package owner assigns authors and approvers for each doclet and supplemental doclet. The authors and approvers provide and approve content for the doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

The author phase follows this process:

1. The report package owner initiates the author phase in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface.

2. Notification messages are sent to authors to begin their work.

3. In Smart View, authors open and then check out doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets, provide content, and then check doclets back in.

Authors open Excel-based supplemental doclets.

Authors download supplemental doclets of non-Office type to use in their work.

See About Doclets and Supplemental Doclets for more information.

4. When authors have finished their work, they submit the doclets and Office-based supplemental doclets for approval, if required.

5. If doclet or supplemental doclet approval is specified, notification messages are sent to approvers to review and either approve or reject doclets and supplemental doclets.

6. The report package owner marks the author phase complete.

As an author, in Smart View or in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface, you can work with:

- Doclets in Word or PowerPoint

- Office-based supplemental doclets with the appropriate Office application

- Non-Office-based supplemental doclets, such as PDF or TXT files, which you download and open with the appropriate application

The topics in this section discuss authoring and working with doclets and supplemental doclets in Smart View.

About Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

Report packages are comprised of subcomponents called doclets and supplemental doclets .

- Doclets contain the content you require for the report that you’re creating with an Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud report package. A report package can consist of one or more doclets. Word-based report packages contain Word-based doclets; PowerPoint-based report packages contain PowerPoint-based doclets.

Doclets participate fully in report package workflow, including all author phases, review phases, sign off, and report publishing.

- Supplemental doclets are documents which assist in the development of the overall report, such as source and reference files. Supplemental doclets can be of Office file types, such as Excel, Word, or PowerPoint; or of non-Office file types, such as PDF, TXT, or ZIP. Content from supplemental doclets is not merged into the combined report.

Supplemental doclets of any file type can be included in both Word-based and PowerPoint-based report packages. For example, Word-based supplemental doclets can be included in Word- or PowerPoint-based report packages.

In Smart View, supplemental doclets support the content management and workflow features of the author phase as follows:

- Word- and PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets can be checked out, modified, uploaded, checked in, submitted for approval, and approved or rejected.

- For supplemental doclets of all other file types, Smart View gives assigned authors easy access to download and view files. However, any other interactions with the files, such as checkout, upload, and checkin, must be performed through the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface.

Note that supplemental doclets of any file type are not available for commenting in the review or sign off phase, and they are not part of the final published report.

Authoring Doclets in Smart View

As a doclet author, you provide report content in Smart View. The authoring process follows this workflow:

1. Check out the doclet or supplemental doclet .

You can check out Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

2. Update the doclet or supplemental doclet.

Some suggested Smart View content development tasks:

- Copy and paste data points or data ranges from Office-based documents and supplemental doclets into Word-based or PowerPoint-based doclets, as described in Copying Data Between Excel, Word, and PowerPoint .

- Copy and paste text from documents and supplemental doclets of any type into Word-based or PowerPoint-based doclets.

- Use the PowerPoint copy and paste commands to copy a slide or presentation into a PowerPoint-based doclet or supplemental doclet, and import the metadata from the original slide or presentation into the doclet, as described in Importing Metadata into Copied Slides or Presentations .

- Refresh the Smart View data in doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets using the Refresh command on the Smart View ribbon or a provider ribbon, as described in Refreshing from a Ribbon .

- Refresh reports in doclets or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets individually as you require, as described in Refreshing Individual Reports from Document Contents .

- Change the POV of a report in a doclet or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet, as described in The POV Manager .

See Example: Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Data in Smart View for a demonstration on working with Smart View content in a Word-based doclet.

3. Upload the doclet or applicable supplemental doclet back to the report package .

4. Optional: Select to override doclet style sample attributes or slide master .

5. Check the doclet or applicable supplemental doclet back in .

6. Submit the doclet or applicable supplemental doclet .

Checking Out Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This topic applies to doclets or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

When you check out a doclet or a Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet, it is locked so that nobody else can modify it.

Before you begin this procedure, you should have already launched Microsoft Word or PowerPoint, connected to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, and opened a report package, as described in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View .

To check out a doclet or supplemental doclet:

1. In the Smart View Panel, select the doclet or supplemental doclet to check out.

Only Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets can be checked out.

The Word-based report package shown in Figure 96, Report Package Containing Doclets and Supplemental Doclets contains a variety of artifacts, including doclets, Word- and PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets, an Excel supplemental doclet, supplemental doclets in of type TXT and ZIP, as well as a supplemental doclet of unknown type. Also, note the following icons in the Report Center:

- signifies a doclet

- signifies a supplemental doclet

Figure 96. Report Package Containing Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

2. Double-click the doclet or supplemental doclet name.

The Performance Reporting ribbon is displayed in Word or PowerPoint when:

- You open a doclet

- You open a Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet

Figure 97, Performance Reporting Ribbon for Doclet in Author Phase in Unchecked-Out State shows the Performance Reporting ribbon for the author phase, before the doclet is checked out.

Figure 97. Performance Reporting Ribbon for Doclet in Author Phase in Unchecked-Out State

Note:

The availability of buttons in the Performance Reporting ribbon depends on the permissions that are assigned to you; the phase that you are in—authoring, review, or sign off; and the operation you are performing.

3. Click Check Out .

Note:

If a doclet or supplemental doclet is checked out by another user, then the Check Out button is disabled.

The doclet or supplemental doclet is now locked for your use. You can work with it directly in Smart View while connected to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud.

In the doclet responsibilities list in the Smart View Panel, a lock icon and the user name are displayed for the doclet or supplemental doclet that is checked out.

In the Performance Reporting ribbon, the Check Out button is replaced with the Cancel Checkout button.

Next steps for working with the checked-out doclets or supplemental doclets in Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud:

- You can undo, or cancel, the checkout if you want to remove your lock on the doclet or supplemental doclet. Undoing the checkout allows other users to check out and update the doclet. See Undoing Checkouts .

- If you must close Word or PowerPoint before you are finished with your authoring changes, you do not need to check in the doclet or supplemental doclet, but you must upload it to retain the changes in progress. See Uploading and Working with Page Attributes and Slide Masters .

- You can download the Word or PowerPoint file and work with the doclet or supplemental doclet offline, as described in Working with Doclets and Supplemental Doclets Locally .

Undoing Checkouts

This topic applies to doclets or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

In Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, you can undo a checkout to remove the lock and allow other users to check out and modify the doclet or supplemental doclet. Changes that you made after checking out the doclet or supplemental doclet, even if you uploaded it, are discarded when you cancel the checkout. To keep your changes, select Check In instead.

To undo a checkout:

1. If the doclet or supplemental doclet is not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet or supplemental doclet and double-click the it.

2. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Cancel Checkout .

Working with Doclets and Supplemental Doclets Locally

This topic applies to doclets or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

After checkout, you can work with a doclet or supplemental doclet directly in Word or PowerPoint while connected to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud through Smart View. If you must close Word or PowerPoint, or disconnect from Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, you can upload the doclet or supplemental doclet before closing or disconnecting and the changes you made are saved for the next time you start Smart View and log on Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud.

Alternatively, use the Office Save As command to save a doclet or supplemental doclet to a local or network folder and work with it locally or from your network folder, outside of the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud environment. The following procedures explain how to download a doclet to work with locally, and how to upload the doclet back to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud.

Note:

In the following procedures, " locally " refers both to locally-saved doclets and supplemental doclets, as well as doclets and supplemental doclets saved to a network folder location.

Downloading Doclets and Supplemental Doclets for Local Use

To download a doclet or supplemental doclet to work with locally:

1. In the checked-out doclet or supplemental doclet, using the File menu in Word or PowerPoint, select Save As .

2. Save the document to a local folder or network folder location, as you require.

Caution!

You can save a document locally anytime. But be aware that if you do not check out the doclet or supplemental doclet before saving it locally, other users can still check it out and modify it. Then you wont be able to upload your version of the doclet or supplemental doclet without overwriting other users changes. Oracle recommends checking out a doclet or supplemental doclet first before downloading it locally or to a network folder.

3. Modify the downloaded doclet or supplemental doclet in the native Office application.

4. When youre finished with your modifications, follow the procedure in Uploading Locally-saved Doclets and Supplemental Doclets .

Uploading Locally-saved Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This procedure assumes that you have worked with a doclet or supplemental doclet locally or on a network folder, while disconnected from Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in Smart View. You must connect to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud before opening your doclet file in Smart View.

To upload a locally-saved doclet or supplemental doclet:

1. Open the appropriate Office application, but do not open the locally-saved doclet or supplemental doclet file yet.

2. Connect to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, as described in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View , and open the report package to which your locally-saved doclet or supplemental doclet belongs.

3. In the Office application, open the locally-saved doclet or supplemental doclet by using the File , Open command.

This action loads the Performance Reporting ribbon. Note the state of the ribbon; the Upload button is enabled.

4. Click Upload .

5. Continue with step 3 in Uploading and Working with Page Attributes and Slide Masters .

Uploading and Working with Page Attributes and Slide Masters

- Doclets in Word-based Report Packages

- Doclets in PowerPoint-based Report Packages

- Word- and PowerPoint-based Supplemental Doclets in Report Packages

Doclets in Word-based Report Packages

This topic applies to Word-based doclets.

For Microsoft Word-based report packages, you are asked to specify style sample attributes to override during the doclet upload or check-in process.

When a Word-based report package is created in Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, a style sample document is uploaded. It contains the page attributes that the report package owner wants the final report to have. These attributes include the page header and footer, orientation and size, margins, numbering, and alignment.

When you upload a doclet, the system checks the doclet against the style sample document to compare the attributes. An alert is displayed next to the attributes that differ from the style sample.

Figure 98. Upload File Dialog Box

By default, the system overrides the doclet attributes with the style sample attributes when the doclet is uploaded. For example, if the style sample orientation is portrait mode and the doclet is in landscape mode, then the doclet’s orientation will be changed to portrait mode to match the style sample. Figure 98, Upload File Dialog Box shows the Upload File dialog box with an alert next to the Orientation attribute.

To keep the doclet in landscape mode, select the Orientation check box. When you select an attribute, the system uses the attribute from the doclet rather than the attribute from the style sample.

To upload a Word doclet and select style attributes to override:

1. If the doclet is not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet and double-click the doclet name.

To upload changes, you must have the doclet checked out.

2. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Upload .

3. In the Upload File dialog box (see Figure 98, Upload File Dialog Box ), select the style attributes that you want to override, and then click OK .

Style attributes in the doclet that differ from the style sample for the report package are noted with an exclamation point.

4. Proceed to Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets .

Alternatively, you can continue working on the checked-out doclet and repeat the upload procedure in this topic as many times as you require, and then proceed to Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets .

Doclets in PowerPoint-based Report Packages

This topic applies to PowerPoint-based doclets.

For Microsoft PowerPoint-based report packages, when a report package is created, a style sample document is uploaded that contains the slide masters and slide layouts that the report package owner wants the final report to have. These slide masters determine the overall look and format of the presentation. When you upload a doclet, the system scans the doclet and highlights the slide masters in use. The icon indicates slide masters that are not in the style sample document.

Note:

The doclet slides must be sized the same as the report package style sample slides in order to upload the doclet. For example, if your doclet slides are sized for On-Screen Show (4:3) and the report package style sample slides are sized for On-Screen Show (16:9), you must resize your doclet slides before you can upload the doclet.

To upload a PowerPoint doclet and select a slide master:

1. If the doclet is not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet and double-click the doclet name.

To upload changes, you must have the doclet checked out.

2. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Upload .

3. If the doclet uses the same slide master as the style sample document, click OK in the Upload File dialog box, the proceed to step 5 ; otherwise, proceed to step 4 .

4. If the doclet contains a slide master that is not in the style sample document, perform one of the following:

- To replace the doclet slide master with the report package slide master, click the name of the doclet slide master, and then select the report package slide master to replace it with.

The system maps the doclet slide layouts to the report package slide master to maintain a uniform look for the presentation.

- To preserve the doclet slide master, click OK to upload the doclet.

If you preserve the doclet slide master, the system adds it to the merged presentation to ensure that the slides will render correctly. However, that slide master is available for use by that doclet only. The doclet slide master is not available to other doclets. If you want the doclet slide master to be used by other doclets, the report package owner must add it to the report package style sample document.

5. Proceed to Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets .

Alternatively, you can continue working on the checked-out doclet and repeat the upload procedure in this topic as many times as you require, and then proceed to Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets .

Note:

When you upload a doclet to the report package, the system resets all slides to their default layouts. If you have modified any slides from the default slide master layout, those modifications are reset back to the default. For example, if you have changed the size of a text box on a slide to make room for an image, the text box is reset to its original size when you upload the doclet. However, you can add additional layouts to the doclet slide master, and those new layouts are persisted within the doclet. Therefore, if you want to preserve the modified text box size, you must add that layout to the doclet slide master.

As an example, you are working with a doclet with a slide layout called Title and Content that contains a text box that spans the entire slide. You want to resize the text box to cover half of the slide so that you can add an accompanying image. If you were to resize the text box, add the image, and upload the doclet, the system would reset the slide back to the Title and Content default layout, and the text would overlap the image. Instead, add a new slide layout (called, for example, Title, Text, and Image) with the resized text box. When you upload the doclet, the new slide master is copied over and persisted for that doclet.

Word- and PowerPoint-based Supplemental Doclets in Report Packages

This topic applies to Word- and PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

You upload Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets for checking in. However, in the upload process, you do not have to overwrite styles or slide masters. You simply upload.

Other supplemental doclet file types, such as Excel files or PDFs, are not checked out; they are only opened or downloaded. Therefore, they do not need to be uploaded.

To upload a Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets:

1. If the doclet is not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet and double-click the doclet name.

To upload changes, you must have the doclet checked out.

2. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Upload .

3. Proceed to Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets .

Alternatively, you can continue working on the checked-out doclet and repeat the upload procedure in this topic as many times as you require, and then proceed to Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets .

Checking In Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This topic applies to doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

After you have finished modifying a doclet or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet, you must check it back in so that other users can view your changes.

Note:

Before you check in a doclet or supplemental doclet, you must first upload it. See Working with Doclets and Supplemental Doclets Locally and Uploading and Working with Page Attributes and Slide Masters .

To check in a doclet or supplemental doclet:

1. If not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet or supplemental doclet and double-click it to open it.

2. From the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Check In .

In the Smart View Panel, the lock icon is removed from the doclet or supplemental in the doclet responsibilities list, indicating that it is no longer checked out.

Note:

After you have checked out and downloaded a doclet or supplemental doclet to work with locally, you must upload the new version before you can check the doclet back in. If you want to discard the changes that you made and revert back to the original version of the doclet, click Cancel Checkout instead (see Undoing Checkouts ).

Submitting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This topic applies to doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

After finishing their work, authors submit doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets to the report package owner or, if approval is required, to the doclet approver.

To submit a doclet or supplemental doclet:

1. If not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet or supplemental doclet and double-click it to open it.

2. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Submit .

Tip:

In cases where multiple authors are assigned to a doclet or supplemental doclet, ensure that all authors are finished with their work before submitting the doclet.

If approval is required, the current responsibility for the doclet or supplemental doclet is updated with the doclet approvers. If no approval is required, the current responsibility field is empty.

Note:

If the doclet or supplemental doclet is not already checked in, then the Submit operation also checks it in for you.

After you submit a doclet or supplemental doclet, you can no longer check it out, although you can still open and inspect it from Smart View or the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface.

Note that once a doclet or supplemental doclet is submitted, the report package owner can check it out for further updates.

Approving or Rejecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This topic applies to doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

As approver, you review and approve doclets and supplemental doclets after the author submits them. You also have access to the same functionality as the author, including:

- Check Out

- Download and Update

- Upload

- Check In

- Inspect

Approving Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This topic applies to doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

As approver, if you are satisfied that the doclet or supplemental doclet is correct, you approve it to complete it. If multiple approvals are required, you, as approver, submit the doclet or supplemental doclet for further approvals. After approval, authors can no longer check out the doclet or supplemental doclet, although they can still download and inspect it.

To approve a doclet or supplemental doclet:

1. If not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet or supplemental doclet and double-click it to open it.

Note:

A green arrow, , signifies doclets that require your attention as approver.

2. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Approve .

In the Smart View Panel, the approved doclet or supplemental doclet appears in the doclet responsibilities list with a green check mark:

If a doclet or supplemental doclet requires multiple levels of approval, the approved artifact appears in the doclet responsibilities list with the rubber stamp icon:

When a doclet or supplemental doclet is approved by all approvers, its status is updated to Approved in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface, and the green check mark is displayed with the doclet in Smart View.

Rejecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This topic applies to doclets and Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets.

If a doclet or supplemental doclet is not ready to be approved, you can either edit it yourself (check out the doclet or supplemental doclet, modify it, and check in the corrected version), or you can reject it to send it back to the author to edit.

To reject a doclet or supplemental doclet:

1. If not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the doclet or supplemental doclet and double-click it to open it.

2. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Reject .

When a doclet or supplemental doclet is rejected, its status is updated to Rejected , and the responsibility reverts to the author. The author must update the content and resubmit it for approval.

In the Smart View Panel, the rejected doclet or supplemental doclet appears in the doclet responsibilities list with a red X:

Inspecting Doclets and Supplemental Doclets

This topic applies to doclets and supplemental doclets.

For detailed information on doclets and supplemental doclets, click Inspect in the Performance Reporting ribbon.

The Inspect button launches the Properties dialog box.

From the Properties dialog box, you can also download previous versions of a doclet or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet.

Note:

All steps in the following procedure are optional.

To view information about a doclet or supplemental doclet:

1. If the report package is not already open, in the Smart View Panel, navigate to the report package and open it.

2. Select a doclet or supplemental doclet in the list and click the Inspect button in the Performance Reporting ribbon.

3. In the Properties dialog box, view the information the Properties tab (the default tab).

The Properties tab displays basic information about the doclet or supplemental doclet, such as the file name, doclet type, and the user who created it.

Figure 99. Properties for a Doclet

Figure 100. Properties for a Supplemental Doclet

4. Click the History tab, , to view audit information about the doclet or supplemental doclet, such as the user who last updated it (if applicable).

5. Click the Version tab, , to download previous versions of the doclet or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet.

As new versions of the doclet or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet are checked in, the previous versions are stored so that you can view them to see what changed.

To download a previous version of a doclet or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet, click the link next to the version that you want.

A message notifies you of the location of the downloaded doclet or Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclet.

You may download any type of supplemental doclet; however, only Word- or PowerPoint-based supplemental doclets may have previous versions.

Performing Reviews

Subtopics

- About the Review Phase Process

- Working with Review Instances in Smart View

About the Review Phase Process

The review phase enables report stakeholders to review and provide feedback on the content in the report package. Reviewers provide commentary on their assigned areas of the report package. This could be the entire report package or a subset consisting of sections or specific doclets. Reviewers can provide their feedback by using Smart View to enter, review, and respond to comments.

The review phase process:

1. The report package owner creates the review instance, and then starts the review cycle in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface.

2. Notification messages are sent to reviewers to begin their work. If the review is iterative , reviewers are notified to begin their work at the start of each iteration.

3. Reviewers view a document called a review instance in Smart View. A review instance includes only the reviewers assigned content.

Review instances do not include supplemental doclets of any file type.

Note:

Though reviewers see only their assigned content, all comments are made and retained against the single review instance.

4. Reviewers highlight content and post comments in plain text or in rich text format, which can include links and attachments.

5. Reviewers collaborate by adding to other comments in comment threads.

6. Reviewers mark their reviews complete, indicating to the report package owner that they are finished with their review. If the reviewer wants to add additional comments after marking the review complete, the reviewer can " Reopen for comments, " indicating to the report package owner that they are not done with their review.

A report package may have multiple review cycles defined for it. All review cycles follow the same process.

Collaborative Review Process

As reviewers, you collaborate by viewing and adding to other reviewers’ comments, creating comment threads. For example, a previous reviewer may have asked a question that you know the answer to. You can add to their comment to provide the answer.

Iterative Review Process

Reviews can be iterative, which means that a report package owner can schedule multiple review cycles depending on the type of review required.

For example, for a multiple draft review process, the review process may include:

- Multiple review cycles; with three drafts.

- Review assignments that vary by draft; for example:

- First draft for manager level

- Second draft for executive level

- Third draft for CEOs, CFOs, and so on

- Review assignments that vary by area where you can assign users to review:

- Entire report

- Sections

- Doclets

Key points to remember about the iterative review process:

- A new review instance incorporates content modifications.

- Comments persist across review cycles, so reviewers can see previous comments and how they were addressed.

- The review phase is complete when all review cycles are closed.

Working with Review Instances in Smart View

Subtopics

- Selecting a Review Instance

- Posting Comments

- Filtering and Sorting Comments

- Editing and Deleting Comments

- Attaching Supporting Files and Customizing Comment Text

- Addressing and Closing Review Comments

- Marking Reviews Complete

You perform reviews by entering comments and providing your feedback in a review instance in Smart View. The review instance shows you a draft version of the areas of the report package that you have been assigned to review (see Figure 101, A Portion of an Example Review Instance in Smart View with Word ). The review instance may consist of the entire report or a subset of the report content. Review instances do not include supplemental doclets of any file type.

Before you begin the review procedures, you should have launched Microsoft Word or PowerPoint, connected to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, and opened a report package, as described in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View .

Figure 101. A Portion of an Example Review Instance in Smart View with Word

Selecting a Review Instance

When a report package is ready for review, an Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface message notifies reviewers that they can begin their work.

For example:

Review is required for Department Reports - Review Cycle 2

In this example, " Review Cycle 2 " signifies that you will select " Review 02 " in the Content Selector in Smart View.

To select a review instance in Smart View:

1. In the Smart View Panel, verify that the required review instance is selected in the Content Selector .

When you first open a report package, the active review instance is selected by default.

In Figure 102, Example of Review Instances in the Content Selector , " Review 01 " and " Review 02 " are the available options. The dot next to " Review 02 " signifies that this review instance is active and ready for your review comments. Notice that there is no dot next to " Review 01. " This signifies that the review instance is closed to new review comments; however, you may open " Review 01 " to view it.

Figure 102. Example of Review Instances in the Content Selector

2. If not already selected, select the required review instance.

When you select a review instance, your screen should resemble Figure 101, A Portion of an Example Review Instance in Smart View with Word .

You can now begin working with review comments in the review instance.

Posting Comments

Posting a New Comment

To post a new comment:

1. Perform an action:

- Comments on Text in Word: To post comments on text in a Word-based report package, in the review instance, select the text to comment on, and in the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Add New Comment .

- Comments on Text in PowerPoint: To post comments on text in a PowerPoint-based report package, place your cursor in the slide you want to comment on, and in the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Add New Comment .

A pin is placed in the top left corner of the slide. Click the pin and drag it to position it on or near the text to comment on. Then, double-click the pin to open the EPRCS Comments text box.

Note:

If text was selected before clicking Add New Comment , the pin will be placed at the top left corner of the selection.

- Comments on Graphics in Word: To post comments on graphics in a Word-based report package, in the review instance, select the graphic to comment on, and in the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Add New Comment .

A pin is placed in the top left corner of the page that contains the graphic. Click the pin, and drag and drop it on the desired location within the graphic. Then double-click the pin to open the EPRCS Comments text box.

Select only the graphic. Do not select any paragraph markers, text, or empty spaces around the graphic.

- Comments on Graphics in PowerPoint: To post comments on graphics in a PowerPoint-based report package, in the review instance, select the graphic to comment on, and in the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Add New Comment .

A pin is placed in the top left corner of the graphic. Click the pin, and drag and drop it on the desired location within the graphic. Then double-click the pin to open the EPRCS Comments text box.

Select only the graphic. Do not select any paragraph markers, text, or empty spaces around the graphic.

Tip:

The selection area for comments cannot be empty. Select a graphic or at least one word or number when adding comments.

2. In EPRCS Comments , enter a comment.

Figure 103, EPRCS Comment Text Box in Word with Text Selected shows an example of an EPRCS Comments text box with text selected for commenting.

Figure 103. EPRCS Comment Text Box in Word with Text Selected

Figure 104, EPRCS Comment Text Box in PowerPoint with Graphic Selected shows an example of an EPRCS Comments text box with a graphic selected for commenting in PowerPoint. Notice that the pin was placed in the upper left corner of the graphic.

Figure 104. EPRCS Comment Text Box in PowerPoint with Graphic Selected

Note:

You can add URLs, text formatting, and attachments to comments. See Editing and Deleting Comments and Attaching Supporting Files and Customizing Comment Text .

3. Click Enter , , to post your comment.

Note:

A comment must contain text, an attachment, or both.

Your comment is added to the list of comments in the comments pane in the Smart View Panel, and an anchor icon, , is added to the review instance to indicate that there is a comment.

4. In the top right corner of the EPRCS Comments text box, click Close , , to exit.

Posting a Reply to a Comment

To post a reply to a comment:

1. In the Smart View Panel, double-click a comment in the list to launch the EPRCS Comments text box.

2. In the EPRCS Comments text box, click the Reply button, , and enter your reply.

Note:

You can add text formatting and attachments to comment replies. See Attaching Supporting Files and Customizing Comment Text for more information.

3. Click the Enter button, , to post your reply.

4. Click Close , , to exit the EPRCS Comments text box.

Filtering and Sorting Comments

You can filter comments in the comment management panel. For example, you can show or hide comments, display open or closed comments, or display or hide a user’s comments.

To filter and sort comments:

1. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click the Refresh Comments button to see new comments and replies.

2. Optional: Click the Hide Anchor or Show Anchor button to hide or display the comment anchors in the review instance.

Hide Anchor displays by default the first time you open a review instance, meaning that anchors are currently showing.

After clicking Hide Anchor , the button toggles to Show Anchor .

Anchors display throughout the review instance and mark the location where comments are entered. Anchors are signified by a pushpin icon. In Figure 105, Anchor Example in Review Instance , an anchor is circled in a portion of the review instance.

Figure 105. Anchor Example in Review Instance

3. Click Filter Comments , , and choose a display option:

- Open Comments

- Closed Comments

- All Comments

- My Comments

You can choose to display Open Comments and Closed Comments at the same time.

4. View the results of your selections in the comments list in the Smart View Panel.

Alternatively, you can choose filter and sort options by using the drop-down lists in the comments pane. The heading at the left is for sorting comments; the heading at the right is for filtering.

The following example shows comments sorted by time in descending order and, because the Open, Closed and All filters are selected, all comments are displayed:

5. Optional: Open a comment by clicking it in the list of comments in the Smart View Panel.

Editing and Deleting Comments

You can edit a thread entry when it is the last entry in the thread that you posted.

You can delete a comment that you posted. You can also delete a comment thread entry that you posted when it is the last entry in the thread.

To edit or delete a comment:

1. From the comment list in the Smart View Panel, click a comment that you started.

2. To edit a comment:

a. Click the drop-down list arrow as shown in Figure 106, Comment Text Box with Drop-Down List Circled , and then select Modify .

Figure 106. Comment Text Box with Drop-Down List Circled

b. Edit the comment text.

Note:

You can add URLs, text formatting, and attachments to comments. See Attaching Supporting Files and Customizing Comment Text .

c. Click Enter , , to update the comment.

d. Click Close , , to exit the EPRCS Comments text box.

3. To delete a comment, select either the comment or the last entry in a comment thread, then click the drop-down list arrow shown in Figure 106, Comment Text Box with Drop-Down List Circled for the comment or the thread entry, and then select Delete .

Note:

You can only delete the last entry in a thread. Deleting the last entry does not delete the entire comment thread.

4. To cancel modifications, click the Cancel or Close button, in the EPRCS Comments text box.

Attaching Supporting Files and Customizing Comment Text

You can select a local file from your computer to attach to your comment. For example, you might want to associate a supporting document with one of your comments. Or, you may want to customize the text of a comment using the rich text editor. For example, you may want to make text bold or apply a different font color. You can also add a URL to a comment.

To attach files to a comment, customize comment text, or add a link to a web page:

1. In the Smart View Panel, in the comment list, double-click a comment that you started to launch the EPRCS Comments text box.

The comment you select must be the only or last comment in a thread.

2. To attach a file to your comment:

a. Click the Manage Attachments button, .

b. In Manage Attachments , click , then navigate to the file to attach and select it, and then click Open .

c. In the Title column, add a descriptive title for the file, and then press Enter ; for example:

d. Click Save , , to save the attachment and title text.

The statement " Comment has attachments " is added to the EPRCS Comments text box.

Note:

The Manage Attachments button, is enabled in all comments in a thread so that all users included in the review instance may view attachments associated with all comments.

e. Repeat step 1 through step 2.d for all the files that you want to attach to the comment.

3. To apply custom formatting to comment text:

a. In the EPRCS Comments text box, select the last comment in the thread, then click the drop-down list arrow shown in Figure 106, Comment Text Box with Drop-Down List Circled , and then select Modify .

b. Select the comment text to format.

c. Click the Show Formatting Bar button, , to add text formatting to the comment.

Formatting options:

- Font style, size, and color

- Bold, italics, and underlining

- Align text to the left or right, or center it

d. Click Enter , , to retain your changes.

4. To add a URL in a comment:

a. In the EPRCS Comments text box, , enter the URL; for example, enter:

http://www.oracle.com

For URLs to be recognized, you must precede them with a valid URL protocol identifier, such as:

- http://

- https://

For example:

http://www.oracle.com

Oracle recommends testing URLs in a browser to ensure that they work before adding them to comments.

b. Click Enter , .

5. Click Close , , to exit the EPRCS Comments text box.

Addressing and Closing Review Comments

When a comment is added to a review instance, the comment status is " Open. " When the questions or concerns raised in a comment have been addressed, users can change the comment status to " Closed. "

Addressing Comments

Some comments may be addressed with a simple reply to the comment. Other comments may require revisions to the original doclet. Any user, except for a viewer, can respond to or address comments. After you mark your review complete, it prevents you from adding new comments. However, you can still reply to existing comments. Following are examples of the actions that users can take in response to comments:

- Answer a question and then close the comment.

For example, if a review asked if a figure in a doclet represented an up-to-date number, a user with that knowledge can reply to the comment and mark it closed.

- Edit the doclet content and then close the comment.

For example, if a reviewer suggests an edit, another user can check out and edit the doclet, and then reply to the comment that the edit was made, and then close the comment.

- Send the doclet back to the doclet author for additional revisions.

For example, if a reviewer suggests that a doclet is using old data and needs to be updated with the latest figures, the report package owner can send the doclet back to the author. When a doclet is restarted, a notification is sent to the doclet author indicating that the doclet has been reopened, and the doclet status is changed to " Started. " Note that the doclet due dates for authors and approvers may be changed by the report package owner. At this point, the doclet follows the same workflow as in the author phase (see Authoring Doclets in Smart View ); it is edited and approved by the authors and approvers that were assigned in the author phase.

Closing Comments

To close a comment:

1. Double-click the comment in the comment list in the Review Center.

2. In the EPRCS Comments dialog box, click Reply , , and enter the reply text.

3. Click the Mark Closed button, to close the comment.

A reply is added, noting that the comment is closed.

To reopen the comment to add additional comments, click Reopen Comment , .

Marking Reviews Complete

If you are satisfied with your review and you would like to notify the report package owner, mark your review complete.

After you mark your review complete, it prevents you from adding additional comments.

To mark your review complete:

1. Click Mark Review Complete in the Performance Reporting ribbon.

Note:

The button toggles to Reopen for Comments .

2. Optional: To add more review comments to the report package, click the Reopen for Comments button.

Performing Sign Offs

Subtopics

- About the Sign Off Phase

- Signing Off On or Rejecting a Report

About the Sign Off Phase

Signers review the finalized content of a report. They can either sign off on or reject the report .

The goal of the sign off phase is to gather final approvals from your key stakeholders. Stakeholders review finalized content and either sign off on or reject the report. All prior authoring and review phases must be complete, and all doclets must be checked in and completed as well. The sign off phase enables you to lock your report and ensures that approved content is not modified. This is beneficial for reports that rely on content to be locked down and to prevent changes.

The sign off phase follows this process:

1. The report package owner creates the sign off instance, and then starts the sign off phase.

2. Notifications are sent to signers to begin their work.

3. Signers review finalized content in the form of a sign off instance, and can either sign off on or reject the report.

Note:

After all the signers provide their approvals, the report package is marked final.

Signing Off On or Rejecting a Report

The signers review the final report and can either sign off on or reject the report. Additionally, signers can attach a note with details on their action.

Before you begin the procedures in this topic, you should have launched Microsoft Word or PowerPoint, connected to Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, and opened a report package, as described in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View .

To sign off on or reject a report:

1. In the Smart View Panel, Content Selector drop-down list, ensure that Sign Off is selected.

Selecting Sign Off launches the sign off instance document, which you review to sign off on the report.

2. Do one of the following:

- If you are satisfied with your review of the sign off instance document, click Sign Off in the Performance Reporting ribbon.

When you sign off on the sign off instance document, the report package process is complete, and the report is ready for publication.

- If you are not satisfied with the sign off instance document, click Reject Sign Off in the Performance Reporting ribbon.

The report package owner can take corrective actions to address issues.

3. Optional: Whether you are signing off on or rejecting the report in the sign off instance document, add a comment in Add Note , and then click Sign Off or Reject Sign Off .

After all signers approve the report, the report package status becomes " Final. "

Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Data in Smart View

You can use Smart View to copy data from EPM System and BI on-premises and cloud data sources, including Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data sources, and paste the data into doclets in a report package.

For example, you can incorporate data from Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud in the same doclet or different doclets within a report package. A doclet in a report package in Word or PowerPoint may contain a profit and loss statement report that was created from an Essbase source along with an income statement report created from an Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud source. The data points for the areas that you copy are retained in Word or PowerPoint, so you can refresh the doclet to keep the data up to date.

The scenario in Example: Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Data in Smart View demonstrates using ad hoc analysis in Excel to create a report, and then copying the data points from that report and pasting them into a doclet in Word.

Example: Working with Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud Service Data in Smart View

The topics in this section provide a brief look at the following features of Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud:

- Performing ad hoc queries and retrieving data from Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data sources.

- Copying and pasting Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data into doclets. You can copy and paste data in the form of grids or data points.

Performing Ad Hoc Analysis with Enterprise Performance Reporting Data

Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud comes with a sample application that consists of a model containing seven dimensions. You create the sample application with a click of a button in the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud web interface.

When connected to the sample model in Smart View, you can perform ad hoc queries that allow you to create data reports containing the information that you want to see. You can copy and paste data from the reports into doclets in Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud report packages. You can copy and paste grids or individual data points into doclets.

The scenario in this topic shows you how to create an ad hoc grid and paste individual data points and an entire grid into a doclet, in preparation for the doclet being included in a report package in Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud.

To create an ad hoc grid from an Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data source:

1. If you have not already done so, launch Excel, and set up a data source connection as described in Creating Data Source Connections to Enterprise Performance Reporting .

2. In Excel, connect to the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data source.

See Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View .

3. In the Smart View Panel, expand Reporting Applications , then Sample Application , and then right-click Sample Model and select Ad hoc analysis .

The initial dimensions and data are placed on the sheet. The Accounts dimension and Fiscal Calendar dimension are the active dimensions.

Note:

The dimensions , Entities, Total Segments, Currencies, Years, and Scenarios are in the POV and are not in the body of the grid. They can be used to change the data perspective of the grid; however, we are not showing that functionality in this scenario.

And the Performance Reporting ribbon for ad hoc functionality is displayed:

4. Before proceeding, in the Smart View ribbon, click Options , select the Formatting tab, and ensure that these options are selected:

- Use Excel Formatting

- Adjust Column width

Click OK .

5. Click the Refresh button in either the Smart View ribbon or the Performance Reporting ribbon to see the effect of the formatting changes on the current grid:

The goal for our layout is to show the Accounts members in rows, and Scenarios members in columns, to create a simple operating expenses report.

6. To move the Scenarios dimension to the column, right-click and drag the Scenarios dimension cell, and then drop it on the Accounts dimension cell.

7. To move the Accounts dimension to the row, right-click and drag the Accounts dimension cell, and then drop it on the Fiscal Calendar dimension cell.

8. Right-click and then drag the Fiscal Calendar dimension to the POV row, and then drop it on the Entities dimension.

In the previous grid, the Scenarios and Accounts dimensions are the active dimensions. The dimensions Fiscal Calendar, Entities , Total Segments, Currencies, and Years are in the POV. This is the desired dimension layout.

Now lets zoom into row and column members and use the Keep Only and Remove Only buttons on the Performance Reporting ribbon to create the row and column layout that we want to see.

9. Select the Scenarios dimension, and then either double-click or click Zoom In on the Performance Reporting ribbon.

10. Press the Ctrl key, select the Forecast and Scenarios members, and then click the Remove Only button in the Performance Reporting ribbon.

The grid should look like this:

Now lets zoom in to the Operating Expenses member.

11. Select Accounts, and then either double-click or click Zoom In from the Performance Reporting ribbon.

The result of the first zoom in:

12. Continue to zoom in:

a. Click Zoom In on the Income Statement member.

b. Click Zoom In on the Net Income member.

c. Click Zoom In on the Total Pretax Income member.

d. Click Zoom In on the Pretax Income From Operations member.

The grid should look like this:

13. To keep only the Operating Expenses member, well select the Operating Expenses cell and click Keep Only from the Performance Reporting ribbon.

The grid should look like this:

14. Double-click or zoom in on the Operating Expenses member cell.

15. In the expanded grid, select members with #Missing in their rows, Operating Expense Synergies and Allocations, and click Remove Only from the Performance Reporting ribbon.

The grid should look like this:

Now lets format the left column.

16. For a left-aligned list, in the Smart View ribbon, click Options , and then click the Member Options tab.

17. In Indentation , select None , and then click OK .

18. In the Smart View ribbon or Performance Reporting ribbon, click Refresh .

The grid should look like this:

Next, we want to remove the POV members from the first row of the report.

19. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click the POV button.

Clicking the POV button causes the POV members move to the POV toolbar, which floats on the grid, as shown in Figure 107, POV Toolbar .

Figure 107. POV Toolbar

Note:

The POV toolbar can be moved around on the grid or docked by dragging the POV toolbar to the top, bottom, left, or right of the Excel window. You can prevent the POV toolbar from docking by holding the Ctrl key as you drag the toolbar.

Now lets apply formatting to the numbers in the grid. Number formatting will carry over when we copy the grid and paste it into Word.

20. Press and hold down the Ctrl key, and then select the dollar amounts in the first and last rows of the report, cells B3, C3, D3, B13, C13, and D13.

21. With cells B3, C3, D3, B13, C13, and D13 selected, in the Excel Home ribbon, in the Number group, click the Accounting Number Format button, .

If you are working in a non-American English environment, choose the default currency symbol for your locale.

22. In the Excel Home ribbon, make the following changes to the currency and variance percentage figures:

a. Select only the figures in columns B, C, and D, and then, in the Number group, click the Comma Style button, .

b. Select only the figures in column E, Variance %, and then, in the Number group, click the Decrease Decimal button, , until only one decimal place remains.

You should now have a report similar to the one shown in Figure 108, Ad Hoc Report from Performance Reporting Data Source .

Figure 108. Ad Hoc Report from Performance Reporting Data Source

This formatting will carry over to the report package doclet in Word. Youll add more formatting when youre authoring the doclet in Word (as described in Copying and Pasting Enterprise Performance Reporting Data into Doclets ).

23. Save the report and continue with Copying and Pasting Enterprise Performance Reporting Data into Doclets .

Well show you how to copy and paste the dynamic data points from this report in to a doclet in an Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud report package. This is a typical task that a doclet author performs during the authoring phase of the report package lifecycle.

Copying and Pasting Enterprise Performance Reporting Data into Doclets

For this demonstration, well work with an example Word-based report package called Department Reports. Well use the data that we created in Performing Ad Hoc Analysis with Enterprise Performance Reporting Data to create refreshable data points in a doclet called " Operating Expenses. " The doclet will contain text interspersed with data points, and the full grid.

Note:

The procedure in this topic could also be performed in a PowerPoint-based report package.

To copy and paste Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data into doclets:

1. In Word, connect to the Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data source, and then open a report package, as described in Connecting to Enterprise Performance Reporting in Smart View .

2. In the Smart View Panel, select the doclet to check out.

Figure 109. Smart View Panel Showing the Operating Expenses Doclets Selected

3. Double-click the doclet name to open it.

Figure 110. Doclet Opened from Smart View Panel, Ready to be Checked Out

4. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Check Out .

You can now author in the doclet. The example doclet in Figure 110 has placeholders within the paragraph for pasting data points. You can paste the entire grid below the table caption.

5. To copy and paste a data point:

a. Open and connect to the ad hoc grid that you created in Performing Ad Hoc Analysis with Enterprise Performance Reporting Data .

b. Select the Actual total operating expenses figure in cell B13, and then click from the Smart View ribbon.

Tip:

You must be connected to the ad hoc grid, and you must use the Copy and Paste buttons on the Smart View ribbon so that the data you copy and paste remains dynamic between Office applications.

c. In Word, position the cursor in the paragraph at the required location, and then, in the Smart View ribbon, click Paste .

The paste operation results in a placeholder, " #NEED_REFRESH ".

In this scenario, a second data point for plan operating expenses is pasted into the paragraph.

6. To copy and paste a range:

a. Go to the ad hoc grid that you created in Performing Ad Hoc Analysis with Enterprise Performance Reporting Data .

b. Select the entire grid, including all members, and then click ; in the example in Figure 111, Entire Ad Hoc Report Selected for Copying , you would select cells A2 through E13.

Remember that in Performing Ad Hoc Analysis with Enterprise Performance Reporting Data , step 19 , we moved the POV dimensions from row 1 to the POV toolbar. Thats why the grid that were copying from begins on row 2.

Figure 111. Entire Ad Hoc Report Selected for Copying

c. In Word, position the cursor at the location that you require, and in the Smart View ribbon, click Paste .

The paste operation results in a table in which every cell is populated with the placeholder, " #NEED_REFRESH ", as shown in Figure 112, Ad Hoc Grid Range Pasted Below Table Caption .

Figure 112. Ad Hoc Grid Range Pasted Below Table Caption

The data points and range are ready to be refreshed.

7. Click Refresh , either in the Smart View ribbon or the Performance Reporting ribbon.

The resulting doclet page should look like this:

8. Use the tools in Word to format the table in the doclet.

a. Select the entire table and from the Layout ribbon in Word, select AutoFit , and then AutoFit Contents .

b. Center the headings.

c. Right-align all the data values in the Actual, Plan, and Variance columns.

d. Center the percentages in the Variance % column.

e. Clear the borders from the entire table.

f. Add a single underline under the column headings and under the Actual, Plan, Variance, and Variance % columns in the " Depreciation and Amort " row.

g. Add double underlines under the Actual, Plan, Variance, and Variance % columns in the " Operating Expenses " row.

After youve applied the Word formatting, the table should resemble the table in Figure 113, Doclet Example Containing Formatted Word Table .

Figure 113. Doclet Example Containing Formatted Word Table

Now that youve completed your authoring tasks in the doclet, you can upload it and check it in to make it available to other doclet authors.

9. Save the doclet in Word.

10. In the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Upload .

11. In the Upload File dialog box, select the check box next to any style attributes that you want to override, and then click OK .

Style attributes in the doclet that differ from the style sample for the report package are noted with an exclamation point. In this case, there are no style attributes to override.

12. From the Performance Reporting ribbon, click Check In .

The lock icon is removed from the doclet in the doclet responsibilities list, indicating that the doclet is no longer checked out.

This completes the example scenario. In summary, we showed you how to accomplish these tasks:

- Create an ad hoc report while connected to an Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud data source.

- Format the figure and percentage data in Excel.

- Open a report package and check out a doclet for authoring.

- Copy and paste data points and ranges from the ad hoc grid in Excel to the doclet, creating a Word table.

- Format the table using Word formatting.

- Upload the doclet and check it in.

In a production environment, the next steps that you take depend on the requirements of the report package. You may need to submit the doclet for approval. You might need to author other doclets. Later, you may be asked to review portions or all of the report package. You can do all of these tasks in Smart View.

Smart View and Oracle BI EE

In This Section:

About Oracle BI EE and Smart View

Features and Components of Oracle BI EE in Smart View

Installing the Oracle BI EE Extension

Working with Windows System Locales in Oracle BI EE

Connecting to Multiple Oracle BI EE Data Sources

Oracle BI EE Catalog

Working with Oracle BI EE Analyses, Views, and Dashboards

Working with Views Using the View Designer

About Oracle BI EE and Smart View

With Smart View, users can connect to Oracle BI EE server and utilize the content created in Oracle Business Intelligence Answers dashboards and analyses. In addition to working with this content, Smart View users can create content in the form of simple views with the View Designer, using Oracle BI EE Presentation Server as the data source. The views created can then be published to the Oracle BI EE Presentation Catalog, where they can be edited further.

Smart View offers Oracle BI EE users a cohesive and consistent experience across all Oracle BI EE content providers.

Features and Components of Oracle BI EE in Smart View

When connected to an Oracle BI EE data source in Smart View, you can perform these actions:

- Connect to Oracle BI EE Presentation Server

- Navigate through the Oracle BI EE Presentation Catalog

- Connect to multiple instances of Oracle BI EE and switch between connections

- Import pre-created BI Answers views from Presentation Catalog into Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint, and Word. For example, you can:

- Insert views—BI tables, BI pivot tables, and BI graphs—into Excel as refreshable, editable objects

- Insert views from different connections into the same Office document

- Apply Excel formatting to BI data; formats are retained when you refresh

- Copy Oracle BI EE Dashboard content and paste it into Smart View client documents. The data, metadata, and view layout are copied

- Create simple views in Excel using Oracle BI EE Presentation Server as the source for metadata and data

- Interact with content imported into Smart View documents, such as drill and prompt selections

- Manage the imported content in Smart View, including content from multiple connections; for example, refresh, mask, copy and paste, and document contents

- Mask BI data from Oracle BI EE objects in Excel so that users must log in to view the data. Masked objects can be viewed upon refresh.

- Program using Visual Basic. See the Oracle Smart View for Office Developers Guide for more information.

Key components are:

- Ribbon—The Oracle BI EE ribbon contains Oracle BI EE commands for designing and publishing views in Smart View, inserting, and copying and pasting views from BI Answers, editing prompts, masking data, editing, and setting preferences.

- Catalog—The catalog is an expandable tree list of the BI Answers dashboards, analyses, and views that are available to you for insertion into Excel. Each analysis expands to display all views available from that analysis. Only views that are supported and defined in BI Answers, and for which you have permission, are displayed. You can refresh the catalog to display the latest list of available analyses and views.

Installing the Oracle BI EE Extension

Subtopics

- For Smart View End Users

- For Smart View Administrators

For Smart View End Users

To install the Oracle BI EE extension:

1. Install Smart View as instructed by your Smart View administrator.

Note:

In some cases, your administrator may install Smart View automatically for you.

2. After Smart View is installed, and before you start Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint, ensure that you are logged in to your computer with your own user name.

Note:

You must be logged in with your own user name, not an administrators or anyone elses user name, in order to be able to install and use the Oracle BI EE extension correctly.

3. Start Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint.

Note:

To install the Oracle BI EE extension, you can start Excel, Word, or PowerPoint; the Oracle BI EE extension installation is not launched from Outlook.

Smart View installs the Oracle BI EE extension upon the first startup of the Office product and registers the extension to the user that is currently logged in to Windows.

4. To verify that the Oracle BI EE extension is installed, from Excel, Word, or PowerPoint, select the Smart View ribbon, then Options , and then Extensions , and confirm that the Oracle BI EE extension is listed.

If the extension is not listed, contact your Smart View administrator.

For Smart View Administrators

After Smart View installation, the Oracle BI EE extension is installed automatically the first time an Office application is launched. You must ensure that the intended end user is logged in to Windows before Office is launched.

Or, you can control how your Smart View end users install the Oracle BI EE extension via the Extensions page of the Smart View Options dialog box. See " Administering Extension Installations and Updates " in the Oracle Smart View for Office Installation and Configuration Guide for more information on setting up automatic or manual installations.

If you choose to set up automatic or manual installations, you should install Smart View in a test environment first, then refer to the UpdateList.xml file, found in the extensions folder of your Smart View installation. Use the entry in this file as a guideline for the Oracle BI EE entry you will add to the UpdateList.xml file, as described in " Configuring Manual Extension Updates " in the Oracle Smart View for Office Installation and Configuration Guide .

Working with Windows System Locales in Oracle BI EE

On each Smart View client machine, Windows system locales must match that of Smart View in order for any data (numbers, dates, currencies, percentages) to be interpreted correctly.

The following are the applicable Windows system locales:

- Smart View xml:lang uage option

- Microsoft Office xml:lang uage

- Windows Regional Settings

- Windows operating system

When working with Oracle BI EE data sources, in cases of mismatched Windows system locales, data may display incorrectly, or formatting may be ignored and plain data rendered instead.

An example of a Windows system locale mismatch is the Windows operating system, Regional Settings, and Office xml:lang uage in English, and Smart View in Russian.

When locale mismatches occur, the Smart View log indicates a warning such as the following: " Encountered mismatched locale. Chart will use unformatted data values. "

Connecting to Multiple Oracle BI EE Data Sources

You connect to Oracle BI EE data sources using private connections, as described in Creating Private Connections . To connect using shared connections, the shared connection information must be stored in a file, as described in " Accessing Shared Connections from an XML File " in the Oracle Smart View Installation and Configuration Guide .

Additionally, Smart View supports multiple Oracle BI EE private connections on one Office worksheet, slide, or document.

For example, in one worksheet, you may insert two graphs from two different BI catalogs and refresh the sheet. Each graph will be updated with the latest data from the two different servers.

See the Oracle Smart View for Office Readme for information about Oracle BI EE version support for multiple connections.

When connected to multiple Oracle BI EE servers:

- Users can switch between those connections in the Smart View Panel and browse the respective catalogs.

- Users can insert views from the different connections into the same Office document.

- If View Designer is launched from the Smart View ribbon and no Oracle BI EE view is selected, then View Designer will be connected to the Oracle BI EE server that was last used.

- If Paste is invoked from the Smart View ribbon to paste content from BI Answers, the paste action will use the Oracle BI EE connection that was last used.

- When refreshing a document containing views from different connections, the views will be refreshed against the servers from which they were inserted.

- There can be only one Excel pivot table view per Excel worksheet. Additionally, Excel pivot table views are always inserted onto a new worksheet. This is the expected behavior, whether you are working with a single data source connection or with multiple connections.

To connect to multiple Oracle BI EE private connections:

1. From Smart View Home or from the menu displayed when you click the arrow next to , click Private Connections

2. In the Private Connections panel, select a connection from the drop-down menu and, in Connect to Data Source , enter your user name and password for the data source.

Assume you have inserted a view from the Oracle BI EE catalog. Continue with step 3

3. Move the cursor to a different part of the worksheet, slide, or document.

4. In the Private Connections panel, select a different connection from the drop-down menu.

5. In Connect to Data Source , enter your user name and password for the second data source.

You can now insert a view from the newly-connected data source into the Office document

6. Repeat step 3 through step 5 for any other data sources to which you want to connect.

Oracle BI EE Catalog

The Oracle BI EE Presentation Catalog, also referred to as the catalog or catalog tree, is displayed in the Smart View Panel. The catalog tree displays a root node called " Catalog Root " and, by default, two folders called " My Folders " and " Shared Folders ".

Figure 114. Oracle BI EE Catalog, or Catalog Tree

Items that you save to My Folders appear only to you when you expand the folder. Items that other users save to My Folders appear only to them.

Items that you save to Shared Folders can be viewed by all logged-on users with BI Consumer privileges. If you have BI Consumer privileges, you can also view the items that other users have saved in Shared Folders.

To view the properties of any folder to which you have access, including the name of the folder creator and the creation date, right-click the folder in the catalog tree and select View Folder Properties .

The folders in the catalog tree contain a list of analyses, both from Oracle BI EE and Smart View, as well as any subfolders created. Expand an analysis node (for example, " Area chart2 " under My Folders ) and the list of views that are stored there is displayed (for example, " Compound View 1 " and " Table 1 "), as shown in Figure 115, Catalog Tree Showing Views Under an Analysis Node .

Figure 115. Catalog Tree Showing Views Under an Analysis Node

To view the properties of an analysis, including the name of the analysis creator, the creation date, and modification date, right-click the analysis in the catalog tree and select View Analysis Properties .

You can choose to edit any analysis in BI Answers. If the view was created in Smart View, you can also choose to edit the view in Smart View.

To edit an analysis in BI Answers, right-click the analysis in the catalog tree and select Edit Analysis in Answers .

Selecting this option launches the default browser and opens the analysis editing wizard in BI Answers. If you are not already logged onto BI Answers, a login dialog box is displayed where you can enter your credentials. You must have BI Consumer privileges to edit a view in BI Answers.

To edit an analysis in Smart View, right-click the analysis in the catalog tree and select Launch in View Designer .

In this case, the view must have been created in Smart View. See Launching the View Designer for other methods for accessing views for editing.

From the catalog tree, you can also insert table views, pivot table views, graph views, titles, and compound views into Smart View. See Working with Oracle BI EE Analyses, Views, and Dashboards .

Working with Oracle BI EE Analyses, Views, and Dashboards

Subtopics

- Supported Oracle BI EE View and Object Types

- Inserting Tables and Pivot Tables

- Inserting Graphs

- Inserting Compound Views

- Inserting Dashboards

- Working with Prompts

- Working with Page Prompts

- Specifying Preferences for Refreshing Views

- Refreshing Views

- Masking Data in Views

- Viewing Properties of an Oracle BI EE Object

- Copying and Pasting Oracle BI EE Objects Between Office Applications

- Editing an Analysis in BI Answers

- Copying and Pasting Views From Oracle BI to Office

- Editing Views Created in BI Answers

In BI Answers, analyses are made up of individual views; dashboards are made up of analyses and individual views.

Supported Oracle BI EE View and Object Types

You can insert the following views into Smart View clients (Excel, PowerPoint, and Word) from the catalog or by copying and pasting.

Note:

Drill operations are not supported on Oracle BI EE views inserted in Smart View. (Drill operations are referred to as Zoom In and Zoom Out in Smart View.)

- Table Views

Data is displayed in table format, either in a format similar to the display in BI Answers, which is also referred to as native format, or as an Excel table.

Using the Insert option, table views can be inserted into all Smart View clients in native format. This format offers no sorting or filtering. Cells with the same data are merged into a single cell.

In Excel, using the Insert as Excel Table command, table views can be inserted as an Excel table. With this format, further analysis operations can be performed, such as sorting and filtering.

Notes:

- In Excel, you can insert multiple tables on a worksheet, but you cannot insert a table on top of an existing table. You can, however, do the following:

- To replace a table, select any cell within the table and click the Delete button on the Oracle BI EE ribbon. Then insert the table into the worksheet.

- To insert additional tables onto the worksheet, select a cell outside any table views or other view objects, and then insert the table.

- Some custom formats in table views and Excel table views may not be recognized by Excel, resulting in an error when the view is inserted into Excel.

- Pivot Table Views

Data is displayed in the grouped format defined in BI Answers, which is also referred to as native format. Features such as page item lists and group sectioning are maintained. Data can also be displayed in Excel pivot table format.

Using the Insert option, pivot table views can be inserted into all Smart View clients in native format. As with inserting a table view, this format offers no sorting or filtering; cells with the same data are merged into a single cell.

In Excel, using the Insert as Excel Pivot option, pivot table views may also be inserted as an Excel pivot table. With this format, you may perform further analysis operations, such as pivoting, aggregating, drilling, sorting, and filtering.

Notes:

- When working with Excel pivot table views, only views with measure columns of numerical data type are supported.

- There can be only one Excel pivot table view per Excel worksheet. Additionally, Excel pivot table views are always inserted onto a new worksheet. This is the expected behavior, whether you are working with a single data source connection or with multiple connections.

- Some custom formats in Pivot table views may not be recognized by Excel, resulting in an error when the view is inserted into Excel.

- Graph Views

Data is displayed mapping the graph defined in BI Answers graph to a graph type supported by Microsoft Office 2007 charts.

Using the Insert as Image option, graphs can be inserted directly into Smart View clients as a static image. The image cannot be edited or refreshed.

Using the Insert option in all Smart View clients, graphs can be edited and refreshed. Smart View attempts to match the graph style from BI Answers as closely as possible, including graph properties such as visual effect (2D, 3D), canvas size, chart title, subtitle, axis titles, legend and legend position, axis scale, data format (numeric, date, currency format), and title and label formatting.

If a matching Office chart type is not available, the graph view can be inserted as an image. See Supported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types and Unsupported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types .

- Gauge Views and Funnel Graph Views

In BI Answers, gauge views and funnel graph views are separate object types from graph views.

Using the Insert as Image option, gauge and funnel views can be inserted directly into Smart View clients as a static image. The image cannot be edited or refreshed.

- Title Views

The title of a report is displayed, along with other information that is part of the title view in BI Answers.

Title views are typically composed of title text, subtitle text, the analysis name, the date and time inserted, an optional logo, and an optional URL (for example, a help link). Title views are inserted into Smart View clients as a collection of text boxes and images grouped together as a single Office object.

- Compound Views

Data is displayed as an assembly of different views.

When inserted into Smart View clients, all supported views that make up the compound view are inserted. Each type of view—table, pivot table, graph, gauge, funnel, filter, and title—is inserted into Smart View clients in its own default format.

In Word, all views are inserted next to and below each other filling pages in the active Word document.

In Excel or PowerPoint, users are prompted to choose between inserting all the views on one sheet or slide, or inserting each view on a separate sheet or slide.

Inserting Tables and Pivot Tables

The maximum number of rows and columns that you can insert depends on the version of Excel you are using. See Microsoft Excel documentation for worksheet size limits.

To insert a table or pivot table:

1. Place the cursor at the point in the Excel worksheet, PowerPoint slide, or Word page where you want the table or pivot table to begin.

2. In the Oracle BI EE Presentation Catalog, right-click a table or pivot table.

3. Select one of the following:

- Insert —The selected table view or pivot table view is inserted in the format defined in BI Answers. See Figure 116, Table View Inserted as Table with Formatting from BI Answers and Figure 117, Pivot Table Inserted as a Pivot Table with Formatting from BI Answers ,

If prompts are defined for the table or pivot table in BI Answers, the Prompt Selector dialog box is displayed where you make selections on the data to display (otherwise, the table or pivot table is inserted directly). After the initial insert, you may edit the prompts by clicking the Edit Prompts icon in the Oracle BI EE ribbon. See Working with Prompts for more information.

If page prompts are defined for the table or pivot table (view prompts in BI Answers), you may edit them by clicking the Edit Page Prompts icon in the Oracle BI EE ribbon. See Working with Page Prompts .

Notes:

Figure 116. Table View Inserted as Table with Formatting from BI Answers

Figure 117. Pivot Table Inserted as a Pivot Table with Formatting from BI Answers

In Smart View clients, the table is displayed in the form a grid.

- Insert as Excel Table (table views only)—The selected table view is inserted as an Excel table. Columns in the page prompt edge and section edge, if present, are moved to the top of the table as drop-down headings. Select this option when you want to use Excel operations to filter, define formulas, sort, and perform other Excel tasks.

When a table view is inserted as an Excel table, prompts that are defined in BI Answers are not available.

The selected table is inserted on the worksheet. See Figure 118, Portion of a Table View Inserted as an Excel Table .

Figure 118. Portion of a Table View Inserted as an Excel Table

- Insert as Excel Pivot (pivot table views only)—The selected pivot table view is inserted as an Excel pivot table. Columns in the page edge and section edge, if present, are mapped to the report filters area, and columns in the measures edge are moved to the values area. Select this option when you want to perform further analysis, such as aggregating, pivoting, drilling, sorting, and filtering.

The selected table or pivot table is inserted on the worksheet. See Figure 119, Pivot Table Inserted as an Excel Pivot Table .

Notes:

- When a pivot table view is inserted as an Excel Pivot table, prompts that are defined in BI Answers are not available.

- When working with Excel pivot table views, only views with measure columns of numerical data type are supported.

- There can be only one Excel pivot table view per Excel worksheet. Additionally, Excel pivot table views are always inserted onto a new worksheet. This is the expected behavior, whether you are working with a single data source connection or with multiple connections.

Figure 119. Pivot Table Inserted as an Excel Pivot Table

You can edit tables and pivot tables as described in Editing Views Created in BI Answers .

Inserting Graphs

When inserting graphs, Smart View attempts to map the BI Answers graph into a chart type supported by Microsoft Office 2007 charts. Further, Smart View attempts to match visual effects, such as 2D or 3D, and other graph properties such as canvas size, axis scale, data format, and formatting in terms of font styles and colors.

When a matching chart type is not available, the graph view can only be inserted as image.

See Supported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types and Unsupported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types .

To insert a graph:

1. From the catalog, right-click a graph view.

2. Select an option:

- Insert —The selected graph is inserted as an Excel chart, which can be edited, masked, and refreshed.

If prompts are defined for the graph in BI Answers, the Prompt Selector dialog box is displayed where you make selections on the data to display (otherwise, the graph is inserted directly). After the initial insert, you may edit the prompts by clicking the Edit Prompts icon in the Oracle BI EE ribbon. See Working with Prompts .

If page prompts are defined for the graph (view prompts in BI Answers), you may edit them by clicking the Edit Page Prompts icon in the Oracle BI EE ribbon. See Working with Prompts for more information.

If no prompts are defined for this analysis, then the graph is inserted directly. See Figure 120, A Pie Chart View Inserted as an Excel Chart .

Figure 120. A Pie Chart View Inserted as an Excel Chart

You can edit graphs inserted this way as described in Editing Views Created in BI Answers .

- Insert as Image —The selected graph is inserted as an image of the graph, which cannot be edited or customized.

When a graph is inserted directly as an image, prompts, page prompts, and sections that are defined in BI Answers are not available.

Note that gauge and funnel objects can only be inserted using the Insert as Image command.

Figure 121. A Pie Chart View Inserted as an Image

Once inserted, whether as an Excel chart or as an image, both types of graphs shown can be resized by stretching them.

Supported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types

The following chart subtypes are supported:

- Line

- Bar: Vertical, Horizontal, Stacked Vertical, Stacked Horizontal, 100% Stacked Vertical, 100% Stacked Horizontal

- Area: Stacked, 100% Stacked

- Pie graph

- Bubble

- Scatter

- Line-bar Combination: Standard, Stacked

- Radar

The following graphs can only be inserted as an image:

- Time Line Series

- Pareto

- Waterfall

The following objects can only be inserted as an image:

- Gauge

- Funnel

Unsupported Oracle BI EE Chart and Object Types

The following view types are not supported:

- Performance Tiles

- Trellis views

- Map views

- Filters views—You can only view properties for filter views, using the View Analysis Properties command in the catalog tree.

- Selection Steps

- Column Selector

- View Selector

- Legend

- Narrative

- Ticker

- Static Text

- Logical SQL

- Create Segment

- Create Target List

- Static text, ticker, or HTML views

- Scorecards

- KPIs or KPI watchlists

Inserting Compound Views

To insert a compound view:

1. From the catalog, select the compound view to insert.

2. Right-click and select Insert All Views .

3. When prompted, choose an option:

- One object per sheet/slide to insert each object in the compound view on a separate sheet in Excel, or a separate slide in PowerPoint.

- All objects on one sheet/slide to display all objects on one Excel sheet or PowerPoint slide.

In Word, objects are placed adjacent to and below other objects on a sheet until the sheet is filled, and then continues filling as many sheets as required to hold all the objects.

The default display is selected for the table, pivot table, and graph view types; that is, the Insert action will be used automatically.

A message notifies you of unsupported view types in the compound view. Unsupported view types are not inserted.

Note:

You may perform Refresh and edit prompt and page prompts for selected views. Unselected views from the compound view remain unchanged. See Refreshing Views , Working with Prompts , and Working with Page Prompts .

Inserting Dashboards

Dashboards are displayed in the Presentation Catalog as folders. A dashboard folder can be expanded to show dashboard pages; a dashboard page can be expanded to show the list of analyses included in that page. You can insert dashboard pages into Excel, PowerPoint, and Word.

To insert dashboard pages into Office applications:

1. From the catalog, right-click a dashboard page and select Insert All Views .

2. When prompted, choose an option:

- One object per sheet/slide to insert each object in the dashboard on a separate sheet in Excel, or a separate slide in PowerPoint.

- All objects on one sheet/slide to display all objects on one Excel sheet or PowerPoint slide.

In Word, objects are placed adjacent to and below other objects on a sheet until the sheet is filled, and then continues filling as many sheets as required to hold all the objects.

Default display is selected for the table, pivot table, and graph view types; that is, the Insert action is used automatically.

A message notifies of unsupported view types in the dashboard. Unsupported view types are not inserted.

Note:

You may perform Refresh and edit prompt and page prompts for selected views. Unselected views from the dashboard remain unchanged. See Refreshing Views , Working with Prompts , and Working with Page Prompts .

Working with Prompts

Prompts enable users to specify criteria that determines the content of the view that they are inserting. Smart View supports both prompts and page prompts. See also Working with Page Prompts for information on page prompts.

Prompts in Smart View are the equivalent of prompts in BI Answers. Smart View only supports column prompts.

Prompts are defined at the analysis level in BI Answers. Users are prompted to enter values for these prompts each time a view is inserted in Smart View.

If prompts are defined on an analysis in BI Answers, then when you insert a table, pivot table, or graph view from the analysis into Smart View, you are prompted to select the data to be displayed for that view. When inserting a compound view from an analysis that has prompts defined, you are prompted to enter values only one time for all the views in that compound view.

For example, a prompt on Year is designated for an analysis, and the years 2010, 2011, and 2012 are available to choose from. When you insert a table, pivot table, or graph, you are prompted to select which years data to display: 2010, 2011, or 2012. Or, you can choose to insert the compound view, and the prompt selection you make is applied to all the views inserted. After insertion, you can edit the prompts on each individual view to select another years data to display.

Views can only be edited individually. The edit operation will prompt you for the values to be selected for each view that is being edited.

You may edit prompts in views that were inserted, or copied and pasted.

Note:

Prompts defined on hierarchical columns in BI Answers are not supported in Smart View.

To edit prompts:

1. From the worksheet, select a view:

- Graph views—Select the graph.

- Table and pivot table views—Select a cell in the table.

2. From the Oracle BI EE ribbon, select the Edit Prompts button to display your original selections.

Figure 122. Edit Prompts Button

If the report definition has changed on the BI server, your selections are reset, and you must select all prompts and columns again.

3. In the Prompt Selector , modify the prompt selections.

Depending on how the prompt was set up in BI Answers, you may be selecting data directly from a drop-down list on the Prompt Selector . You may also be picking values from the Value Selector dialog box.

Figure 123, Value Selector Dialog Box Showing the Years 2008, 2009, and 2010 Selected is an example of a Value Selector , where the years 2008, 2009, and 2010 were selected for display.

Figure 123. Value Selector Dialog Box Showing the Years 2008, 2009, and 2010 Selected

After clicking OK in the Value Selector , the selections populate the first prompt in the example Prompt Selector ( Figure 124, Filled-In Prompt Selector ). A second prompt in the example Prompt Selector requires that you directly enter an amount; in this example, the amount to display is Billed Quantity greater than $5,000.

The completed Prompt Selector dialog then looks like Figure 124, Filled-In Prompt Selector .

Figure 124. Filled-In Prompt Selector

In some cases, the data to choose from can be exceedingly long. To accommodate loading large amounts of data in the Value Selector , Smart View presents values in groups. Scroll and make selections from the first group shown, then click More to view and make selections from the next group. Continue clicking More until you have viewed and made selections from the entire data list. Figure 125, Value Selector Showing " More " for Large Amounts of Data shows an example.

Figure 125. Value Selector Showing " More " for Large Amounts of Data

4. Click OK to close the Prompt Selector .

After you make selections and click OK , the view is immediately refreshed and reflects your selections.

5. Repeat this procedure to edit the prompts to change the output displayed.

Working with Page Prompts

Page prompts enable users to specify criteria that determines the content of the view that has been inserted. Smart View supports both page prompts and prompts. See also Working with Prompts .

Page Prompts in Smart View are the equivalent of view prompts in BI Answers. View prompts are specified on individual views within an analysis. Smart View supports table prompts, graph prompts, and gauge prompts in BI Answers; these types of prompts are called page prompts in Smart View.

Page prompts may vary on individual views within an analysis. An individual table view within an analysis may have a page prompt set on Year, and a pivot table view within the same analysis may have a page prompt set on Line of Business.

When you first insert a view that contains page prompts, a view state is selected by default. For example, if a prompt on Year is specified on a particular view within an analysis, and the years 2010, 2011, and 2012 are available to choose from, you are not prompted for these at the time of insertion. Instead, a default state of the view is inserted. For example, 2010 data may automatically be inserted, as the first year in the list of years available. You can then edit the page prompts to select another years data to display for this view.

You may edit page prompts in views that have been inserted, or copied and pasted.

To edit page prompts:

1. From the worksheet, select a view:

- Graph views—Select the graph.

- Table and pivot table views—Select any cell in the table.

2. From the Oracle BI EE ribbon, select the Edit Page Prompts button to display the default page prompt selections for a particular view.

Figure 126. Edit Page Prompts Button

If the report definition has changed on the BI server, your selections are reset, and you must select all page prompts again.

3. In the Page Selector , modify the page prompt selections by selecting from the drop-down lists.

Figure 127, Filled-in Page Selector shows a Page Selector dialog box, where users select a Year and a Line of Business. In the example, selections were made to display 2010 for the year, and Electronics for the Line of Business.

Figure 127. Filled-in Page Selector

4. Click OK to close the Page Selector .

After you make selections and click OK , the view is immediately refreshed and reflects your selections.

5. Repeat this procedure to edit the page prompts to change the output displayed.

Specifying Preferences for Refreshing Views

Refresh preferences are available on a per-view basis. The refresh preferences that you set for each view within a worksheet, slide, or page are saved along with the Office document (Excel workbook, PowerPoint slide presentation, or Word document).

To specify preferences for refreshing a view:

1. Ensure that one or more Oracle BI EE views are inserted into Smart View.

2. In Document Contents , click to refresh the content of the pane.

All views that were inserted into the active Office application are displayed in Document Contents in a tree format.

3. Select a view in Document Contents , and then select Properties .

4. In Properties , select an option from Refresh Preferences :

- Refresh Data —Refreshes only the data points in the selected view or analysis.

Any changes made to formatting in the sheet, slide, or page are retained.

- Replace View —Replaces the entire view, including any formatting changes set in BI Answers.

If you select this option, your prompt and graph selections and custom formatting are lost upon refresh if the view definition has changed.

Note:

Oracle BI EE title views are not included in refresh actions, so all customizations to a title view are retained when you refresh the worksheet or workbook.

- Do not refresh —Refreshing is not allowed.

5. Click OK to save the Refresh Preference selection.

Continue with Refreshing Views .

Refreshing Views

You can refresh the BI data in your inserted views. You have the option of refreshing selected views or refreshing all views, depending on the Office document type, as follows.

Excel

- Individual views

- Individual worksheets

- Entire workbook

PowerPoint

- Individual views

- Individual slides

- Entire presentation

Word

- Individual views

- Entire document

You can refresh views from the Document Contents pane, the Oracle BI EE ribbon, or the Smart View ribbon.

The refresh action is limited according to the Refresh Preference set for a selected view. See Specifying Preferences for Refreshing Views for information.

Note that when you refresh, title views are not included in refresh actions, so all customizations to a title view are retained when you refresh the Office document.

When there are multiple objects on an Office document, if you attempt to refresh the document without having already connected, then you will be prompted for your login credentials once for all objects. If you choose to cancel instead, the Connect to Data Source dialog box will appear for each object on the sheet, and you must click Cancel for each object. For example, if there are six objects on the sheet, the dialog box will appear six times, once for each object.

To refresh Oracle BI EE views from the Document Contents pane:

1. In Document Contents , ensure that Oracle BI EE - Document Hierarchy is displayed in the drop-down list box.

2. In Document Contents , click to refresh the contents of the tree.

From Document Contents , you can refresh individual views in all Office applications, individual worksheets, and individual slides.

3. Perform an action:

- To refresh a selected view in an Excel sheet, PowerPoint slide, or Word document, select the view object from the tree in Document Contents , and then select the Refresh View action from the right-click menu or click the Refresh View link at the bottom of the pane.

Repeat for each view that you want to refresh.

- To refresh all Oracle BI EE views on a selected Excel worksheet or PowerPoint slide, select the sheet or slide from the tree in Document Contents , and then select the Refresh action from the right-click menu or click the Refresh link at the bottom of the pane.

Repeat for each sheet or slide that you want to refresh.

To refresh all Oracle BI EE views on a worksheet or slide, or an entire Word document, using the ribbons:

1. Perform an action:

- Select the worksheet or slide to make it active.

- Place your cursor in the Word document to select it.

2. Click Refresh in the Oracle BI EE ribbon or the Smart View ribbon.

To refresh all Oracle BI EE views in an Excel workbook, PowerPoint presentation, or Word document:

1. Place your cursor anywhere in the workbook, presentation or document to select it.

2. Perform an action:

- To refresh all Oracle BI EE views in an Excel workbook, click the down arrow in Refresh in the Smart View ribbon and select Refresh all Worksheets . Figure 128, Refresh Icon with Down Arrow in Excel and PowerPoint shows the Refresh icon with the arrow:

Figure 128. Refresh Icon with Down Arrow in Excel and PowerPoint

Alternatively, click the down arrow in Refresh in the Oracle BI EE ribbon and select Refresh Workbook Data .

- To refresh all Oracle BI EE views in a PowerPoint presentation, click the down arrow in Refresh in the Smart View ribbon and select Refresh All Slides .

Alternatively, click the down arrow in Refresh in the Oracle BI EE ribbon and select Refresh Presentation Data .

- To refresh all views in a Word document, click Refresh in the Oracle BI EE ribbon or the Smart View ribbon. The Refresh icon in Word does not contain a down arrow, as shown in Figure 129, Refresh Icon in Word .

Figure 129. Refresh Icon in Word

Note:

If requested, provide your credentials for Oracle BI EE.

Masking Data in Views

You can mask data in the Oracle BI EE views that you insert in Office documents and in views you create using the View Designer. You have the option of masking data in:

- Selected views

- All views on sheet or a slide

- All views in an Office document

Using the Mask Data functionality in Smart View, you can perform these actions:

- Select a single Smart View object in an Excel sheet or PowerPoint slide and mask data only in that object

- Mask data in the active Excel worksheet or PowerPoint slide

- Mask data in the active workbook, presentation, or Word document

You can invoke Mask Data from these locations:

- Document Contents in the Smart View Panel

- Oracle BI EE ribbon

Masking Data for an Individual View

To mask data in an individual view in an Excel worksheet or PowerPoint slide:

1. In Excel or PowerPoint, click in Document Contents to refresh the contents of the tree.

Note:

Data in Word documents can only be masked in their entirety; you cannot mask data in individual views in Word.

2. Locate the view with data that you want to mask in Document Contents , and then select it.

3. Click the Mask Data link in Document Contents .

In a table object, cells are replaced with the text, " Need refresh "; in a graph, the area becomes blank and a small lock image is displayed.

4. Save the current workbook or presentation.

The masked state of the view remains intact after saving.

5. To display the data in the masked view, click in Document Contents , select the view in the tree, and then click the Refresh View link.

Masking Data on a Sheet or Slide

To mask data on an Excel worksheet or PowerPoint slide:

1. Choose a method to select a sheet or slide:

- Place the cursor directly in a sheet or slide

- In Document Contents , click , locate the sheet or slide in the tree, and then select it.

2. Choose a method to mask data for all objects on the selected sheet or slide:

- In the Oracle BI EE ribbon, click the Mask Data button.

Figure 130. Mask Data Button

- In Document Contents , click the Mask Data link.

Data on the sheet or slide is masked.

Note:

Data in Word documents can only be masked in their entirety; you cannot mask data on individual pages in Word.

3. Save the current workbook or presentation.

The masked state of the sheet or slide remains intact after saving.

4. To display the data in the masked sheet or slide, click in Document Contents , select the sheet or slide in the tree, and then click the Refresh link.

Alternatively, place the cursor in the sheet or slide to refresh, and then click .

Masking Data in an Entire Office Document

To mask data in an entire Office document:

1. From the Oracle BI EE ribbon in the opened Office document, perform an action:

- Excel: Click the down arrow in and select Mask Workbook Data .

- PowerPoint: Click the down arrow in and select Mask Presentation Data .

- Word: Click .

Note:

Word documents can only be masked in their entirety; you cannot mask individual pages in Word.

2. Save the current Office document.

The masked state of the workbook, presentation, or document remains intact after saving.

3. To display the masked data, click in Document Contents , select the sheet, slide, or document in the tree, and then click the Refresh link.

Alternatively, place the cursor in the sheet, slide, or document to be refreshed, and then click .

Viewing Properties of an Oracle BI EE Object

You can view various properties of a selected worksheet, slide, document, or view.

To view the properties of an Oracle BI EE object:

1. Select an Oracle BI EE object.

Select an actual object and not a sheet or slide.

2. Click the Properties link at the bottom of the Document Contents pane.

Copying and Pasting Oracle BI EE Objects Between Office Applications

You can copy Oracle BI EE objects within and between Office applications as follows:

- Graphs can be copied within and between any Office application.

- Tables and pivot tables can be copied within and between Word and PowerPoint.

- Tables and pivot tables cannot be copied within Excel, from Excel to another Office application, or from another Office application to Excel.

- Tables and pivot tables can only be copied and pasted by sections.

Copying and Pasting a Graph View

To copy and paste a graph view:

1. In Excel, Word, or PowerPoint, select the graph view to copy.

You can use Document Contents to locate the view, but then select the graph directly in the sheet, slide, or page.

2. From the Oracle BI EE ribbon, click .

3. Access the Office application and position the cursor where you want to paste the graph view.

For example, if you are pasting within an Office application (or if you are copying from Excel and want to paste into PowerPoint, open PowerPoint), position the cursor at the point within the Office document where you want to paste the object.

4. Click .

5. Repeat for all graphs that you want to copy and paste.

Copying and Pasting a Table or Pivot Table View

To copy and paste a table view or pivot table view:

1. In Word or PowerPoint, select the table view or pivot table view to copy.

You can use Document Contents to locate the view, but then select the table or pivot table directly in the slide or page.

2. From the Oracle BI EE ribbon, click .

3. Access the Office application and position the cursor where you want to paste the table or pivot table view.

For example, if you are pasting within an Office application (or if you are copying from Word and want to paste into PowerPoint, open PowerPoint), position the cursor at the point within the Office document where you want to paste the object.

4. Click .

5. Repeat for all tables or pivot tables that you want to copy and paste.

Editing an Analysis in BI Answers

If the available analysis view does not display the data required, or the data is not displayed as desired, you can edit the view in BI Answers.

Note:

To edit a view in BI Answers, you must have the required Oracle BI EE permissions.

To edit a view in BI Answers:

1. From the Catalog, right-click the view, and then select Edit Analysis in Answers .

2. In the login screen, enter your credentials for Oracle BI EE.

The selected view is displayed in BI Answers.

3. In BI Answers, edit and save the view.

4. Return to the Office application.

5. From the Oracle BI EE ribbon, click Refresh , and verify that your changes are reflected in the view.

Copying and Pasting Views From Oracle BI to Office

You can copy and paste views from BI Answers to Smart View.

When you refresh pasted views, the data is refreshed, but the analysis definition is not, even if its definition has been modified in BI Answers.

Note:

When copying and pasting views from BI Answers to Smart View, some formatting may not be imported to Office.

To copy and paste a view:

1. Ensure that you are logged into Oracle BI EE.

2. From BI Answers or Interactive Dashboards, launch the analysis that you want to copy.

3. Click the Copy link at the bottom of the analysis (displayed only if the analysis is enabled for copying).

4. Open an Office application, such as Excel, and connect to the appropriate Oracle BI EE data source.

5. From the Oracle BI EE ribbon, click .

Editing Views Created in BI Answers

Subtopics

- What Can and Cannot Be Edited

- Editing Pivot Tables Inserted into PowerPoint

- Other Guidelines

What Can and Cannot Be Edited

Note the following when editing views that were created in BI Answers:

- Table views and graph views that are inserted or pasted as Microsoft objects using the Insert command can be edited in Excel, PowerPoint, or Word.

- Table views that are inserted or pasted as lists, and graphs views that are inserted as images cannot be edited in Excel.

- Views that are inserted or pasted as images cannot be edited in PowerPoint.

Editing Pivot Tables Inserted into PowerPoint

Consider the following items when editing pivot table views that were created in BI Answers.

Small Pivot Tables

For small pivot tables in PowerPoint, changes to column width and row height can be made by using the mouse to drag column and row borders to the desired height and width.

Large Pivot Tables

To adjust column width and row height in large pivot tables, especially where rows and columns are outside of the slide area, use PowerPoints table editing tools in as follows:

1. Select the pivot table.

2. Select the Layout ribbon in PowerPoint.

3. Select a row or column in the pivot table.

4. Adjust height and width by changing the height and width values in the Cell Size group.

Other Guidelines

Note the following guidelines when editing views that were created in BI Answers:

- Smart View does not support duplication of charts or tables through the PowerPoint " Duplicate Slide " command.

In PowerPoint, after duplicating a slide containing a chart, any attempt to update the prompts of either chart result in the prompts for only the original chart being updated. The chart on the duplicate slide is never updated.

For a pivot table inserted into a PowerPoint slide then duplicated, if you change the prompt for either pivot table, only the pivot table original slide is updated, whether you changed the prompt in the original slide or the duplicate.

- Some modifications made to graphs using Microsoft Office formatting tools—such as changes to colors—may not persist when prompts are changed and the graph is refreshed. Smart View does not keep track of such formatting changes; this is done by Microsoft Office. When a graph series is removed, the format of the series is removed by Office as well. Changing prompts can cause the series count and order to change, which means the formatting will also change. This is expected behavior.

Working with Views Using the View Designer

Subtopics

- Launching the View Designer

- Defining the View Type and Display Style

- Defining the View Layout

- Defining the Filter Expression for Views in View Designer

- Publishing Views

- Editing Views Created in View Designer

- Refreshing Data in a View Created in View Designer

Using the View Designer in Smart View, you can create ad hoc views based on an Oracle BI EE subject area. Views created in Smart View can be saved to the Oracle Business Intelligence catalog and edited in either Smart View or BI Answers.

View Designer is available in Microsoft Excel, Word, and PowerPoint.

Launching the View Designer

Depending on whether you are creating a view or editing a view, you can launch the View Designer using the methods described in this topic.

To launch the View Designer:

1. Perform an action:

- To create a new view:

- Right-click the Catalog Root node in the catalog tree, and then select Create New View .

- Select the Catalog Root node in the catalog tree, and then select Create New View at the bottom of the Smart View Panel.

- From the Oracle BI EE ribbon, click the View Designer icon.

Figure 131. View Designer Icon

You must already be connected to a view in the catalog tree to enable the Oracle BI EE ribbon.

- To edit a view (the view must have been created and inserted from View Designer):

- From the catalog tree, select a view to edit that was created in View Designer and saved to the Presentation Catalog fromSmart View, and then select the Load view in View Designer link at the bottom of the Smart View Panel.

- Select an existing view on a worksheet in the current or in a saved Office document and click the View Designer icon (see Figure 131, View Designer Icon ).

- To edit an Excel Pivot Table, click anywhere in the current or in a saved worksheet, even outside the boundaries of the Excel Pivot Table, and click the View Designer icon (see Figure 131, View Designer Icon ).

Note:

You can only edit views that were created and inserted from the View Designer in Smart View. To edit views created in BI Answers, you must use BI Answers.

The Design Layout tab of the View Designer is displayed. Figure 132, View Designer, Design Layout Tab for Pivot Table Layout shows the Design Layout tab of the View Designer with selections made in the Page, Section, Row, Column, and Measures edges.

Figure 132. View Designer, Design Layout Tab for Pivot Table Layout

2. Continue the view design process by following the procedure in Defining the View Type and Display Style .

Defining the View Type and Display Style

When you are creating a view, you define the view type and display style. This is done only once, during the view creation process. Once the view is created, you cannot edit these two settings.

To define the view type and display style:

1. If you have not already done so, invoke the View Designer (see Launching the View Designer .

2. In View Type , select the type of view that you are creating:

- Table

- Pivot Table (the default)

- Line Graph

- Bar Graph

- Column Graph

- Area Graph

- Pie Chart

- Scatter Chart

- Stacked Column Graph

The selection that you make affects the options available in Display Style along with the fields in the layout area.

Note:

You cannot change this selection when editing the view either in Smart View or BI Answers.

3. In Display Style , select a View Type and Display Style option from Table 19 .

Display style determines how the view is inserted into Excel.

Note:

You cannot change this selection when editing the view either in Smart View or BI Answers.

Table 19. View Type Selected and the Display Style Available

View Type Selected

Display Style Available

Table

Excel Table

Table

Pivot Table (default)

Excel Pivot Table (default)

Pivot Table

Line Chart

Bar Chart

Column Chart

Area Chart

Pie Chart

Scatter Chart

Stacked Column Chart

Excel Chart

Chart Image

4. Continue the view design process by following the procedure in Defining the View Layout .

Defining the View Layout

Define the view layout during the view creation process. You can also edit the view layout of views created in View Designer.

To define or edit the view layout:

1. If you have not already done so, invoke the View Designer (see Launching the View Designer ).

2. If you are creating a new view, complete the steps in Defining the View Type and Display Style .

If you are editing a view, continue with step 3 .

3. In the left pane of the View Designer, expand a subject area and the folders to view the columns that you want to work with.

4. Drag columns from the expanded subject area tree and drop them in the layout area.

The edges in the layout area vary depending on the selections that you made in the View Type , as described in Table 20 .

Table 20. View Type Selected and the Edges Available in the Layout Area of the View Designer

View Type Selection

Edges In Layout Area

Table

Page , Section , Row , Column , Measures

Optional: In the Row edge, select the Row Grand Total check box.

Pivot Table (default)

Page , Section , Row , Column , Measures

Optional: In the Row edge, select the Row Grand Total check box.

Optional: In the Column edge, select the Column Grand Total check box.

Line Chart

Page , Section , Group By (X) , Lines (X) , Data: Lines (Y)

Bar Chart

Page , Section , Group By (X) , Bars (X) , Data: Bars (Y)

Column Chart

Page , Section , Group By (X) , Columns (X) , Data: Columns (Y)

Area Chart

Page , Section , Group By (X) , Area (X) , Data: Areas (Y)

Pie Chart

Page , Section , Pies , Slices , Slice Size

Scatter Chart

Page , Section , Group By (X) , Vary by Color , Data

Stacked Column Chart

Page , Section , Group By (X) , Bars (X) , Data: Bars (Y)

5. Optional: Perform any of these tasks, as applicable, on the columns you have dragged to edges in the View Designer:

- To move a column between edges, drag the column from one edge and drop it on another; for example, drag a column from the Row edge and drop it on the Column edge.

- To reposition the column within the edge, click on a column name and select the Up or Down arrow.

- To add a subtotal to a column or row in an edge, right-click a column and select Subtotal .

Note:

The Subtotal option is ignored when applied to the bottom column in an edge, even though the option is selectable in the drop-down menu.

- To add columns to filter criteria for this view, click on a column and select Add to Filter .

The columns that you select are added to the Filter Expression area of the Define Filters tab, where you can further define them. See Defining the Filter Expression for Views in View Designer for more information.

- To remove a column from an edge, click on the column and select Remove .

6. Optional: If you are working with a table or pivot table view, regardless of the display style:

- Pivot Table view: In the Row and Column edges, select or clear the Row Grand Total and Column Grand Total check boxes as you require.

- Table view: In the Row edge, select or clear the Row Grand Total check box.

7. Optional: If you are working with a pivot table view that has the pivot table display style, you can perform these actions with the Measure Label element:

- Reorder the Measure Label element within the Column edge.

- Move the Measure Label to any other edge except the Measure edge.

Notes about the Measure Label element:

- The Measure Label element represents the labels for all the Measures columns in the Measures edge. In the View Designer, the Measure Label element appears by default in the Column edge.

- Measure Label is only available when both the View Type and Display Type is Pivot Table .

- Experiment with moving the Measure Label element to another edge or reordering it within the Column edge. The result may be a more readable pivot table layout.

- Measure Label cannot be removed from the View Designer.

- Measure Label cannot be placed in the Measures edge.

8. To define filters, click the Filters tab and continue with Defining the Filter Expression for Views in View Designer .

If you do not plan to define filters, click OK :

- If you are creating a new view, the view is inserted into Excel.

- If you are editing a view, the old view is removed and the updated view is inserted.

Defining the Filter Expression for Views in View Designer

Columns that you added for filtering in step 5 in Defining the View Layout are automatically added to the Filter Expression area of the Define Filters tab in View Designer.

Whether you are creating a new view or editing an existing view, you can add more filter columns, and further define and refine filters on all columns.

To define or edit the filter expression for a view created in View Designer:

1. Complete the steps in Defining the View Layout , selecting the Define Filters tab in step 8 .

The columns that you added for filtering in step 5 should be displayed on the Define Filters tab.

2. Optional: Add more columns to the Filter Expression area of the Define Filters tab.

3. Select a column in Filter Expression .

4. Select a corresponding filter operator from the drop-down list next to the column name.

The operator list from which you can choose is populated based on the type of column that you selected.

Guidelines for choosing an operator are described in Filter Operators .

5. Specify a filter value in the last column by clicking and making a selection in the Value Selector.

For example, here is a set of filters based on the Sample Sales database:

The filters that you define are summarized in the Filter Summary pane. For example, for the filters defined in this step, the summary looks like this:

In some cases, the data to choose from can be exceedingly long. To accommodate loading large amounts of data in the Value Selector, Smart View presents values in groups. Scroll and make selections from the first group shown, then click More to view and make selections from the next group. Continue clicking More until you have viewed and made selections from the entire data list. Figure 133, Value Selector Showing "More" for Large Amounts of Data shows an example.

Figure 133. Value Selector Showing "More" for Large Amounts of Data

6. Optional: If required, click the logical operator button in Filter Expression and make a selection to change the operator:

- AND

- OR

The default logical operator is AND .

Changing the logical operator on one line of the filter expression automatically changes the operator for all lines in the expression so that the operator is the same for all lines.

7. Optional: To remove a line from the filter expression, right-click the column button in the line, and then select Remove , as shown in Figure 134, Remove Option that is Displayed When Right-clicking a Column in a Filter Expression .

Figure 134. Remove Option that is Displayed When Right-clicking a Column in a Filter Expression

8. When you are finished defining filters, click OK to insert the view into Excel.

Filter Operators

Use the guidelines in Table 21 when choosing an operator and specifying the required values. The operator list from which you can choose is populated based on the function that you are performing (for example, creating a filter or creating a dashboard prompt) and the type of column that you selected.

Table 21. Guidelines for Choosing an Operator When Creating a Column Filter

Operator

Usage Guidelines

is equal to / is in

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results include only records where the data in the column matches the value in the filter.

is not equal to / is not in

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results include only records where the data in the column does not match the value in the filter.

is less than

Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value. Results include only records where the data in the column is less than the value in the filter.

is greater than

Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value. Results include only records where the data in the column is greater than the value in the filter.

is less than or equal to

Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results include only records where the data in the column is less than or the same as the value in the filter.

is greater than or equal to

Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results include only records where the data in the column is greater than or the same as the value in the filter.

is between

Valid for a column that contains numbers or dates. Specify two values. Result include only records where the data in the column is between the two values in the filter.

is null

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Do not specify a value. The operator tests only for the absence of data in the column. Results include only records where there is no data in the column.

Sometimes it might be useful to know whether any data is present, and using the is null operator is a way to test for that condition. For example, suppose your business has a worldwide address book and you want to extract the United States addresses only. You could do this by checking for the presence or absence of data in the "State" field. This field should be unpopulated (null) for non-United States addresses and populated (not null) for United States addresses. You can obtain a list of United States addresses without the need to check the column for a specific value.

is not null

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Do not specify a value. The operator tests only for the presence of data in the column. Results include only records where there is data in the column.

is ranked first

Valid for a column that contains text or dates. Specify a single value. Results include only the first n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.

This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list that contains the first 10 brand names in alphabetical order.

ranked last

Valid for a column that contains text or dates. Specify a single value. Results include only the last n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.

This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list of the dates of the last 10 sales transactions.

is in top

Valid for a column that contains numbers. Specify a single value. Results include only the first n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.

This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list of the top 10 sales in dollars.

is in bottom

Valid for a column that contains numbers. Specify a single value. Results include only the last n records, where n is a whole number specified as the value in the filter.

This operator is for ranked results. For example, you could use this operator to obtain a list of the customers reporting the fewest problems.

contains all

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results include only records where the data in the column contains all of the values in the filter.

does not contain

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results include only records where the data in the column does not contain any of the values in the filter.

contains any

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value or multiple values. Results include only records where the data in the column contains at least one of the values in the filter.

begins with

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value. Results include only records where the data in the column begins with the value in the filter.

ends with

Valid for a column that contains text, numbers, or dates. Specify a single value. Results include only records where the data in the column ends with the value in the filter.

is LIKE (pattern match)

Valid for a column that contains text. Specify a single value or multiple values. Requires the use of a percent sign character (%) as a wildcard character. You may specify up to two percent sign characters in the value. Results include only records where the data in the column matches the pattern value in the filter.

is not LIKE (pattern match)

Valid for a column that contains text. Specify a single value or multiple values. Requires the use of a percent sign character (%) as a wildcard character. You may specify up to two percent sign characters in the value. Results include only records where the data in the column does not match the pattern value in the filter.

Publishing Views

The ad hoc view definition that you create in View Designer can be published to the Presentation Catalog in BI Answers after you have inserted it in Smart View. When you publish an ad hoc view, a new analysis in BI Answers is created with the default views of compound view and title view, along with the applicable user-created view.

When publishing a view that you were editing, you have the option of overwriting the view in the Oracle BI EE catalog, or specifying a new name for the view and publishing the edited version, keeping two versions of the view in BI Answers.

To publish a view to the Oracle BI EE Presentation Catalog:

1. Position the cursor within the view that you just created or edited in View Designer.

2. In the Oracle BI EE ribbon, click the Publish View icon ( Figure 136, Save as Default Options, Accessed from the OK Button ).

Figure 135. Publish View Icon

3. In Save Report , click next to Catalog Root , and then navigate to the location in the Presentation Catalog where you will save the view.

4. In Analysis Name , provide a name.

If you are publishing an edited view, you have the option of overwriting the view you edited by providing the same name, or providing a new name and keeping the original version of the view intact.

5. Click Save .

The default naming convention is applied to the components of the view that is saved; for example, Table 1, Pivot Table 1, Chart 1, and so on.

Notes

- If you are publishing a view that was created and then edited in Smart View, you may overwrite it.

- An error message is displayed if you attempt to overwrite an existing view in the Presentation Catalog if the view was created in BI Answers.

- Once published, you may make changes to the view in as follows: To view the changes made in BI Answers, you must re-insert the view.

- If the view was created in BI Answers, then use the BI Answers.

- If the view was created in Smart View, you may edit it either in Smart View or BI Answers.

- You may refresh the data in views created in View Designer.

Ad hoc views created in View Designer remain as a snapshot and will not be kept in sync with the analysis published to the catalog.

- Changes made to the view in BI Answers will not be reflected into the ad hoc view that you rendered in Excel. You must reinsert the view from the Presentation Catalog into a new sheet in Smart View in order to view the changes that were made in BI Answers.

Editing Views Created in View Designer

Subtopics

- About Editing Views Created in View Designer

- Guidelines for Editing Views Created in View Designer

- Accessing the View to Edit

- Determining Where a View was Created

- Editing Views that were Created in View Designer

About Editing Views Created in View Designer

Use the View Designer in Smart View to edit the views you created or edited in View Designer.

Do not use the View Designer in Smart View in these cases:

- To edit the views you created in BI Answers

- To edit views you created in Smart View and then edited in BI Answers

The process flow for editing views involves the following tasks:

- Reviewing the information in Guidelines for Editing Views Created in View Designer

- Accessing the View to Edit

- Determining Where a View was Created

- Editing Views that were Created in View Designer

Guidelines for Editing Views Created in View Designer

Only views created and inserted from the View Designer in Smart View can be edited using the View Designer.

Views created in Smart View may also be edited in BI Answers. However, views created in Smart View and then further edited in BI Answers cannot afterward be edited in View Designer.

Note:

To edit views created in BI Answers, use the BI Answers application (see Editing an Analysis in BI Answers ).

Accessing the View to Edit

Note:

This procedure applies to views that were created in View Designer.

To access views to edit:

1. Access a view in one of following ways:

- During the design session —For example, after you created the view in View Designer and clicked OK to insert the view, select the view in the Office document and click the View Designer icon to relaunch the View Designer for editing.

- From a view in a saved Office document —Select the view in the Office document and click the View Designer icon to relaunch the View Designer for editing.

- From a published view in the Presentation Catalog —Use the Load view in View Designer command to load the view from the catalog tree into the View Designer in Smart View. When you select a view, the Load view in View Designer command is available in the Action Panel or from the right-click menu.

Remember, to select a view to edit from the Presentation Catalog, do not try to insert it first into the Office document. Be sure to use the Load view in View Designer command when you want to edit.

2. Continue with the processes described in Determining Where a View was Created to determine if you should edit the view in View Designer.

Note:

Do not use View Designer in Smart View to edit views that were created in BI Answers. Views may not load in cases where the View Designer does not support the formatting and design features that were used to create the view in BI Answers. For this reason, use the View Designer to edit only those views that were created and inserted using the View Designer in Smart View.

Determining Where a View was Created

You need to know if a view was created in the View Designer in Smart View if you want to edit it in Smart View.

If you are unsure whether a view on a sheet was created in Smart View or BI Answers, you can verify the origin of the view in the Document Contents pane.

To determine the origin of a view:

1. Open the Office document containing the view.

2. Locate the view in the Document Contents pane, then right-click the view name, and then select Properties .

3. Check that the value in the View Source field is AdHocDesigner .

The possible values are:

- AdHocDesigner —View originates from the View Designer in Smart View

- Catalog —View originates from the Presentation Catalog in BI Answers

- CopyFromAnswers —View was copied from BI Answers and pasted into the Smart View Office document

The views marked AdHocDesigner are the only views that should be edited in View Designer.

Note that, in some cases, views created in BI Answers may be loaded in to the View Designer in Smart View. Keep in mind that when you attempt to work in View Designer with views from BI Answers, you are doing so at your own risk; editing these views in View Designer is not supported. Oracle only supports using the View Designer to edit those views that were created and edited using the View Designer in Smart View.

4. If the View Source property is AdHocDesigner , the view can be edited in View Designer; continue with the procedures described in Editing Views that were Created in View Designer .

If the View Source is Catalog or CopyFromAnswers , edit the view in BI Answers.

Editing Views that were Created in View Designer

Note:

This topic is about editing views that were created in the View Designer in Smart View. If you are working with views that were created in BI Answers, see Editing Views Created in BI Answers .

When working with views created in the View Designer in Smart View, you can edit the views using either of the following methods:

- Load the view for editing into View Designer in Smart View, as described in Launching the View Designer or About Editing Views Created in View Designer .

You can edit the layout of the view (for example, add or remove columns) or modify the filters. See the following topics for information on editing views in Smart View:

- Defining the View Layout

- Defining the Filter Expression for Views in View Designer

- Open the analysis in BI Answers. See the documentation in BI Answers for assistance. Then insert the updated view into Smart View.

Note:

Once a view is created in View Designer and then edited in BI Answers, Oracle recommends that you only edit it thereafter in Oracle Business Intelligence Answers. You should not use Smart View to edit the view. See What Can and Cannot Be Edited for guidelines.

Refreshing Data in a View Created in View Designer

You may refresh views created in View Designer in the same way you refresh views that were inserted into an Office application from the Presentation Catalog.

See Specifying Preferences for Refreshing Views and Refreshing Views for information.

Smart View Options

In This Section:

Global Options and Sheet Level Options

Member Options

Data Options

Advanced Options

Formatting Options

Cell Styles

Extensions

Global Options and Sheet Level Options

Smart View provides two types of options, global options and sheet options.

- Global Options

- Sheet Options

Global Options

Global options are options that apply to the entire current workbook, including any new worksheets added to the current workbook, and to workbooks that are created henceforth.

Changes to global option settings also affect existing worksheets and workbooks, and other Office documents.

The following are global options:

- Advanced Options

- Extensions

- Cell Styles

Note:

Use the OK button when saving global options. Changes to global options become the default settings for all existing and new worksheets and workbooks so it is not necessary to use Save as Default Options or Apply to All Worksheets with global options. Save as Default Options and Apply to All Worksheets are used with the sheet level option settings only.

Sheet Options

Sheet level options are options that are specific to the worksheet for which they are set. Sheet options are applicable only in Excel. You do not set sheet options in Word or PowerPoint.

Three options are available for saving sheet level options:

- OK —The sheet level option changes apply only to the current sheet in the current workbook. The changes do not apply to existing sheets or to new sheets in the current workbook. They do not affect any existing workbooks or new workbooks.

In PowerPoint or Word, OK only applies to selections made on the Advanced tab (which are global options, not sheet options).

- Save as Default Options —The sheet level options changes are also the default option settings for new worksheets in the current workbook and for any new workbooks, and any other new Office documents. Changes to sheet level option settings do not affect existing worksheets or workbooks.

For example, in Excel, assume you made changes to member options and selected Save as Default Options . You must access each existing worksheet individually, and make those same changes, if you want the changes to be propagated to existing worksheets in the workbook. This allows for different sheet level options on different worksheets. However, the changes are automatically propagated to any new worksheets you create within the current workbook and to any new workbooks.

Note:

The Save as Default Options option is not available in PowerPoint or Word.

- Apply to All Worksheets —The sheet level options changes apply to all existing worksheets with Smart View content within the current workbook. They do not apply to any new worksheets within the current workbook, to other existing workbooks, or to new workbooks.

For example, assume you made changes to member options and selected Apply To All Sheets . The changes are propagated to all existing worksheets with Smart View content within the current workbook. This allows for quick updating of sheet level options in the current workbook. However, these changes are not propagated to any new worksheets in the current workbook, to existing workbooks, or to new workbooks.

Note:

The Apply to All Worksheets option is not available in PowerPoint or Word.

Save as Default Options and Apply to All Worksheets are accessed in Excel by clicking the arrow in the OK button in the Options dialog box (see Figure 136, Save as Default Options, Accessed from the OK Button ).

Figure 136. Save as Default Options, Accessed from the OK Button

The following are sheet level options:

- Member Options

- Data Options

- Formatting Options

Member Options

Subtopics

- Member Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Member Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Member Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

- Member Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Member options are sheet level options, which are specific to the worksheet for which they are set.

Note:

Not all data providers support all the options listed in Table 22 . Refer to the Subtopics listed above to find the options supported for a particular provider.

To set options for the display of member cells as described in Table 22 , click Options on the Smart View ribbon, and then select Member Options in the left panel. When you are finished, make a selection for saving the changes:

- OK

- Save as Default Options

- Apply to All Worksheets

Note:

The Apply to All Worksheets option is not available in PowerPoint or Word.

See Sheet Options for a complete description of the above options.

Table 22. Member Options

Option

Description

General

General

Zoom In Level

From the drop-down menu, select one of the following to specify a default zoom level for ad hoc analysis:

- Next Level to retrieve data for the children of the selected members

- All Levels to retrieve data for all descendants of the selected members

- Bottom Level to retrieve data for the lowest level of members in a dimension

- Sibling Level to retrieve data for all members at the same level as the selected member

- Same Level to retrieve data for the siblings of the selected members

- Same Generation to retrieve data for all members of the same generation as the selected members

- Formulas to retrieve data for all members that are defined by the formula of the selected member. The formula can be a member equation or a consolidation to the parent.

Member Name Display

From the drop-down menu, select one of the following to specify how to display member names in cells:

- Member Name Only to display member names

Essbase and Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud: Note that this is the default when connected to duplicate member databases and launching an ad hoc grid or, for Essbase only, Query Designer. This is the default even if you have chosen the Distinct Member Name option and set it as the default.

Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud: Note that this is the default when connected to duplicate member databases and launching an ad hoc grid. This is the default even if you have chosen the Distinct Member Name option and set it as the default.

- Distinct Member Name to display fully qualified names

- Member Name and Alias to display member names and their aliases

- Description Only to display aliases

Indentation

From the drop-down menu, select one of the following to specify how hierarchy levels are to be indented:

- None

- Subitems to indent descendants. Ancestors are left-justified in the column.

- Totals to indent ancestors. Descendants are left-justified in the column.

Ancestor Position

From the drop-down menu, select one of the following to specify ancestor position in hierarchies:

- Top to display hierarchies in order from highest to lowest level

- Bottom to display hierarchies in order from lowest to highest level

Note:

Essbase does not support the Ancestor Position options.

Member Retention

Member Retention

Include Selection

Display the selected member and the members retrieved as a result of the operation.

Within Selected Group

Perform ad hoc operations only on the selected group of cells, leaving unselected cells as is. This setting is meaningful only when there are two or more dimensions down the grid as rows or across the grid as columns. For Zoom , Keep Only , and Remove Only .

Remove Unselected Groups

For Zoom In or Zoom Out , remove all dimensions and members except the selected member and the members retrieved as a result of zooming.

Comments and Formulas

Comments and Formulas

Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations except pivot

Preserves formulas and comments on the grid during queries. You can clear this option to make queries run faster, but if you do, formulas and comments are removed or ignored.
This option must be selected if you select Formula Fill or Enable Enhanced Comment Handling .

Note:

This option applies to formulas in both member and data cells.

Formula Fill

Propagates formulas associated with member cells to the members retrieved as a result of zooming in.
If Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations except pivot and Use Excel Formatting are both selected, propagates cell formatting to the members retrieved as a result of zooming in.

Note:

This option applies to formulas in both member and data cells.

Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

Enables you to review and correct comments and member names in ad hoc grids that contain comments.

Preserve Formula in POV Change

Preserves formulas in cells when you refresh or make changes to the POV. Otherwise, any formulas in the grid are lost.

The sections that follow list the Member Options supported by provider.

Member Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Table 23. Member Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Zoom In Level: Next Level

No

Yes

Zoom In Level: All Levels

No

Yes

Zoom In Level: Bottom Level

No

Yes

Zoom In Level: Sibling Level

No

No

Zoom In Level: Same Level

No

No

Zoom In Level: Same Generation

No

No

Zoom In Level: Formulas

No

No

Member Name Display: Member Name Only

Yes

Yes

Member Name Display: Distinct Member Name

No

No

Member Name Display: Member Name and Alias

No

No

Member Name Display: Description Only

No

No

Indentation: None

No

Yes

Indentation: Subitems

No

Yes

Indentation: Totals

No

Yes

Ancestor Position: Top

No

Yes

Ancestor Position: Bottom

No

Yes

Include Selection

No

Yes

Within Selected Group

No

Yes

Remove Unselected Groups

No

No

Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations except pivot

- Formula Fill

- Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

No

Supported: Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot)
Not Supported: Formula Fill

Supported: Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

Preserve Formula in POV Change

Yes

No

Member Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Table 24. Member Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Zoom In Level: Next Level

No

Yes

Zoom In Level: All Levels

No

Yes

Zoom In Level: Bottom Level

No

Yes

Zoom In Level: Sibling Level

No

No

Zoom In Level: Same Level

No

No

Zoom In Level: Same Generation

No

No

Zoom In Level: Formulas

No

No

Member Name Display: Member Name Only

Yes

Yes

Member Name Display: Distinct Member Name

No

No

Member Name Display: Member Name and Alias

Yes

Yes

Member Name Display: Description Only

Yes

Yes

Indentation: None

No

Yes

Indentation: Subitems

No

Yes

Indentation: Totals

No

Yes

Ancestor Position: Top

No

Yes

Ancestor Position: Bottom

No

Yes

Include Selection

No

Yes

Within Selected Group

No

Yes

Remove Unselected Groups

No

Yes

Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations except pivot

- Formula Fill

- Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

No

Supported: Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations (except Pivot)
Not Supported: Formula Fill

Supported: Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

Preserve Formula in POV Change

Yes

No

Member Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Table 25. Member Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Option

Ad Hoc

Zoom In Level: Next Level

Yes

Zoom In Level: All Levels

Yes

Zoom In Level: Bottom Level

Yes

Zoom In Level: Sibling Level

Yes

Zoom In Level: Same Level

Yes

Zoom In Level: Same Generation

Yes

Zoom In Level: Formulas

Yes

Member Name Display: Member Name Only

Yes

Member Name Display: Distinct Member Name

Yes

Member Name Display: Member Name and Alias

Yes

Member Name Display: Description Only

No

Indentation: None

Yes

Indentation: Subitems

Yes

Indentation: Totals

Yes

Ancestor Position: Top

No

Ancestor Position: Bottom

No

Include Selection

Yes

Within Selected Group

Yes

Remove Unselected Groups

Yes

Note:

This option is enabled only when the Preserve Formulas Comments in ad hoc operations (except pivot) and Formula Fill options are cleared.

Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations except pivot

- Formula Fill

- Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

Yes

Preserve Formula in POV Change

No

Member Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Table 26. Member Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Option

Ad Hoc

Zoom In Level: Next Level

Yes

Zoom In Level: All Levels

Yes

Zoom In Level: Bottom Level

Yes

Zoom In Level: Sibling Level

No

Zoom In Level: Same Level

No

Zoom In Level: Same Generation

No

Zoom In Level: Formulas

No

Member Name Display: Member Name Only

Yes

Member Name Display: Distinct Member Name

Yes

Member Name Display: Member Name and Alias

No

Member Name Display: Description Only

No

Indentation: None

Yes

Indentation: Subitems

Yes

Indentation: Totals

Yes

Ancestor Position: Top

No

Ancestor Position: Bottom

No

Include Selection

Yes

Within Selected Group

No

Remove Unselected Groups

No

Preserve Formulas and Comments in ad hoc operations except pivot

- Formula Fill

- Enable Enhanced Comment Handling

No

Preserve Formula in POV Change

No

Data Options

Subtopics

- Data Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Data Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Data Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

- Data Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Data options are sheet level options, which are specific to the worksheet for which they are set.

Note:

Not all data providers support all the options listed in Table 27 . Refer to the Subtopics listed earlier to find the options supported for a particular provider.

To set options for the display of data cells as described in Table 27 , click Options on the Smart View ribbon, and then select Data Options in the left panel. When you are finished, make a selection for saving the changes:

- OK

- Save as Default Options

- Apply to All Worksheets

Note:

The Apply to All Worksheets option is not available in PowerPoint or Word.

See Sheet Options for a complete description of the above options.

Table 27. Data Options

Option

Description

Suppress Rows

To streamline the grid, you can suppress rows that contain types of data that you do not need to view.

Note:

In suppressed rows, cell references to Excel formulas are not updated.

No Data/Missing

Suppress rows that contain only cells for which no data exists in the database (no data is not the same as zero. Zero is a data value.) If you later clear No Data/Missing, suppressed values are returned only from that point on. You must zoom out and then zoom in on a member to retrieve values that were suppressed while this option was selected.

Zero

Suppress rows that contain only zeroes.

No Access

Suppress rows that contain data that you do not have the security access to view.

Note:

This option is supported by Financial Management only.

Invalid

Suppress rows that contain only invalid values.

Underscore Characters

Suppress rows that contain underscore characters in member names (not available in Smart Slice operations).

Repeated Members

Suppress rows that contain repeated member names, regardless of grid orientation.

Suppress Columns

To streamline the grid, you can suppress columns that contain types of data that you do not need to view.
Notes:

- In suppressed columns, cell references to Excel formulas are not updated.

- The Suppress Columns options are not available when connected to an Essbase data source.

- The Suppress Columns options are not supported when performing ad hoc with Financial Management data sources.

No Data/Missing

Suppress columns that contain cells for which no data exists in the database (no data is not the same as zero. Zero is a data value.)
If you later clear No Data/Missing, suppressed values are returned only from that point on. You must zoom out and then zoom in on a member to retrieve values that were suppressed while this option was selected.

Zero

Suppress columns that contain only zeroes.

No Access

Suppress columns that contain data that you do not have the security access to view.

Replacement

Replacement

#NoData/Missing Label
#NoAccess Label

#Invalid/Meaningless

Data cells may contain missing or invalid data, or data that you do not have permission to view. In such cells, Smart View by default displays #Missing , #Invalid,or #No Access , respectively, but you can change these labels. To do so, in any of these fields, enter one of the following:

- Text of your choice (or leave the default). Text labels have the advantage of being descriptive, but they cause Excel functions to fail.

- #NumericZero to specify numeric zero (0) replacement labels. With #NumericZero , you can use functions, but you cannot submit zeroes to the database (even if the zeroes are actual zeroes and not replacement labels) unless you select Submit Zero. Calculations that are dependent on a cell with a numeric zero label compute correctly and take the value of the cell as zero.

Submit Zero

Select if you entered #NumericZero above and want to be able to submit zeroes to the database.

Display Invalid Data

Display actual data even if it is invalid, rather than #Invalid/Meaningless or other replacement text. If no data exists, the cell is left blank.

Enable Essbase Format String

If the administrator has created specific formatting for the display of numerical data, view data in this formatting.

Mode

Mode

Cell Display

As an alternative to displaying actual data, you can display the calculation or process status of the cells:

- Data to show actual data

- Calculation Status to show whether data needs to be calculated, translated, or consolidated

- Process Management to show the entities level (Financial Management) or Approvals level for combinations of data called process units (Planning)

Navigate Without Data

Speeds up operations such as Pivot, Zoom, Keep Only, and Remove Only by preventing the calculation of source data while you are navigating. When you are ready to retrieve data, clear Navigate without Data .

Suppress Missing blocks

Suppress blocks of cells for which no data exists in the database.

The sections that follow list the Data Options supported by provider.

Data Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Table 28. Data Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Suppress Rows - No Data / Missing

Yes

Yes

Suppress Rows - Zero

Yes

Yes

Suppress Rows - No Access

Yes

Yes

Invalid

No

No

Underscore Characters

No

No

Repeated Members

No

Yes

Suppress Columns - No Data / Missing

Yes

Yes

Suppress Columns - Zero

Yes

Yes

Suppress Columns - No Access

Yes

Yes

#NoData/Missing Label - #Missing

Yes

Yes

#NoData/Missing Label - #NumericZero

Yes

Yes

#NoAccess Label - #No Access

Yes

Yes

#NoAccess Label - #NumericZero

Yes

Yes

#Invalid/Meaningless -#Invalid

No

No

#Invalid/Meaningless - #NumericZero

No

No

Submit Zero

No

No

Display Invalid Data

No

No

Enable Essbase Format String

No

No

Cell Display

No

No

Navigate Without Data

Yes

Yes

Suppress Missing blocks

Yes

Yes

Data Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Starting with Smart View 11.1.2.5.500 and Financial Management 11.1.2.4.100, when opening a data form, Smart View honors all row and column suppress options set in the Financial Management web interface, overriding any row and column suppress options that may have already been set in Smart View.

Once a form is launched in Smart View, you may then override the suppress options that were set in the Financial Management interface by selecting or clearing the suppress options you require in the Data Options tab of the Options dialog box.

Note that once you launch a form in Smart View, if you choose to overwrite the form on the sheet with an ad hoc grid, the grid will reuse the suppress options that were already set for the previously-opened form. You may then override the selected suppress options as you require.

Table 29. Data Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Suppress Rows - No Data / Missing

Yes

Yes

Suppress Rows - Zero

Yes

Yes

Suppress Rows - No Access

Yes

Yes

Invalid

Yes

Yes

Underscore Characters

Yes

Yes

Repeated Members

No

Yes

Suppress Columns - No Data / Missing

Yes

Yes

Suppress Columns - Zero

Yes

Yes

Suppress Columns - No Access

Yes

Yes

#NoData/Missing Label - #Missing

Yes

Yes

#NoData/Missing Label - #NumericZero

Yes

Yes

#NoAccess Label - #No Access

Yes

Yes

#NoAccess Label - #NumericZero

Yes

Yes

#Invalid/Meaningless -#Invalid

Yes

Yes

#Invalid/Meaningless - #NumericZero

Yes

Yes

Submit Zero

No

No

Display Invalid Data

Yes

Yes

Enable Essbase Format String

No

No

Cell Display - Data

Yes

Yes

Cell Display - Calculation Status

Yes

Yes

Cell Display - Process Management

Yes

Yes

Navigate Without Data

Yes

Yes

Suppress Missing blocks

No

No

Data Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Table 30. Data Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Option

Ad hoc

Suppress Rows - No Data / Missing

Yes

Suppress Rows - Zero

Yes

Suppress Rows - No Access

No

Invalid

No

Underscore Characters

No

Repeated Members

Yes

Suppress Columns - No Data / Missing

No

Suppress Columns - Zero

No

Suppress Columns - No Access

No

#NoData/Missing Label - #Missing

No

#NoData/Missing Label - #NumericZero

No

#NoAccess Label - #No Access

No

#NoAccess Label - #NumericZero

No

#Invalid/Meaningless -#Invalid

No

#Invalid/Meaningless - #NumericZero

No

Submit Zero

Yes

Display Invalid Data

No

Enable Essbase Format String

Yes

Cell Display

No

Navigate Without Data

Yes

Suppress Missing blocks

No

Data Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Table 31. Data Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Option

Ad hoc

Suppress Rows - No Data / Missing

Yes

Suppress Rows - Zero

Yes

Suppress Rows - No Access

No

Invalid

No

Underscore Characters

No

Repeated Members

Yes

Suppress Columns - No Data / Missing

Yes

Suppress Columns - Zero

Yes

Suppress Columns - No Access

No

#NoData/Missing Label - #Missing

Yes

#NoData/Missing Label - #NumericZero

Yes

#NoAccess Label - #No Access

No

#NoAccess Label - #NumericZero

No

#Invalid/Meaningless -#Invalid

No

#Invalid/Meaningless - #NumericZero

No

Submit Zero

No

Display Invalid Data

No

Enable Essbase Format String

No

Cell Display

No

Navigate Without Data

Yes

Suppress Missing blocks

No

Advanced Options

Advanced options are global options, which apply to the entire current workbook, including any new worksheets added to the current workbook, and to any workbooks and worksheets that are created henceforth. Changes to global option settings become the default for all existing and new Microsoft Office documents.

It is not necessary to use Apply to All Worksheets or Save as Default Options with these options.

Note:

Not all data providers support all the options listed in the table.

To set options for the administrative and other advanced tasks as described in Table 32 , click Options on the Smart View ribbon, and then select Advanced in the left panel. When you are finished, click OK .

Table 32. Advanced Options

Option

Description

General

General

Shared Connections URL

Specify a default URL for all connections. Use the following syntax: http://<server>:19000/workspace/SmartViewProviders

Note:

This field must contain an EPM Workspace URL for Smart View online help to be available.

Number of Undo Actions

The number of Undo and Redo actions permitted on an operation (0 through 100).
See Using Undo and Redo .

Number of Most Recently Used Items

The number, 15 or fewer, of your most recently used connections to be displayed on Smart View Home and the Open menu on the Smart View ribbon.

Delete All MRU Items

Delete all items in your most recently used list, including those that are pinned to the list.

Logging

Logging

Log Message Display

All error, warnings, and informational messages from the connected data source are displayed when they occur, but you can choose which of these message levels to record in a log file. Select a message level to display and record:

- Information : All messages, including warnings and errors — recommended to diagnose problems. May adversely impact performance.

- Warnings : Warnings and error level messages. May adversely impact performance.

- Errors : Error messages only — recommended for general use. Has minimal impact on performance.

- None : Suppress all messages.

- Extended Info : Information-level messages plus all server responses and requests. Adversely impacts performance.

Route message to files

Save log messages in a file. Click the ellipsis button to change the location of the log file.

Clear Log File on Next Launch

Clear the log file starting with the next log message generation, which will be seen after Excel is closed.

Tip:

The log file can quickly grow quite large in size, particularly if the message level is set to " Warnings " or " Information ". If Route message to files is selected, and Clear Log File on Next Launch is cleared, you should periodically clear the contents of the Smart View log file manually. The large file size can adversely affect performance.

Show Diagnostics Group on Smart View Ribbon

Displays the Diagnostics group options on the Smart View ribbon.
See Smart View Diagnostics for information on using the diagnostics tools.

Display

Display

Language

Select a xml:lang uage in which to display Smart View. You must restart the Office application when you change xml:lang uages. Default is the xml:lang uage specified when Smart View was installed.

Display Smart View Short Cut Menus Only

Display only Smart View menu items on shortcut menus. Otherwise, shortcut menus display both Excel and Smart View items.

Disable Smart View in Outlook

Disable Smart View in Outlook if you do not want to use Smart View task lists in Outlook.

Enable Ribbon Context Changing

Display the active data provider ribbon automatically after you use a button on the Smart View ribbon.

Disable options that are not valid for the active connection

Disable options in the Options dialog box that are not valid for the active connection.

Display Drill-Through Report ToolTips

Display by default lists of available drill-through reports for cells whenever you mouse over them.

Show Progress Information After (seconds)

Specify the time, in seconds, after which the Smart View Progress status bar appears when an operation begins.

Compatibility

Compatibility

Reduce Excel File Size

Compress the metadata maintained in Excel files containing Smart View workbooks.

Note:

This option pertains to interoperability between different versions of Smart View.

If all users in your organization are on Smart View 9.3.1.6 or higher, then this option should always be selected.

Clear this option in the following situations:

- You send an Excel workbook to users on Smart View releases earlier than 9.3.1.6, or to users on Microsoft Office 2002 and earlier regardless of Smart View release. In these workbooks:

- Grids that contain functions must be refreshed before data can be displayed.

- In ad hoc mode, POV settings are lost; the behavior is similar to that of a fresh ad hoc grid.

- You open a workbook sent from users on Smart View release earlier than 9.3.1.6, or on Microsoft Office 2002 and earlier regardless of Smart View release

Improve Metadata storage

Allow for more efficient storage of internal data structures.
When this option is cleared, Smart View maintains two copies of metadata for compatibility purpose, which may result in slower overall performance.

Note:

This option pertains to interoperability between different versions of Smart View.

If all users in your organization are on Smart View 9.3.1.6 or higher, then this option should always be selected.

Clear this option in the following situations:

- You send an Excel workbook to users on Smart View releases earlier than 9.3.1.6, or to users on Microsoft Office 2002 and earlier, regardless of Smart View release

- You open a workbook sent from users on Smart View releases earlier than 9.3.1.6, or from users on Microsoft Office 2002 and earlier, regardless of Smart View release

Refresh Selected Functions and their dependents

Execute dependent functions on the same sheet before executing the selected functions.

Mode

Mode

Use Double-click for Operations

Double-clicking retrieves the default grid in a blank worksheet and thereafter zooms in or out on the cell contents. If not selected, double-clicking retains standard Excel functionality and puts a cell into edit mode.
If Oracle Essbase Spreadsheet Add-in and Smart View are installed on the same computer and you have not completed the steps in Smart View and Spreadsheet Add-in , double-clicking prompts you to log into Spreadsheet Add-in.

Formatting Options

Subtopics

- Formatting Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Formatting Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Formatting Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

- Formatting Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Formatting options are sheet level options, which are specific to the worksheet for which they are set

Note:

Not all data providers support all the options listed in Table 33 . Refer to the Subtopics listed above to find the options supported for a particular provider.

To set options for cell formatting as described in Table 33 , click Options on the Smart View ribbon, and then select Formatting in the left panel. When you are finished, make a selection for saving the changes:

- OK

- Save as Default Options

- Apply to All Worksheets

Note:

The Apply to All Worksheets option is not available in PowerPoint or Word.

See Sheet Options for a complete description of the above options.

Table 33. Formatting Options

Option

Description

Formatting

Formatting

Use Thousands Separator

Use a comma or other thousands separator in numerical data. Do not use # or $ as the thousands separator in Excel International Options.

Use Cell Styles

Use formatting that is defined in Cell Styles or by the data provider. Overrides any user formatting.
See Cell Styles .

Use Excel Formatting

Use Excel rather than Smart View formatting and retain Excel formatting for ad hoc operations.

Note:

In ad hoc grids for all providers, Excel formatting is not retained when performing an Undo.

Move Formatting on Operations

Copy parent cell formatting to zoomed in cells and retain this formatting even if the cell location changes after an operation.
This option is enabled when Use Excel Formatting is selected.

Note:

Formatting can affect performance, especially during ad hoc operations when Move formatting on operations is enabled.

Retain Numeric Formatting

When you drill down in dimensions, retains the Excel formatting you have set when selecting the Excel Home ribbon, then Format , and then Format Cells . For example, if you chose to display negative numbers in red, then negative values will be displayed in red as you drill down on any member.
This option is enabled when Use Cell Styles is selected.

Adjust Column width

Adjust column widths to fit cell contents automatically.

Scale

Applies to ad hoc and forms. Overrides the setting defined in the form definition.
Choose a positive or negative scaling option, and then click Refresh.

Positive scaling:

Divides original values by factors of 10. For example:

- 1—All original values are divided by 10:

cell value /10

For example, 100/10=10, so 10 will be displayed.

- 2—All original values are divided by 100: cell value /100

For example, 100/100=1, so 1 will be displayed after refresh.

- 3—All original values are divided by 1000:

cell value /1000

For example, 100/1000=0.1, so 0.1 will be displayed after refresh.

The pattern is similar for the remaining positive scaling options.

Note that 0 will be displayed if the Decimal Places option is set to Default or 0. However, for a value such as 0.1 to display, the Decimal Places option must be set to 1.

Negative Scaling:

Multiplies original values by factors of 10. For example:

- -1—All original values are multiplied by 10:

cell value *10

For example, 100*10=1000, so 1000 will be displayed.

- -2—All original values are multiplied by 100: cell value *100

For example, 100*100=10000, so 10000 will be displayed after refresh.

- -3—All original values are multiplied by 1000:

cell value *1000

For example, 100*1000=100000, so 100000 will be displayed after refresh.

The pattern is similar for the remaining negative scaling options.

Note:

Work with the Decimal Places option to achieve the desired display result.

Decimal Places

Applies to ad hoc and forms. Overrides the setting defined in the form definition.
Specify a decimal scale for the data values.

For example, in Smart View, assume the decimal option selected is " 1 ". All values will change one decimal place to the right. If the original value is 50.56, then after refresh the value will be displayed as 50.5. Similarly, if option selected is " 3 ", then the displayed value will be 50.560.

For forms, if Default is selected, then the form definition setting is applicable.

Note:

Work with the Scale option to achieve the desired display result.

Form

Form

Repeat Member Labels

Facilitates the readability of Planning and Financial Management forms by allowing member names to appear on each row of data.
In forms where repeated members are merged into one cell, member names may be out of the screen view, necessitating much back and forth scrolling between the member names and the row data. Selecting Repeat Member Labels helps make forms easier to read and use.

The sections that follow list the Formatting Options supported by provider.

Formatting Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Table 34. Formatting Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Use Thousands Separator

Yes

Yes

Use Cell Styles

Yes

Yes

Use Excel Formatting
—Move Formatting on Operations

No

Yes

Retain Numeric Formatting

Yes

Yes

Adjust Column width

Yes

Yes

Scale

Yes

Yes

Decimal Places

Yes

Yes

Repeat Member Labels

Yes

Yes

Formatting Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Table 35. Formatting Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Use Thousands Separator

Yes

Yes

Use Cell Styles

Yes

Yes

Use Excel Formatting
—Move Formatting on Operations

No

Yes

Retain Numeric Formatting

Yes

Yes

Adjust Column width

Yes

Yes

Scale

Yes

Yes

Decimal Places

Yes

Yes

Repeat Member Labels

Yes

Yes

Formatting Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Table 36. Formatting Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Option

Ad Hoc

Use Thousands Separator

No

Use Cell Styles

Yes

Use Excel Formatting
—Move Formatting on Operations

Yes

Retain Numeric Formatting

No

Adjust Column width

Yes

Scale

Yes

Decimal Places

No

Repeat Member Labels

No

Formatting Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Table 37. Formatting Options Supported for Enterprise Performance Reporting Ad Hoc

Option

Ad Hoc

Use Thousands Separator

No

Use Cell Styles

No

Use Excel Formatting
—Move Formatting on Operations

Yes

Retain Numeric Formatting

Yes

Adjust Column width

Yes

Scale

Yes

Decimal Places

No

Repeat Member Labels

No

Cell Styles

Subtopics

- Cell Style Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

- Cell Style Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

- Cell Style Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Cell style options are global options, which apply to the entire current workbook, including any new worksheets added to the current workbook, and to any workbooks and worksheets that are created henceforth. Changes to global option settings become the default for all existing and new Microsoft Office documents.

It is not necessary to use Apply to All Worksheets or Save as Default Options with these options.

On the Cell Styles page, you can specify formatting to indicate certain types of member and data cells. Because cells may belong to more than one type—a member cell can be both parent and child, for example—you can also set the order of precedence for how cell styles are applied.

Note:

Refer to the Subtopics listed above to find the options supported for a particular provider.

To specify a style:

1. Expand the list of available cell types.

2. Select a cell type.

3. Select Properties and specify a font, background color, or border.

Smart View allows the setting of only one style per cell type.

For example, you may set a background style or a font style for Parent members, but you cannot set both a background and font style for Parent members.

4. To re-order precedence of cell styles, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons or drag and drop the cell styles.

5. Click OK . The setting takes effect after you refresh or perform a drill operation.

6. Optional: To revert cell styles or precedence to the default styles of the connected Smart View provider, click Default Styles.

7. Optional: To set your selections on this page as default settings, click the arrow in the OK button, and then select Save as Default Options .

The sections that follow list the Formatting Options supported by provider.

Note:

There are no cell styles defined for Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud.

Cell Style Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Table 38. Cell Style Options Supported for Planning Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Member cells

Members

Yes

Yes

Formula

Yes

No

Data cells

Locked

Yes

No

Supporting details

Yes

Yes

Read-only

Yes

Yes

Cell Text

Yes

Yes

Document Attachment

Yes

Yes

Writable (lowest priority is recommended)

Yes

Yes

Drill-through

Yes

Yes

Cell Style Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Table 39. Cell Style Options Supported for Financial Management Forms and Ad Hoc

Option

Forms

Ad Hoc

Member cells

Add Member

Yes

No

Linked Form

Yes

No

Members

Yes

Yes

Server Calculated

No

No

Client Calculated

No

No

Data cells

Drill-through

Yes

Yes

Derived

No

Yes

Invalid

Yes

Yes

Locked

N/A

N/A

Impacted

Yes

Yes

Read-only

Yes

Yes

Cell text

Yes

Yes

Writable (lowest priority is recommended)

Yes

Yes

Server Calculated

No

No

Client Calculated

No

No

Supports Allocation

No

No

Cell Style Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Table 40. Cell Style Options Supported for Essbase Ad Hoc

Option

Ad Hoc

Member cells

Attribute

Yes

Dynamic Calculations

Yes

Contains Formula

Yes

Shared

Yes

Child

Yes

Parent

Yes

Duplicate Member

Yes

Member Drill-through

Yes

Data cells

Drill-through

Yes

Read-only

Yes

Writable (lowest priority is recommended)

Yes

Linked Objects

Yes

Extensions

Extension options are global options—set from Excel, Word, or PowerPoint—which apply to the entire current document, including any new worksheets added to the current workbook, new slides added to the current presentation, or new pages added to the current document, and to all Microsoft Office documents that are created henceforth, including Excel workbooks and worksheets, PowerPoint presentations and slides, and Word documents. Changes to global option settings become the default for all existing and new Microsoft Office documents.

The first time users open the Extensions tab of the Options dialog box, it contains a list of the extensions that are currently installed to leverage Smart View functionality for other Oracle products. See Supported Extensions for a complete list of supported extensions. Other extensions that can be downloaded and installed are made visible using the Check for Updates, New Installs, and Uninstalls link on the dialog box.

From Excel, Word, or PowerPoint, complete these tasks in the Extensions tab:

- Enabling and Disabling Extensions

- Initially Checking for Available Extensions

- Installing Extensions

- Updating Extensions

- Enabling Logging for Extension Installations

- Overriding the Default URL for the Extension Download

- Uninstalling Extensions

Note:

You can enable and disable extensions, and install, update, and uninstall extensions from Excel, PowerPoint, or Word.

It is not necessary to use Apply to All Worksheets or Save as Default Options with these options.

Supported Extensions

There are two types of extensions that can be installed with Smart View, provider extensions and per-user extensions.

Provider Extensions

Provider extensions are dependent on, or integrated with, EPM System server components. Examples are the Oracle Hyperion Disclosure Management and Financial Reporting extensions.

Smart View supports provider extensions for the following EPM System products:

- Oracle Hyperion Disclosure Management

- Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting

- Oracle Hyperion Strategic Finance

- Predictive Planning extension for Planning

- Oracle Planning Admin Extension for Planning

- Crystal Ball EPM

- Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

- Oracle BI EE

- Oracle Journals for Financial Management

Of the extensions listed above, only Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Oracle BI EE, and Oracle Journals are documented in this guide. All other extensions are documented in the applicable Oracle product guide.

The above extensions, except for Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Oracle BI EE, and Oracle Journals, are documented in the applicable Oracle product guide. Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud, Oracle BI EE, and Oracle Journals are documented in this guide.

The following extensions are packaged with Smart View:

- Smart Query

- Oracle BI EE

Note:

The Oracle BI EE extension installs differently than other extensions. See Installing the Oracle BI EE Extension for details.

The Smart Query and Oracle BI EE extensions are documented in this guide.

Per-user Extensions

Per-user extensions are not dependent on EPM System server components. Per-user extensions may be extensions created in-house by your Smart View administrator or extensions that the administrator has obtained from Oracle or another organization.

All installed extensions, whether packaged with Smart View or not, should be enabled automatically when you start Smart View. See Enabling and Disabling Extensions .

Per-user extensions are not documented in this guide.

Refer to the following sections for information on installing, updating, and uninstalling extensions.

Enabling and Disabling Extensions

To enable an extension:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. Locate the extension in the list and select the Enable check box.

After you select the check box, the label changes to Enabled .

3. Optional: To disable an extension, locate the extension in the list and clear the Enabled check box.

Initially Checking for Available Extensions

After Smart View is first installed, complete the procedure in this topic to check for all available extensions.

Complete the procedure in Updating Extensions to check for updates to your installed extensions.

Note:

Your Smart View system administrator controls the extensions available for you to install, and whether installation is automatic or optional.

To check for extensions after first installing Smart View:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. Click the Check for Updates, New Installs, and Uninstalls link.

Smart View checks for all extensions that your administrator has made available to you.

3. Perform an action:

- Follow the prompts to close and reopen the Office application.

If your administrator has set up extensions to automatically install after checking for updates, and closing and reopening Office, then you do not need to do anything further.

- If your administrator has set up optional extension installation, then follow the instructions in Installing Extensions .

Installing Extensions

If an extension is available for you to install, you can install it from the Extensions tab of the Options dialog box.

Note:

Your Smart View system administrator controls which extensions are available to you, and whether installation is automatic or optional. If installation is automatic, then you need only follow the instructions in Initially Checking for Available Extensions . If installation is optional, follow the instructions in this topic.

Additionally, the Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition extension installs differently than other extensions. See Installing the Oracle BI EE Extension for details.

To install an extension:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. Click the Check for Updates, New Installs, and Uninstalls link.

Smart View checks for any new or updated extensions and required extensions.

3. Review the list of extensions and where you see , click the Install link to launch the installer.

Required per-user extensions are designated as follows:

4. Follow the prompts to install the extension.

Updating Extensions

If an extension is available for you to update, you can update it from the Extensions tab of the Options dialog box.

Note:

Your Smart View system administrator controls the extensions available to you and your options for updating extensions. If installation is automatic, then you need only complete step 1 and step 2 in this topic. If installation is optional, complete all the steps in this topic.

To check for extension updates and install them:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. To update extensions, perform one of these tasks:

- Click the Check for Updates, New Installs, and Uninstalls link to immediately check for updates to all your available extensions and any new extensions.

- Select the Check for updates when Microsoft Office starts check box.

Smart View performs a check for extension updates each time you start an Office application.

3. Perform an action:

- If your administrator has set up extensions to automatically install after checking for updates, follow the prompts to close and reopen the Office application.

You do not need to do anything further.

- If your administrator has set up optional extension installation updates, then continue with step 4 .

4. Review the list of extensions and where you see , click the Update Available link to launch the installer.

5. Follow the prompts to install the extension.

When updates are available, you are prompted to download the extension installer, close the Office application, and run the installer.

After restarting the Office application, the extension appears as Enabled in the Extensions page of the Options dialog box.

Enabling Logging for Extension Installations

To create a log of the extension installation process:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. Select the Enable logging for extension installations check box.

3. In the Advanced tab of the Options dialog box, complete these steps:

a. Ensure that the Log Message Display level is set to at least Warnings .

b. Select the Route Messages to File check box and note the location of the log file.

4. Proceed to install or update an extension, as described in Installing Extensions and Updating Extensions .

Overriding the Default URL for the Extension Download

Your Smart View administrator may move an extension installer to a non-default location and then notify you of the installer location. If this happens, complete the following procedure.

Note:

The non-default location of an extension installer can be a URL, or a local or network folder.

To override the default download URL or folder location:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. Select the Override default download URL check box.

The text box and browse button are activated, as shown in Figure 137, Override Default Download URL Check Box .

Figure 137. Override Default Download URL Check Box

3. Enter a URL in the text box, or click and navigate to the local folder or the network folder specified by your Smart View administrator.

The UpdateList.xml file is automatically appended to either the URL or the folder specified.

Uninstalling Extensions

The Remove link, , appears next to any extension names that you are authorized to uninstall.

Note:

Your Smart View administrator determines which extensions you are authorized to uninstall.

To uninstall an extension:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then Extensions .

2. Click the Check for Updates, New Installs, and Uninstalls link.

Smart View checks for any extensions that can be removed.

3. In the extensions list, locate the extension to uninstall and click the Remove link, .

You are prompted that the extension will be uninstalled when the Office application is restarted. All Office applications must be closed to completely remove the extension.

4. Close all Office applications, including Outlook, and restart.

Functions

In This Section:

Using Functions

Creating Functions

Running Functions

Fixing Links in Functions

Copying and Pasting HsGetValue Functions

Function Descriptions

Common Function Error Codes

Using Functions

Note:

In this chapter, references to Planning apply to both the on-premises and Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud versions of Planning.

If you are familiar with the contents of your database, you can use the Smart View functions described in Table 41 to perform operations on specific data in Excel cells.

Note:

When using the Smart View functions in Table 41 , do not use the hash mark ( # ) or the semicolon ( ; ) in member names, dimension names, or variable names. These characters are reserved for delimiters in the functions noted in this chapter.

Table 41. Smart View Functions and Supported Providers

Function

Description

Supported Providers

HsGetValue

Retrieves data from a data source.

- Financial Management

- Essbase

- Planning

- Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

- Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

- Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsSetValue

Sends values to the data source.

- Financial Management

- Essbase

- Planning

- Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

- Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsGetSheetInfo

Retrieves detailed information about the current worksheet.

Provider-independent

HsCurrency

Retrieves the entity currency for the selected members.

- Financial Management

- Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsDescription

Displays the description for the default member.

- Financial Management

- Essbase

- Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsLabel

Displays the label for the default member.

- Financial Management

- Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsGetText

Retrieves cell text from the data source.

- Financial Management

- Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsSetText

Sends cell text to the data source.

- Financial Management

- Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsGetVariable

Retrieves the associated value for a substitution variable.

Essbase

Creating Functions

You can create functions manually or by using the Function Builder.

Note that not all functions are available to all providers. See Table 41, Smart View Functions and Supported Providers for a list of functions and the supported providers.

- Creating Functions in the Function Builder

- Creating Functions Manually

Creating Functions in the Function Builder

In the Function Builder, you select a function and specify the connection and members that you want the function to use. The Function Builder then creates the function using the proper syntax and enters it into the selected cell. You can edit these functions.

The selections available to you in a given Function Builder field are limited by your selections in other fields of the Function Builder. For example, only the connections supported by the selected function are displayed, and only the dimensions supported by the function you select are displayed.

A cell reference can be selected for each function argument. If you know argument input values, you can create functions in offline mode. Type-in functionality is available for each argument.

Function Descriptions

Note:

You can use functions that were created in the Function Builder prior to Release 11.1.2.2.310. However, starting with Release 11.1.2.2.310, the Function Builder uses commas (,) to separate member list arguments rather than semicolons (;). Both characters are supported by the new Function Builder, but when you modify a function created in the previous version, you are prompted to convert to the new comma-separated format. If you choose not to convert, then none of your modifications to the function are applied.

To create functions using the Function Builder:

1. Connect to the appropriate data source.

Function Builder supports shared or private connections.

Essbase: If you are using a private connection, and your function is going to use an alias table, you must verify that the correct alias table or the " Default " alias table is set for the connection. In the Smart View Panel, right-click the database name, and select Set alias table . Ensure that the correct alias table is selected, and then refresh the sheet.

2. In the sheet, select the cell in which you want to enter the function.

3. In the Smart View Panel, navigate to the database on which you want to base the function, right-click the database name, and then select Build Function .

Accessing the Function Builder in this way will prepopulate the Connection field of the Function Arguments dialog box with specific connection information, as described in step 4 .

Alternatively, from the Smart View ribbon, select Functions, and then Build Function .

When you access the Function Builder in this way, the Connection field in the Function Arguments dialog box is blank. You may provide connection information, as described in step 4 . Or, if there is an active connection on the sheet, select HSACTIVE from the drop-down list.

4. In Select Function , select a function from the list and click OK .

Figure 138. Function Builder, Select Function Dialog Box

Note:

Not all functions are available to all providers. See Table 41, Smart View Functions and Supported Providers for a list of functions and the supported providers.

The Function Arguments dialog box is displayed with the Connection field automatically populated with connection information in one of the following formats.

- For shared connections:

WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database

The WSFN parameter above signifies that this function is a Workspace function and uses a shared connection.

- For private connections:

PrivateConnectionName

To manually enter the connection info, use the syntax above.

5. In Function Arguments , for each argument in the selected function, do one of the following:

- Click the right-most button, .

For example, for HsGetValue, click to select members from Member Selection ; for HsLabel and HsGetVariable, select from drop-down lists of labels or variables.

Essbase only: Note that when variable names are duplicated, their fully qualified name is displayed in the drop-down list. This helps to identify variables defined at the global, application, and database levels.

- To type arguments manually, enter the argument in the text box. For example, to type a member, use the format: dimension#member; such as Year#Qtr1 or Year#Jan .

- To use cell references, follow the procedure in Using Cell References .

Figure 139, Function Builder, Function Arguments Dialog Box for HsGetValue Based on the Essbase Sample Basic Database shows a completed Function Arguments dialog box for the HsGetValue function.

Figure 139. Function Builder, Function Arguments Dialog Box for HsGetValue Based on the Essbase Sample Basic Database

The arguments listed in Function Arguments vary depending on the function selected in step 4 .

Notes:

- For HsGetSheetInfo, use a cell reference. See Using Cell References for more information.

- For HsSetValue only: Select Data or Cell Reference and enter the value to submit.

- For HsGetText and HsSetText only:

- Select Comments or Cell Reference , and then enter the cell text to submit

- Select Cell Text Label , and then select a label from the drop-down menu

- If an active worksheet connection is available, you can select HSACTIVE from the Connection drop-down list.

6. Click Validate and correct any errors that may be noted.

Some of the errors you may see are:

- Connection offline or invalid

- Invalid selection

- Member name is invalid or not matching selected alias

- Dimension name is invalid or not matching selected alias

- Incomplete Dimension#Member combination

- Generic " Error " in cases of missing quotation marks or other minor syntax errors

Figure 140, Function Builder Validation Errors shows errors in the Function Arguments dialog box with after clicking the Validate button. In the following example from the Financial Management Simple application, there are errors in the syntax for two of the Dimension#Member combinations. The first error is that the Dimension name is invalid or not matching the selected alias. The second error is that the member name is invalid or not matching the selected alias.

Figure 140. Function Builder Validation Errors

7. When the function validation is successful, click OK to insert the function in the selected cell.

8. To execute the function, follow the procedure in Running Functions .

Using Cell References

You can enter references to single cells for connection, label, data/text, or variable arguments. You can also enter references to two contiguous or noncontiguous cells for dimension/member references. References cannot be made to cell ranges of more than two cells.

To use cell references:

1. Follow step 1 through step 5 in the preceding procedure.

2. In the Function Arguments dialog box, for each argument in the selected function, click the Cell Reference button, .

Depending on the type of argument selected, a Cell Reference dialog box is displayed.

- If you select a connection, label, data/text, or variable argument, the Select Single Cell Reference dialog box is displayed.

Figure 141. Select Single Cell Reference Dialog Box

- If you select a member list argument, the Cell Reference dialog box for a dimension and member name cell reference is displayed.

Figure 142. Dimension and Member Name Cell Reference Dialog Box

3. In the grid, perform an action:

- For the Single Cell Reference dialog box, depending on the type of argument, click a single cell to reference; for example, a cell containing a variable.

Figure 143, Cell Reference Dialog Box with Single Cell for Label Argument Selected shows the Single Cell Reference dialog box with a cell selected for a label argument.

Figure 143. Cell Reference Dialog Box with Single Cell for Label Argument Selected

- For the Dimension and Member Name Cell Reference dialog box, do one of the following:

- Click a single cell to reference; for example, a cell that contains both a dimension and a member name.

- Pressing the Ctrl key, select two contiguous or noncontiguous cells; for example, a dimension and a member cell.

You may press Ctrl , click in two cells from different areas of the worksheet or two adjacent cells. Each cell selection much be performed by a single click while the Ctrl key is still pressed.

Figure 144, Cell Reference Dialog Box with Two Noncontiguous Cells Selected shows the Dimension and Member Name Cell Reference dialog box with two noncontiguous cells selected.

Figure 144. Cell Reference Dialog Box with Two Noncontiguous Cells Selected

4. Click OK in the Cell Reference dialog box.

In Function Arguments , the text field for the argument contains the referenced cell or cells in the format shown in Table 42 .

Table 42. Cell Reference Formats

Cell Reference

Format in Function Arguments

Single cell

""&A3&""
See " Notes " below this table for a full explanation.

Two contiguous cells

""&A3&"#"&B3&""

Two noncontiguous cells

""&A5&"#"&B9&""

Notes:

- For a single cell reference, if the member name that you selected in step 3 is displayed as dimension#member in the grid, then the argument selection is complete. For example, if the member is displayed in the grid as Year#Qtr 2 in cell A3, then ""&A3&"" is complete.

If only the member name is displayed in the grid, then you must manually enter the dimension name followed by # between the first two sets of double quotation marks. For example, if the member is displayed as Qtr2 in cell A3, then you must enter Year# between the quotation marks: "Year#"&A3&""

- If an argument text field contains text before you select a reference cell, the cell reference text is appended to this text. Therefore, delete any unwanted text in the field before selecting a cell for reference.

5. Click OK to insert the function in the selected cell.

6. Refresh.

Creating Functions Manually

See Microsoft documentation and support site for information about character and other Excel function limitations.

To create a function manually:

1. In Excel, click the cell in which you want to enter the function.

2. Enter = (equal sign).

3. Enter the function name, HsSetValue, for example.

4. Enter parameters for the function according to rules described in Syntax Guidelines , using the information specific to each function in Function Descriptions .

5. To refresh the worksheet, from the Smart View menu, select Refresh.

Functions are validated only when you refresh them.

Syntax Guidelines

See Function Descriptions for the syntax of individual functions.

- To work with a shared connection, you must add to the function the WSFN identifier, which specifies a workspace function, along with a connection string. The format is:

WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database

For example, in the HsGetValue function for a shared connection to an Essbase data source, the WSFN identifier and connection string is added to the function as follows:

=HsGetValue("WSFN|Essbase|myserver|Sample|Basic","Market#South")

For ProviderType , use one of the following case-sensitive strings:

- Essbase

- HFM (for Financial Management)

- HP (for Planning)

For Financial Management, the Database parameter can be omitted, or it can be the same as the Application parameter. For consistency, Oracle recommends entering the application name for the Database parameter.

- Private connection parameters can have these values:

- Empty : the default connection

- HsActive : the active associated connection

- The user-defined name for a private connection

If you specify a private connection, it must precede the POV.

- The POV is composed of dimension#member pairs, for example, Entity#Connecticut.

- Parent-child relationships are designated by a period, for example, Entity#UnitedStates.Maine.

- The connection and POV can be grouped as one parameter, for example "My_connection;Entity#UnitedStates".

Alternatively, they can be split up into multiple function parameters, for example, "My_connection", "Entity#UnitedStates", "Account#Sales".

- If the connection and POV are in the same parameter, the connection and each dimension#member pair are separated by a semicolon (;), for example, "My_connection;Entity#UnitedStates;Account#Sales".

Running Functions

When a worksheet that contains saved functions is opened on a different computer from the one on which it was created, the functions include the full path of the original computer. Smart View automatically updates these function paths when you open the worksheet if all three of the following conditions are met. Otherwise, you must manually update functions using the Excel Links option.

- The worksheet is unprotected.

- The Excel option Ask to update automatic links is cleared.

- When you open a workbook, if prompted to update link automatically, select Continue or Cancel . Do not select Edit Links .

To run functions and retrieve values:

1. Open the worksheet that contains the functions you want to run.

2. Do one of the following:

- For HsSetValue, from the Smart View ribbon, select Submit Data .

- For other functions, select one:

- To run functions and update all worksheets in the workbook, from the Smart View ribbon, select Refresh all Worksheets.

- To run functions and update only the active worksheet, select Refresh .

Fixing Links in Functions

When you uninstall Smart View on one drive and install it on another drive, or send a Smart View file to a user who installs it on a different drive, you may need to fix broken links in functions.

To fix broken links in functions:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select the arrow next to Functions .

2. From the drop-down menu, select Fix Links .

Copying and Pasting HsGetValue Functions

You may copy cells and ranges of cells containing the HsGetValue function from one Office application and paste them into Excel, Word or PowerPoint.

Note these guidelines when copying and pasting functions:

- Only cells containing the HsGetValue function may be copied and pasted. You may not copy and paste cells containing other functions.

- The data point generated will use the connection-level alias.

- Any cell references in the function will be replaced with its evaluated values. For example, if a function contains "Year#""&A2&"" for the dim#member combination, and cell A2 contains "Qtr2" , then the function generated will have "Year#Qtr2" as the extracted value.

- Any POV changes applied on the data point query from the POV Manager will be applied only to the dimensions not present in the data point.

- Function XML may be exported from legacy applications.

- The following copy/paste scenarios are supported:

- Functions from a single connection with no cell references.

- Functions from a single connection with cell references.

- Functions from multiple connections

- Visualize in Excel—a grid with single intersection will be generated using the function POV.

- Functions with case insensitive connection names.

- The following copy/paste scenarios are NOT supported:

- Functions from an ad hoc grid (these will be pasted as static values).

- Nested formulas.

- Formulas with arithmetic operations; for example, divide or multiply.

- Other Excel functions; for example, IF or SUM.

To copy and paste functions:

1. Select the cell or range of cells to copy and perform an action:

- In Excel, click

- In Word and PowerPoint, click

2. If not already open, launch the Office application to which you want to paste the copied function cells.

3. Perform an action:

- In Excel, select the cell where the copied functions will be pasted and, in the Smart View ribbon, click .

- In Word or PowerPoint, place the cursor at the point in the page or slide where the copied function will pasted and, in the Smart View ribbon, click

4. Refresh the sheet, page, or slide.

Function Descriptions

Smart View provides the following functions. Click a function name below to access description, syntax, and examples.

HsGetValue : Retrieves data from a data source for a given Point of View.

HsSetValue : Sends values to the data source for a given Point of View.

HsGetSheetInfo : Retrieves detailed information about the current worksheet.

HsCurrency : Retrieves the entity currency for the selected members.

HsDescription : Displays the description for the default Point of View member.

HsLabel : Displays the label for the default Point of View member.

HsGetText : Retrieves cell text from the data source.

HsSetText : Sends cell text to the data source.

HsGetVariable : Retrieves the value for a substitution variable.

HsGetValue

Data sources: Financial Management, Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only), Oracle Enterprise Performance Reporting Cloud

HsGetValue retrieves data from the data source for selected members of a dimension.

When HsGetValue retrieves no data, the value specified for the #NoData/Missing Label replacement option is used (see Table 27, Data Options ).

When users select Refresh or Refresh All, only HsGetValue is called. When users select Submit, HsSetValue is called first, HsGetValue is then called only if HsSetValue returns successfully.

Syntax

Private connection:

HsGetValue("
PrivateConnectionName
","
POV
")

Shared connection:

HsGetValue("WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database
","
POV
")

Example

In this example, HsGetValue returns the value from the HFM01 application for the default POV.

Private connection:

HsGetValue("HFM01";"Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;Period#July;View#YTD;
Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;Value#USD;Account#Sales;ICP#[ICP
None];Custom1#GolfBalls;Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None];
Custom4#Increases")

Shared connection:

HsGetValue("WSFN|HFM|hfm_svr|HFM01|HFM01";"Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;Period#July;
View#YTD;Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;Value#USD;Account#Sales;ICP#[ICP
None];Custom1#GolfBalls;Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None];Custom4#Increases")

HsSetValue

Data sources: Financial Management, Essbase, Planning; Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsSetValue sends a data value from a worksheet to a data source selected members of a dimension. To send data to a data source, you must have the appropriate load rule and write access for the data source.

Syntax

Private connection:

HsSetValue (dollar amount,"
PrivateConnectionName
","
POV
")

Shared connection:

HsSetValue (dollar amount,"WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database
","
POV
")

Example

In this example, HsSetValue sends the value from cell H4 to the HFM01 application.

Private connection:

HsSetValue(H4, "HFM01","Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;Period#"&B$2&";View#<Scenario View>;Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;Value#<Entity Currency>;Account#"&$A4&";ICP#[ICP None];Custom1#GolfBalls;Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None];Custom4#
Increases")

Shared connection:

HsSetValue(H4, "WSFN|HFM|hfm_svr|HFM01|HFM01","Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;Period#"&B$2&";View#<Scenario View>;Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;Value#<Entity Currency>;Account#"&$A4&";ICP#[ICP None];Custom1#GolfBalls;Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None];Custom4#
Increases")

HsGetSheetInfo

Data sources: Provider-independent

HsGetSheetInfo retrieves detailed information about the current worksheet, as described in Table 43 .

Table 43. HsGetSheetInfo Details

Numerical Equivalent

String Equivalent

Sheet Information

1

Connected

Connection status

2

Sheet Type

Ad hoc or form

3

Server

The server to which the sheet is connected

4

Application

The application to which the sheet is connected

5

Cube

The cube to which the sheet is connected

6

URL

The URL to which the sheet is connected

7

Provider

The data source type to which the sheet is connected

8

Provider URL

The provider to which the sheet is connected; applicable for Oracle Hyperion Provider Services connections

9

Friendly Name

The data source connection name

10

Alias Table

The current alias table

11

User

The user name

12

Description

The connection description

Syntax

HsGetSheetInfo("<string equivalent>")
HsGetSheetInfo("<numerical equivalent>")

Example

In this example, HsGetSheetInfo tells you whether the worksheet contains an ad hoc grid or a form.

HsGetSheetInfo("Sheet Type")

HsCurrency

Data sources: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsCurrency retrieves the currency value of the specified dimension member. Entity and Value are the only valid members for the HsCurrency function.

Syntax

Private connection:

HsCurrency("
PrivateConnectionName
,
Entity
;
Value
")

Shared connection:

HsCurrency("WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database
,Entity
Member
;Value
Member
")

Note:

Hyperion Enterprise does not use the Value dimension

Example

In this example, HsCurrency retrieves the entity currency where the currency for the East Sales entity is USD, and the currency for the UKSales entity is GBR. The EastSales entity displays USD, and UKSales displays GBR.

Private connection:

HsCurrency("Comma","Entity#EastRegion.EastSales;Value#<Entity Currency>.")
HsCurrency("Comma","Entity#EastRegion.UKSales;Value#<Entity Currency>.")

Shared connection:

HsCurrency("WSFN|HFM|hfm_svr|Comma|Comma","Entity#EastRegion.EastSales;Value#<Entity Currency>.")
HsCurrency("Comma","Entity#EastRegion.UKSales;Value#<Entity Currency>.")

HsDescription

Data sources: Financial Management, Essbase, Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsDescription displays the alias of the specified dimension member.

Syntax

Private connection:

HsDescription ("
PrivateConnectionName
","
Dimension
#
Member
")

Shared connection:

HsDescription ("WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database
","
Dimension
#
Member
")

Example

In this example, HsDescription displays the description for Custom 4.

Private connection:

HsDescription("HFM01","Custom4#Increases")

Shared connection:

HsDescription("WSFN|HFM|hfm_svr|HFM01|HFM01","Custom4#Increases")

HsLabel

Data sources: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsLabel displays the default member label for the specified dimension member.

Syntax

Private connection:

HsLabel ("
PrivateConnectionName
","
Dimension
#")

Shared connection:

HsLabel ("WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database
","
Dimension
#")

Example

In this example, HsLabel function retrieves the label for the Scenario dimension in the Comma application:

Private connection:

HsLabel ("Comma","Scenario#")

Shared connection:

HsLabel ("WSFN|HFM|hfm_svr|Comma|Comma","Scenario#")

HsGetText

Data sources: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsGetText retrieves cell text from the data source for dimension members, cell references, the default POV, or a combination of all three.

Note:

Users must click Refresh in order to retrieve the cell text.

Syntax

Private connection:

HsGetText ("
PrivateConnectionName
","
POV
","
CellTextLabel
")

Shared connection:

HsGetText ("WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database
","
POV
","
CellTextLabel
")

Example

In this example, HsGetText returns the cell text from the HFM01 data source for the default POV.

Private connection:

HsGetText("HFM01","Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;Period#"&B$2&";View#
<Scenario View>;Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;Value#<Entity Currency>;Account#"&$A3&";ICP#[ICP None];Custom1#GolfBalls;Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None],Custom4#
Increases")

Shared connection:

HsGetText("WSFN|HFM|hfm_svr|HFM01|HFM01","Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;Period#"&B$2&";View#
<Scenario View>;Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;Value#<Entity Currency>;Account#"&$A3&";ICP#[ICP None];Custom1#GolfBalls;Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None],Custom4#
Increases")

HsSetText

Data sources: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise (private connection only)

HsSetText sends cell text to a data source. You can use all dimension members, cell references, the default POV, or a combination of all three.

Note:

Users must click Submit Data in order to save the cell text.

Syntax

Private connection:

HsSetText("
CellTextComments
","
PrivateConnectionName
","
POV
","
CellTextLabel
")

Shared connection:

HsSetText("
CellTextComments
","WSFN|
ProviderType
|
Server
|
Application
|
Database
","
POV
","
CellTextLabel
")

Example

In this example, HsSetText sends the text from cell H3 to the HFM01 application.

Private connection:

HsSetText("H3","HFM01","Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;Period#"&B$2&";View#<Scenario View>;
Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;Value#<Entity Currency>;Account#"&$A3&";ICP#[ICP None];
Custom1#GolfBalls;Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None],Custom4#Increases")

Shared connection:

HsSetText("H3","WSFN|HFM|hfm_svr|HFM01|HFM01","Scenario#Actual;Year#2004;
Period#"&B$2&";View#<Scenario View>;Entity#UnitedStates.Connecticut;
Value#<Entity Currency>;Account#"&$A3&";ICP#[ICP None];Custom1#GolfBalls;
Custom2#Customer2;Custom3#[None],Custom4#Increases")

HsGetVariable

Data sources: Essbase

HsGetVariable retrieves the associated value for a substitution variable.

You cannot use HsGetVariable with Smart Slices.

Syntax

HsGetVariable can use the default connection name, a private connection name, a shared connection, or an Excel named range on a multiple-range grid, as follows:

- Default connection: HsGetVariable(" substitution variable name ")

- Private connection: HsGetVariable(" PrivateConnectionName "," substitution variable name ")

- Shared connection: HsGetVariable("WSFN| ProviderType | Server | Application | Database "," substitution variable name ")

- Named range on a multiple-range grid: HsGetVariable(" range name "," substitution variable name ")

Examples

- Default connection: HsGetVariable("CurMonth")

- Private connection: HsGetVariable("stm10026_Sample_Basic","CurMonth")

- Shared connection: HsGetVariable("WSFN|Essbase|esbsvr|Sample|Basic","CurMonth"

- Named range: HsGetVariable("stm10026_Sample_Basic","CurMonth")

Note:

An ampersand (&) is generally used to refer to a substitution variable, but is optional in this function.

Common Function Error Codes

Some common error codes displayed in functions:

#NO CONNECTION - You are not connected or logged on to a data source.

#INVALID - Invalid metadata. Invalid cells that contain a value display the value as zero.

#LOCKED - The cell is locked.

#NO ACCESS - You do not have access to this cell.

#NO DATA - The cell contains NoData. You can select to display zeros instead of NoData. Cells use the Replacement text that you specify in the Options dialog box.

#INVALID INPUT - The HsSetValue data value is not valid, for example, a text string.

#READ ONLY - This is for the HsSetValue function only when the cell is Read-only.

#NO ROLE ACCESS - You do not have the Financial Management LoadExcelData security role.

#NEEDS REFRESH - Data needs to be refreshed.

#INVALID DIMENSION - An invalid dimension is specified in the function.

#INVALID MEMBER - An invalid dimension member name is specified in the function.

#NAME - Excel does not recognize text in a formula. When you forward a worksheet that contains functions to a user who does not have Smart View, they can view the same data as the functions on the worksheet. When the user edits or refreshes the function, it changes to #Name.

Free-Form Mode

In This Section:

About Free-Form Mode

Free-Form Guidelines

Free-Form Grid Examples

Comments in Free-Form Grids

Formulas in Free-Form Grids

Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Grids

Creating Free-Form Reports

Retrieving Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Mode

Creating Asymmetric Reports

Actions That May Cause Unexpected Behavior

About Free-Form Mode

In ad hoc analysis, if you are familiar with the dimensions and members of your database, you can use free-form mode by typing dimension and member names directly into cells. You can still use the POV, member selection, and other ad hoc operations in free-form grids.

The components of Smart View grids are described in Table 44 .

Table 44. Smart View Grid Components

Grid Component

Description

Row Dimension

A dimension or member placed down one column across one or more rows in a worksheet

Column Dimension

A dimension or member placed on a row across one or more columns in a worksheet

Page Dimension

A dimension that applies to the entire page (Essbase only)

Comments

Text added by the user

Data Region

Areas of the grid that contain data for dimensions or members

Blank Region

Areas of the worksheet that contain no entries

Related Topics:

Free-Form Guidelines

Free-Form Grid Examples

Comments in Free-Form Grids

Formulas in Free-Form Grids

Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Grids

Creating Free-Form Reports

Retrieving Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Mode

Creating Asymmetric Reports

Actions That May Cause Unexpected Behavior

Free-Form Guidelines

- Grids do not need to start in cell A1.

- A grid must have at least one row dimension and one column dimension.

- Each row dimension can contain members of only one dimension. Each column dimension can contain members of only one dimension.

- Members of one dimension can be entered only in one of the following regions:

- In the same row

- In the same column

- Anywhere in the page dimension region (Essbase only)

- The page dimension region can contain members of different dimensions, but no two members in the page dimension region can belong to the same dimension (Essbase only).

- Dimensions entered into the page dimension region override any corresponding default or existing dimensions in the page dimension region. For example, if the page dimension contains a Year dimension, and you enter Qtr1, then Qtr replaces Year in the page dimension (Essbase only).

- The replacement labels specified in the Data Options page of Smart View Options apply in free-form mode.

- Numerical entries are identified as data in the data region, and as comments outside the data region. If you want to use a number as a member name, precede it with a single quotation mark; for example, 100.

- Precede member names that contain spaces between words with a single quotation mark.

- When connected to a database that supports duplicate member names, select Distinct Member Name on the Member Options page of the Smart View Options dialog box to display fully qualified member names in the worksheet. To enter duplicate members, use this syntax for qualified member names:

[Income].[Other]
[Expenses].[Other]

- Aliases from the current alias table are permitted in free-form grids, but aliases from other alias tables are treated as comments.

- For Hyperion Enterprise data sources, you cannot type dimension names in the free-form grids. You can type only member names.

- Dynamic Time Series members (Essbase) must use one of the following formats:

- Q-T-D(Jan)

- Y-T-D(Mar)

- M-T-D(Jun)

Free-Form Grid Examples

Subtopics

- Simple Grids

- Column Dimensions

- Stacked Dimensions

Simple Grids

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

Simple Grids in Essbase

Starting with the 11.1.2.1.102 release of Essbase and Smart View, free-form behavior is such that the POV members are placed on the first row of an Excel sheet. Column and row dimension members are placed on the grid starting after the POV row rows. As with Spreadsheet Add-in before, this means that all the POV members become part of the grid.

Figure 145, Simple Grid in Essbase with Only Column and Row Dimensions shows a valid simple grid in Essbase, where Year is the row dimension, and Measures is the column dimension, beginning in row 1.

Figure 145. Simple Grid in Essbase with Only Column and Row Dimensions

Figure 146, Result of Ad Hoc Analysis Command on Simple Grid in Essbase shows what happens after clicking Refresh in a connected sheet. As described previously, row 1 is populated with the POV dimensions of Product, Market and Scenario. The row and column dimensions begin on row 2.

Figure 146. Result of Ad Hoc Analysis Command on Simple Grid in Essbase

Figure 147, Simple Grid in Essbase with Dimension in Row 1 shows a valid simple grid in Essbase, where Product is the page dimension in row 1. Year is the row dimension and Measures is the column dimension, beginning on row 2.

Figure 147. Simple Grid in Essbase with Dimension in Row 1

Figure 148, Result of Ad Hoc Analysis Command on Simple Grid in Essbase with Dimension in Row 1 shows what happens after clicking Refresh in a connected sheet. In this case, because the Product dimension was already placed on the sheet, it is moved to row 2. The POV dimensions are placed on row 1. The row and column dimensions begin on row 3.

Figure 148. Result of Ad Hoc Analysis Command on Simple Grid in Essbase with Dimension in Row 1

Simple Grid in Planning

Figure 149, Simple Grid in Planning shows a valid simple grid in Planning, where Year is the row dimension and Account is the column dimension.

Figure 149. Simple Grid in Planning

Two Column By Two Row Layout

Figure 150, Two Columns by Two Rows Layout is a basic two columns by two rows layout showing the Product and Market dimensions in the first row and column, and members of Sales and Year in the second row and column.

Figure 150. Two Columns by Two Rows Layout

Column Dimensions

Data source types: Essbase

Column Dimensions Interpreted as Page Dimensions

When there is one row dimension and multiple members, all of different dimensions, in the same top row, the left-most dimension in the row is treated as column dimension and the others as page dimensions. Figure 151, Column and Page Dimensions in the First Row shows a valid grid in which Year is the row dimension, Measure is the column dimension, and Product and Market are page dimensions.

Figure 151. Column and Page Dimensions in the First Row

The first members of each column dimension must occur on the same column, and the first members of every row dimension must occur on the same row. Figure 152, Invalid Placement in Column is invalid because cell B2 is on the first column of the column dimensions and must be a member of the Measures dimension, whereas it is a comment.

Figure 152. Invalid Placement in Column

Stacked Dimensions

Data source types: Essbase

The first row that contains multiple members of the same dimension is a column dimension. All dimensions placed above this row are candidates for page dimension if they comply with the rules for page dimension. However, dimensions above this column dimension that are in the same column (" stacked ") and have no other members are column dimensions and not page dimensions. Such grids are not valid.

In Figure 153, Stacked Dimensions as Page Dimensions , Product is a column dimension that is stacked on Profit; Market is a page dimension, because it is not stacked on Profit. Scenario is a page dimension, even though it is stacked on Profit, because its row is above a page dimension.

Figure 153. Stacked Dimensions as Page Dimensions

In Figure 154, Invalid Stacked Column , Product and Market are stacked above a column dimension and contain no other members. Therefore, this grid is not valid.

Figure 154. Invalid Stacked Column

Comments in Free-Form Grids

Subtopics

- Comments in Blank Rows and Columns

- Grid with Complex Comments

- Invalid Placement of Comments

- Comments Inside and Outside of Grid Boundaries

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

Note:

Essbase: You cannot add comments on worksheets that are enabled for multiple grids.

Comments can be placed as follows:

- Between row dimensions

- Between column dimensions

- Between page dimensions

- Between dimensions and data cells

- Interleaved with members of page dimensions

- Interleaved with members of row, column and page dimensions

Further, comment rows and comment columns can be interleaved with row and column dimensions.

- To the left, right, top, bottom of the grid.

Comments cannot be placed in data cells or in cells that intersect row and column dimensions in the upper right corner.

When working with comments:

- In Financial Management, comments will shift with Zoom in and Zoom Out operations, depending on the row or column.

- In Planning or Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, comments are supported both inside and outside of the grid boundaries.

Note:

Comments are not saved to the provider server in the free-form worksheet. For example, if you use the Save Ad Hoc Grid command with a Planning free-form or ad hoc grid, the formulas are not saved. However, you can retain the comments in a worksheet by performing a Save in Excel and saving the workbook.

For information about unexpected behavior that may occur, see Actions That May Cause Unexpected Behavior .

Related Topics:

Comments in Blank Rows and Columns

Grid with Complex Comments

Invalid Placement of Comments

Comments Inside and Outside of Grid Boundaries

Comments in Blank Rows and Columns

Data source types: Essbase, Financial Management

Figure 155, Comments in Blank Rows and Columns shows a grid with comments in cells A5, A6, C1, C2, C10, D1, D2, D10, H5, and H6. These comments are retained in retrieval and zoom operations.

Figure 155. Comments in Blank Rows and Columns

Grid with Complex Comments

Data source types: Essbase

Figure 156, Grid with Complex Comments shows an example of a combination of the page region, attributes, and comments on a single grid.

Figure 156. Grid with Complex Comments

Invalid Placement of Comments

Data source types: Essbase

Row and column dimension regions can be interleaved with comment rows and comment columns. Figure 157, Invalid Placement of Comments shows a grid that is invalid because the comment in cell C2 does not belong to either a comment row or a comment column. (Both row 2 and column C have dimension members.)

Figure 157. Invalid Placement of Comments

Comments Inside and Outside of Grid Boundaries

Data source types: Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

Figure 158, Grid with Comments Inside Grid Boundaries shows a grid with a comment in cell B5, inside the grid boundaries. These comments are retained in retrieval and zoom operations, but are not saved in Planning.

Figure 158. Grid with Comments Inside Grid Boundaries

Figure 159, Grid with Comments Outside of Grid Boundaries shows a grid with comments in cells A3, and C1, outside of the grid boundaries. These comments are retained in retrieval and zoom operations, but are not saved in Planning.

Figure 159. Grid with Comments Outside of Grid Boundaries

Formulas in Free-Form Grids

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management

You can enter Excel formulas in cells that can contain comments.

Note:

Excel formulas are not saved to the provider server in the free-form worksheet. For example, if you use the Save Ad Hoc Grid command with a Planning free-form or ad hoc grid, the formulas are not saved. However, you can retain formulas in a worksheet by performing a Save in Excel and saving the workbook.

Figure 160, Formulas in Essbase Free-Form Grid in Excel shows a grid from an Essbase data source with Excel formulas in cells C8 and F8.

Figure 160. Formulas in Essbase Free-Form Grid in Excel

Figure 161, Formulas in Planning Free-Form Grid in Excel shows a grid from a Planning data source with Excel formulas in cells B8 and C7.

Figure 161. Formulas in Planning Free-Form Grid in Excel

For information about unexpected behavior that may occur, see Actions That May Cause Unexpected Behavior .

Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Grids

Data source types: Essbase

Figure 162, Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Grids shows an example of both page region and attribute usage. In this example, Pkg Type (an attribute dimension attached to the base member Product) and Budget are page dimensions. By drilling down on Pkg Type you can do attribute based analysis on measures as it relates to specific Product attributes. This can be further used to create a cross-tab analysis of product SKUs by attribute.

Figure 162. Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Grids

Alternatively, to quickly add attribute dimensions onto a free-form grid, follow the instructions in Inserting Essbase Attribute Dimensions on the Sheet . You can then use the member selection instructions in the Dimensions and Members to select and work with members from the attribute dimensions.

Creating Free-Form Reports

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud, Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

To construct a free-form report:

1. Open a worksheet and connect to a data source.

2. In the worksheet, enter member names according to the rules specified in Free-Form Guidelines .

3. Members may have duplicate names (for example, both East and West markets may contain a member named Portland — Maine and Oregon). To enter a duplicate member name:

- In Essbase, use Member Selection to select members.

- In Financial Management, the Member Name Resolution window is displayed if the member you enter has a duplicate. From the drop-down list, select the dimension of the member you entered and click OK . Repeat as necessary.

4. Refresh the grid, or select Ad hoc analysis .

5. Perform further ad hoc operations and formatting as needed.

Retrieving Attribute Dimensions in Free-Form Mode

Data source types: Essbase

In structured grid processing operations, attribute dimensions are not shown. In free-form, you can type an attribute dimension member in the grid and it will be processed and validated. Only the attribute dimension member that you added will be displayed and used during processing and validation; the remaining attribute dimension members will not be included. Structured grid operations that follow this free-form request will retain the attribute dimension member.

If the base dimension exists in the worksheet, you can also retrieve an attribute member by typing the name directly in the worksheet.

Note:

Hyperion Enterprise does not support Attribute dimensions.

To retrieve an attribute dimension in free-form using Member Selection:

1. In a blank worksheet, select a cell.(The worksheet must be blank.)

2. From the data source ribbon, select Member Selection .

3. In the Dimension Name Resolution dialog box, select the attribute dimension.

4. To orient members vertically in the worksheet starting from the cell you selected in step 3 , select the Vertical Orientation check box.

This check box is cleared by default; meaning that members will be oriented horizontally across the sheet from the cell you selected in step 3 .

5. Click OK to launch the Member Selection dialog box.

6. Select the members to place on the worksheet.

Note:

You can also add attribute dimensions and members to the sheet.

Creating Asymmetric Reports

Data source types: Essbase, Planning, Oracle Planning and Budgeting Cloud

Reports can contain symmetric or asymmetric column groups. The symmetry the symmetry of column groups is determined automatically, based on the members you select.

Symmetric reports, as shown in Figure 163, Symmetric Report , are characterized by repeating, identical groups of members.

Figure 163. Symmetric Report

Asymmetric reports, as shown in Figure 164, Asymmetric Report , are characterized by groups of nested members that differ by at least one member. There can be a difference in the number of members or in the names of members.

Figure 164. Asymmetric Report

You can create asymmetric reports as follows:

- Enter member names in free-form mode.

- Zoom in with Within Selected Group selected on the Member Options page of the Options dialog box.

- Suppress rows that contain missing values, zero values, or underscore characters during data retrievals.

Note:

Retrieving data into an asymmetric report may take a long time on large reports.

Actions That May Cause Unexpected Behavior

Smart View tries to preserve all comments, formulas, and customized report layouts. Some exceptions that may result in unexpected behavior are when the following actions are performed:

- Zoom in on a page dimension

- Pivot a dimension from the POV to a row or column

- Drag and drop a dimension from the POV to the worksheet

- Pivot a row dimension to a column dimension

- Switch the location of a row dimension to another row

- Switch the location of a column dimension to another column

- Change member aliases using the Change Alias Table command

- In Essbase or Hyperion Enterprise data sources, cutting and pasting from Microsoft Word into an Excel worksheet may cause unexpected behavior because of hidden characters. If this happens, contact your administrator, who can identify the issue through logs.

Smart View Diagnostics

In This Section:

About Smart View Diagnostics

Displaying the Diagnostics Group in the Smart View Ribbon

Customizing Diagnostics Features

Using the Smart View Diagnostics Tools

Cleaning Up the Diagnostics Folder

About Smart View Diagnostics

When an issue arises while using Smart View, an issue you cannot resolve on your own, you can use the tools in the Diagnostics group in the Smart View ribbon to create and collect files and screenshots to send to Oracle Support. The files and screenshots you collect are used by Oracle Support to troubleshoot and resolve your issue.

Related Topics:

Displaying the Diagnostics Group in the Smart View Ribbon

Customizing Diagnostics Features

Using the Smart View Diagnostics Tools

Cleaning Up the Diagnostics Folder

Displaying the Diagnostics Group in the Smart View Ribbon

You can choose to display or hide the Diagnostics options in the Smart View ribbon. In first-time Smart View installations, the Diagnostics options are not displayed.

To display the Diagnostics group of options:

1. Open the Office application where you are experiencing the issue.

2. From the Smart View ribbon, select Options , and then select the Advanced tab.

3. In Advanced , select Show Diagnostics Group on Smart View Ribbon , and then click OK to close the Options dialog box.

The Diagnostics group is automatically displayed in the Smart View ribbon (see Figure 165, Tools in the Diagnostics Group in the Smart View Ribbon ). You do not need to the restart the Office application.

Figure 165. Tools in the Diagnostics Group in the Smart View Ribbon

4. Repeat this procedure in each Office application where you are experiencing the issue.

Note:

You must enable the Diagnostics group in each Office application individually. The Diagnostics group will not display in other Office applications until you enable it.

5. Optional: When finished using the Diagnostics tools, to hide the Diagnostics group in the Smart View ribbon, clear the Show Diagnostics Ribbon Tab check box in the Advanced tab of the Options dialog box.

Customizing Diagnostics Features

You can customize certain features of the Diagnostics tools. The procedure in this topics walks you through each of the options available in the Diagnostic Options dialog box

Note:

All steps in the following procedure are optional.

To customize the Diagnostics tools:

1. In the Diagnostics group in the Smart View ribbon, select Diagnostics Options .

The Diagnostics Options is displayed, as shown in Figure 166, Diagnostics Options Dialog Box .

Figure 166. Diagnostics Options Dialog Box

2. To hide data values in the Office document, select Mask Data .

Select this option if data values in your output should be hidden for confidentiality purposes.

3. To hide member names in the Office document, select Mask Members .

Select this option if member names in your output should be hidden for confidentiality purposes.

4. To direct the diagnostics output files to a folder other than the default, in Route diagnostics output to , click and navigate to the folder location to store the files.

You can also enter the folder location manually.

The default folder location is:

C:\Users\
username
.
domain
\AppData\Roaming\Oracle\SmartView\Diagnostics

5. To allow automatic screenshots for each warning or error message that is displayed, select an option:

- Errors

- Warnings

If you do not want automatic screenshots, select Never (the default).

6. Click Save to save your option selections.

Using the Smart View Diagnostics Tools

Use the Smart View Diagnostic tools to collect data about your issue in the form of log files and screenshots. The data you collect is stored in a session folder (either in the default diagnostics folder location or a location you designate in Customizing Diagnostics Features ). When you are finished collecting diagnostic data, you use the diagnostic tools to zip up the files. Then you transmit the ZIP file to Oracle Support for analysis.

The procedure in this topic explains how to collect the diagnostic data, zip it up, and forward it to Oracle Support.

To use the Smart View Diagnostics tools:

1. Click .

When you click , a message is displayed regarding restarting Microsoft Office. You are not required to restart Office; however, Oracle recommends that you do so. Restarting Office enables the diagnostics tools to collect more information, including the steps that led to the issue you may be experiencing.

Note:

After you click the , the button toggles to .

2. If you restarted Office, perform the steps in Smart View that led to the issue you are diagnosing.

3. Click to take screenshots that you feel will be helpful in documenting your issue.

Note:

The screenshot includes the entire screen, not just the application. Be sure to minimize any confidential information that you may have on your screen so that it is not included in the screenshot.

4. Click to save the currently-opened Office document to the diagnostics folder for the current session.

You can perform multiple saves of the document, if necessary. Oracle recommends that you save the document at different points during the work you are doing in order to best demonstrate and show your issue. Each time you save, Smart View adds a suffix to the file name, (0), (1), (2), etc.; no documents are overwritten.

The documents are stored in the current diagnostics session folder; the default location is:

C:\Users\
username
.
domain
\AppData\Roaming\Oracle\SmartView\Diagnostics

5. When you are finished gathering the diagnostics you require to adequately document your issue for Oracle Support, click and in the Create Archive dialog box, specify a folder to store the archive and a file name, or use the default folder location and file name.

The files are stored in your systems My Documents folder as follows:

My Documents\Documents

The file is named in the following format:

SmartView_Diagnostics_
ddmmyyyy
.zip

6. Email the diagnostics zip file to your Oracle support representative.

Cleaning Up the Diagnostics Folder

Once you have transmitted your diagnostics zip file to Oracle, you can clear the files in the diagnostics folder.

Note:

Clearing the diagnostics folder while Diagnostics is running clears all folders except for the current session folders for currently-opened Microsoft Office applications. Clearing the diagnostics folder when Diagnostics is not running clears all diagnostics folders, including all the latest session folders.

Clearing All Diagnostics Folders Except the Current Session Folders

To clear all diagnostics folders except the current session folders:

1. Verify that Diagnostics is running.

2. Click .

This action clears all diagnostics folders except those created for the currently-running Office applications.

Clearing All Diagnostic Folders, Including the Latest Session Folders

To clear all diagnostics folders, including the latest session folders:

1. If you have not already done so, in the Diagnostics group in the Smart View ribbon, click .

2. Close any opened Office applications, including the one in which you are experiencing an issue.

3. Open any Office application and click .

This action clears all diagnostics folders including the latest session folders for Office applications.

Using Other Applications with Smart View

In This Section:

Crystal Ball EPM

Smart View and Spreadsheet Add-in

Migrating Functions

These are applications that you can use with Smart View if you hold the appropriate licenses for them.

Crystal Ball EPM

You use Crystal Ball EPM to analyze data from Smart View data sources in simulation and forecasting workbooks. These are Excel workbooks that contain one or more worksheets with a Crystal Ball EPM model and one or more other worksheets, each of which may be connected to any of the supported data sources. They are stored in a centralized EPM Workspace repository and can be accessed and managed through the Smart View Panel.

For more information, see the Crystal Ball EPM documentation set.

Working with Crystal Ball EPM Workbooks

Toolbar Operations

Working with Crystal Ball EPM Workbooks

Permissions set by the EPM Workspace administrator govern simulation and forecasting workbooks operations that you can perform from the Smart View Panel.

To work with data in a Crystal Ball EPM workbook:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select Panel .

2. In the Smart View Panel, click and select Simulation Workbook .

3. Click and if requested, log in to the Crystal Ball EPM repository. A tree list containing the workbooks for which you have permission is displayed.

4. Double-click a workbook to open.

5. Perform Crystal Ball EPM operations as described in the Crystal Ball EPM product documentation.

Oracle recommends keeping the Oracle Crystal Ball Enterprise Performance Management model on a worksheet separate from data source worksheets.

6. Click Submit Data if needed.

Toolbar Operations

Toolbar Operations

Use Simulation Workbook toolbar buttons to perform the following operations on workbooks and folders in the tree list.

- Connect to a repository

- Add, save, and delete workbooks

- Add and rename folders

The characters listed in Table 45 are not allowed in folder names.

Table 45. List of Restricted Character in Folder Names

Character

Description

\

backslash

/

forward slash

%

percent sign

?

question mark

+

plus sign

<

less than sign

>

greater than sign

|

vertical bar

single quotation mark

"

double quotation mark

*

asterisk

:

colon

- Refresh the tree list

- Set options to specify where workbook files are to be stored and the EPM Workspace agent with which to communicate (these options apply across all sessions running on the server). To do so, click Options and enter this information:

- URL : the Web Services agent URL. Use this syntax: http://<host>/raframework/services/BiPlus

- Folder : the name of the repository folder to contain the workbook file

Repository Options

Set options to specify where workbook files are to be stored and the EPM Workspace agent with which to communicate (these options apply across all sessions running on the server).

- URL : the Web Services agent URL. Use this syntax: http://<host>/raframework/services/BiPlus

- Folder : the name of the repository folder to contain the workbook file

Smart View and Spreadsheet Add-in

When both Smart View and Spreadsheet Add-in are installed on the same computer, mouse actions are interpreted as Spreadsheet Add-in commands. If you want Smart View to control mouse commands instead, you can instruct Spreadsheet Add-in to respond to commands only in Essbase connections that were established through Spreadsheet Add-in.

To enable Smart View to control mouse commands:

1. Open Excel.

2. Select Essbase, then Options , and then Global .

3. Select Limit to Connected Sheets .

4. Click OK .

Smart View will control mouse commands unless the connection to Oracle Essbase is established through Spreadsheet Add-in and not Smart View.

Note:

You can connect to data sources from Smart View and Oracle Essbase Spreadsheet Add-in in the same workbook but not on the same worksheet.

Migrating Functions

Functions in Financial Management and Hyperion Enterprise can be converted to current Smart View syntax with the migration utility.

Note:

The Smart View function migration utility is not supported on 64-bit Office. Microsoft is expected to address this issue. Until then, use the 32-bit version of Office.

Converting Workbooks

Converting One Workbook

Converting Multiple Workbooks

Migrating Connections for Functions

Converting Workbooks

You can convert workbooks that contain Financial Management Retrieve Data functions or Hyperion Enterprise HP Retrieve and VBA Retrieve functions by using the migration utility. For example, you can convert Financial Management functions such as HFMVal, HFMLnk, HFMLab, HFMDes, and HFMCur and Hyperion Enterprise functions such as HPVal, HPLnk, HPCur, HPHea, HPCde, and HPFul.

The utility might not be able to convert all of your functions. Some functions might require manual adjustment.

For functions that use cell references, the following functions are converted:

- If every parameter in the function is a cell reference. For example: =HFMVal($B$1&$C$1&$B$2&$C$3&$B$5&$C$5&$B$6&$C$6).

- If the dimension parameters are specified in the function, the members are cell references, but the period separator is hard coded in the function. For example: =HFMVal("S#"&D2&".Y#"&D3&".VW#"&D5&".’)

The following functions that use cell references are not converted:

- If the dimension parameters are specified in the function and the members and period separator are cell references. For example: =HFMVal("S#"&E2&"Y#"&E3&"VW#"&E5), where E2=Actual, E3=2004, E5="<Scenario View>."

- If the dimension parameters are specified in the function, the members are cell references, but the period separator is in a separate cell, the function is not converted. For example: =HFMVal("S#"&F2&C1&"Y#"&F3&C1&"VW#&F5&C1), where C1=. (period separator).

- If the application specified in the function is a cell reference.

- If any cell in a workbook contains more than 1024 characters, the workbook does not convert properly. To reduce the size of data in cell, reference multiple functions, or remove dimensions that can be set in the background POV.

Before you run the migration utility, ensure that the path is correct (the default path is MIDDLEWARE_HOME\EPMSystem11R1\common\empstatic\wsspace\ ). During migration, Excel inserts the original path of the add-in file to functions. This can make the functions too long and cause errors. Excel limits Smart View functions to a maximum of 256 characters.

Converting One Workbook

Data source types: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

To convert a workbook:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select More , then Migrate Active Workbook (Financial Management) or Migrate Active Workbook (Hyperion Enterprise) .

If your functions contain application references, you must map the application to the corresponding connection.

2. Click Convert , then OK.

3. Migration results are displayed, including a list of any functions that failed to convert. You can manually adjust those functions.

4. To save the conversion results, click Save Result .

5. Select a location to store the results file, and click Save .

6. Click Close .

Converting Multiple Workbooks

Data source types: Financial Management, Hyperion Enterprise

To convert multiple workbooks:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select More , then Migrate Batch (Financial Management) or Migrate Batch (Hyperion Enterprise) .

2. In the Migration Wizard, click Add and select the workbooks that you want to convert.

3. Click Next . If your functions contain application references, you must map the application to the connection.

Migration results are displayed, including a list of any functions that failed to convert. You can manually adjust those functions.

4. In Oracle Hyperion Enterprise®, converted workbooks are automatically saved in the location of the original workbooks. In Financial Management, click Save Result .

5. Select a location for the results file and click Save .

6. Click Done .

Migrating Connections for Functions

In Financial Management, you can select a connection or connection reference for functions that do not contain an application reference when you migrate to Smart View.

To migrate connections for functions:

1. From the Smart View ribbon, select More , then Migrate Active Connections (HFM) .

2. From Function Migration — Application reference , select an option:

- Do not update functions with a connection reference .

- Add connection name to existing functions , then select a connection name from the Connection Name list. This updates all functions with the specified connection name.

- Update functions with reference to connection list within selected worksheet , then in Cell Reference, enter the cell to reference, for example, A2. This updates all functions with a cell reference in the current worksheet.

- Update functions with reference to connection list on a new worksheet , then enter the Worksheet name, and Cell Reference. This updates all functions with a cell reference to a different worksheet in the workbook.

Tip:

You can create a drop-down list in any cell to be used as a reference within functions to refer to a connection name. From the Smart View ribbon, select More , then Insert Connection List to display a list of connections from which to choose in the current cell.

3. Click OK .

Finding Information

In This Section:

Smart View Accessibility

Smart View VBA Functions

Data Sources and Other Products

Using Oracle User Productivity Kit

Smart View Accessibility

Information about Smart View accessibility features is available in the Oracle Smart View for Office Accessibility Guide . This guide is available on the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help and then Documentation .

Smart View VBA Functions

Information about Smart View VBA functions is available in the Oracle Smart View for Office Developers Guide . This guide is available in the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help and then Documentation ,

Data Sources and Other Products

In general, this guide provides only procedural information for using the data provider features that Smart View supports. For detailed information about the data providers and other products, see the product documentation available on the Oracle Help Center. To open this library, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help and then Documentation .

Using Oracle User Productivity Kit

If the Oracle User Productivity Kit (UPK) is deployed and Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Workspace is configured by an Administrator with a valid URL for the UPK Player package, users can access UPK content for EPM System. For more information on configuring UPK, see the " Workspace Server Settings " section in the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Workspace Administrators Guide and the Oracle User Productivity Kit In-Application Support guide.

Note:

There are pre built UPK content modules available. See the data sheets that include UPK for Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System available on Oracle.com, http://www.oracle.com/us/products/applications/tutor-upk/064788.html . Financial Management and Planning modules include appropriate content for Smart View and Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio. Oracle Hyperion Financial Management and Oracle Hyperion Planning support invoking UPK content in a context sensitive manner. UPK content launched from Smart View or Reporting Studio launches the full player package outline unfiltered for context. Reporting Studio and Smart View users can utilize a roles filter to see only the Oracle Smart View for Office or Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio content.

To open UPK Help, from the Smart View ribbon, click the arrow next to Help , and then select Oracle User Productivity Kit.